Home

Magento Community Edition User Guide v. 1.8.1

1. 15 99 Add to Wishlist 41 95 Add to Compare a Add to Wishlist Add to Wishlist Add to Compare Add to Compare Figure 37 Sort By Drop down list Grid List View By selecting the Grid or List links at the top of the page a customer can choose to view products displayed in a grid table as shown in Figure 37 or as a list as shown in Figure 38 44 Introducing the Frontend View as Grid List a Sort by t Anashria Womens Fremier Leather Sandal kik 4 Review s Add Your Review Buckle embellished contrasting straps adorn both the heel and canvas covered wedge ofthis tstrap sandal to make ita truly unique addition to your wardrobe Learn Wore Add to Wishlist Add to Compare ASICS Men s GEL Kayano XII diii The ASICS GEL Kayano all running shoe delivers the ultimate blend of cushioning and Support Learn More Add to Wishlist Add to Compare Figure 38 List View Recently Viewed The RECENTLY VIEWED PRODUCTS area see Figure 39 lists the products that were recently viewed by the customer whether they were purchased or not and enables the customer to easily link back to them RECENTLY VIEWED PRODUCTS CN Clogs Beach Garden Clo Anashria Womens Premier Leather andal olof The Rock And Roll Destrower LOL Cat T shirt Figure 39 Recently Viewed Products Area Promotional Information Magento CE provides a variety of aspects of product presentati
2. Complete Orders marked as complete have fully been invoiced and have shipped Canceled The order can be of this status if the customer calls your web store and asks to cancel an order if the order has not been paid for The store administrator can create custom order statuses assign them to order states and set default status values for order states Product type Magento CE classifies products as one of several predefined product types Simple Product Virtual Product Downloadable Product Grouped Product Configurable Product Bundle Product Related product Related products are offered to the customer for purchase in addition to the item that the customer is viewing Scope Scope describes the extent of your store hierarchy to which a given setting is effective A setting can have a scope of Global all websites stores and store views Website the selected website and all stores and store views under it Store the selected store and all store views under it and Store View the selected store view Some settings that are set at a higher level can be overridden at a lower level Search Engine Optimization SEO The set of techniques and strategies that ensure that your site is listed prominently in search engine results thereby increasing the likelihood that customers will find your site Simple product This is the most basic product type It is suitable for all kinds of physical shipped products Shipment
3. Summary This extension is providing inquiry form Integrates the FACT Finder for improved product search functionality HEM Simpleshipping simple shipping methods generator Validate addresses customers enter in the one page checkout or the address book using the UPS AVX API This extension changes the way that the pricing of configurable products works in Magento With this extension the price for configurable products is taken directly from the associated simple products rather than the configurable product itself ao build from scratch to work Figure 247 Magento Connect Manager Page Click the Check for Upgrades button If there are upgrades available for any of the Magento CE modules they are marked in yellow In the Actions column select the upgrades to be installed and click the Commit Changes button Wait until the installation has finished and click the Return to Admin link in the header Congratulations You have just upgraded your Magento CE Now check your site to make sure everything works as expected 231 Keeping Your Store Healthy Extending Magento There are hundreds of payment gateways and shipping providers all over the world Magento CE out of the box supports a few of the most popular ones However community members are developing and publishing new extensions in order to extend Magento CE with various new features If you need to add functionality to Magento CE you should
4. Categories Furniture Electronics Figure 47 Web Store Header This header also provides a variety of functions on the right as follows My Account Enables registered customers to access their order history track their shipments download products and change address information My Wish List Enables customers to define a list of items that they may want to purchase in the future They can also share their wish list with their friends My Cart Enables customers to see the products that they have selected to purchase Checkout Enables customers to start the checkout process in order to specify payment billing and shipping information Log In Enables customers to identify themselves Log Out Enables customers to log out of their accounts The Footer The bottom of each of your web store pages includes a footer see Figure 48 AboutUs Customer Service Site Map Search Terms Advanced Search Orders and Returns Contact Us Help Us to Keep Magento Healthy Report All Bugs ver 1 6 0 0 2011 Magento Demo Store All Rights Reserved Figure 48 Web Store Footer This footer generally provides links to various informational and functional pages in the site such as Contact Us and the Site Map 51 Introducing the Frontend Purchasing Functionality Wishlist The Wishlist feature enables customers to pick out products which they are interested in but not ready to order yet Products ca
5. Please Select E VIEW Inventory URL key GLOB Websites Visibility Catalog Search EVIE Categories Related Products Manufacturer GLOBAL Up sells Color SLOB Cross sells Set Product as New from Date lea SLOB Custom Options Set Product as New to Date SLOB Country of Manufacture v VEBSITE In feed No v GLOBAL Figure 95 General Tab General Tab Fill in all the mandatory fields which are indicated by a red asterisk e Name The product name as it appears in the frontend SKU The product s store keeping unit SKU Magento CE uses SKU as a unique identifier for this product SKU is global meaning if you update the SKU for a product in one web store it updates in all other web stores as well Weight The product s weight This value is usually used for shipping calculations Specify only the number Shipping service providers will interpret it according to the measurement units they use Status Select Enabled to make this product available on the frontend Tax Class The tax class of the product See Product Tax Class page 135 for more information Visibility Determines whether the product is displayed in the catalog pages and or search results The following options are available o Not Visible Individually The product will not be displayed individually in the frontend however it can be a component of a composite configurable bundle or grouped product o Catalog The product will
6. Cameras Cell Phones Computer CPU Default Furniture Hard Drive Monitors RAM Shirts General Shirts Other Shirts T Shoes Warranties Figure 89 Manage Attribute Sets Page Note Figure 89 shows the attribute sets that are provided in Magento s Sample Data Note The Default attribute set is composed mostly of system attributes This attribute set is typically inherited by all other attribute sets Click the Add New Set button to display the Add New Attribute Set page Figure 90 amp Add New Attribute Set Back Name For internal use Based On Default Nj Figure 90 Add New Attribute Set Page In the Name field specify the name of this attribute set This name is used only in the backend In the Based On field select another attribute set from which this attribute set is to inherit This enables you to reuse the attributes that are already defined in a set to build other attribute sets The simple option is to leave the Default option that appears in this field Click Save Attribute Set to display the Edit Attribute Set page Figure 91 93 Setting Up Your Catalog 94 Groups Unassigned Attributes bna TA Shoes 5 activation_information 5 f computer_manufacturers Double click on a group to rename it contrast_ratio aH General 5 country_orgin amp Prices cpu_speed aE Meta Information dimension a Images finish a Descriptions harddrive_speed Shoe Attributes hardrive s
7. Dynamic directives parsing impacts catalog performance Figure 259 Flat Index Frontend Options 7 Inthe upper right corner click Save Config STORE VIEW STORE VIEW STORE VIEW STORE VIEW STORE VIEW STORE VIEW STORE VIEW GLOBAL GLOBAL STORE VIEW Indexing Verifying the Results of the Flat Catalog Configuration This section discusses examples of both changes to individual products and changes to multiple products and categories at the same time Note Magento recommends performing the tasks discussed in this section in a development environment first Verifying Flat Catalog Changes for a Single Product To verify flat catalog changes for one product 1 Log in to the Admin Panel as an administrator In a different browser tab page or window open your web store s front page In the Admin Panel click Catalog gt Manage Products Choose a product to modify This example uses the Nokia 2610 Phone Click the name of the product to edit it Click the General tab ve a E a a Append _DEMO to the value in the Name field The following figure shows an example Nokia 2610 Phone Cell Phones 4 Back amp Delete Duplicate Save and Continue Edit General Create New Attribute Name Nokia 2610 Phone_DEMQ STORE VIEW Model 2610 GLOBAL SKU n2610 GLOBAL Weight 3 2000 GLOBAL Manufacturer Nokia sis GLOBAL Status En
8. Filterable no results All values of the attribute that you have created on the Manage Label Options tab will be listed No Not used in layered navigation Note that only attributes with the Dropdown Multiple Select or Price input type can be used in layered navigation The Use for Promo Rule Conditions field defines whether the attribute can be used in defining conditions for catalog and shopping cart price rules The Position parameter determines the position of the attribute in the layered navigation block with respect to other filterable attributes In the Visible on Product View Pages on Frontend field select Yes to specify that this attribute appears in the Additional Information part of a product s page in the web store as shown in Figure 86 Additional Information Model LX FR206 004 Brand Acer In Depth Mobile AMD Athlon 64 2800 1MB L2 Cache 512MB of PC2700 DDR333 SDRAM e 2 RAM Slots 0 open upgrading requires chip removal RAM is upgradeable to 2GB Screensize 15 inch 200 nit high brightness TFT LCD screen Harddrive 80 gig Western Digital Processor Mobile AMD Athlon 64 2800 Memory 512MB of PC2 700 DDR333 SDRAM Figure 86 Attributes on the Additional Information Panel 17 For Allow HTML Tags on Frontend select Yes to enable HTML tags that are specified in this attribute s values to be honored on the frontend 18 For Used in Product Listing select Yes to list values of this attribute i
9. Footer Links Back Reset Delete Block Save Block Save and Continue Edit General Information Block Title Footer Links Identifier footer_links Store View Main Website Main Website Store aaaaaaa Default Store View Test Site Test Store 1 French Status Enabled v Content Show Hide Editor t BZ U ase B Styles Format Font family Font size Bi m MAS See L E FOmjJ A Z A eB Q gt E it 4 F T as e AboutUs e Customer Serice Path Figure 173 Editing a Static Block 13 1n the Content field use the WYSIWYG editor to add a link to the new page You can do this by pressing ENTER after one of the existing links typing the link text selecting this text and clicking the Link icon Use the Insert Edit Link dialog box to specify the link attributes as shown in Figure 174 Design and Content Insert edit link Target Figure 174 Insert Edit Link Dialog Box The footer of the frontend now appears as shown in Figure 175 AboutUs QurHistory Customer Service Site Map Search Terms Advanced Search ContactUs Help Us to Keep Magento Healthy Report All Bugs ver 1 6 0 2011 Magento Demo Store All Rights Reserved Figure 175 Updated Footer Block Customizing Transactional Emails Transactional Emails are all emails sent from a Magento CE store Magento CE offers flexible easy to use functionality to enable you to cust
10. Shows products that are currently in shopping carts Shows shopping carts that were started but then abandoned Tip This report enables you to contact the customers and offer them discounts or otherwise turn an abandoned cart into a conversion Shows the products that were sold in the highest quantity in the specified time period Shows all products that were ordered in the specified time period Shows the products that were viewed the most times in the specified time period Shows the products whose stock levels are low Shows the number of purchases and downloads for each downloadable product Shows the new accounts that were created during the specified time period Shows the customers listed in descending order of total order amount Shows the customers listed in descending order of number of orders placed Shows the customers listed in descending order of number of reviews contributed Shows the products listed in descending order of number of reviews Shows the customers listed with the number of tags each one has created Shows the number of unique tags and total number of tags created for each product Shows the number of times each tag has been applied Shows the terms that were submitted in the Monitoring and Improving the Web Store Report Path Description search tool Tip If you see that the Hits field of a product shows a high number meaning that customers search for it often but
11. Tags must be separated by spaces and phrases two or more words that comprise a single tag must be enclosed in single quotation marks Figure 233 shows what it looks like when a customer adds three tags rock and roll e t shirt red After a customer submits product tags an administrator has to approve them on the backend so that they will appear on the frontend Approving Tags Tags must first be approved by the backend administrator before they appear on the front end After a tag has been approved by the backend administrator it can be used for other products and does not need to be approved again To approve a tag 1 In the Admin Panel select Catalog gt Tags gt Pending Tags to display the Pending Tags page as shown in Figure 234 Pending Tags Page 4 ofipages View 20 w perpage Total 3 records found Reset Filter Select All Unselect All Select Visible Unselect Visible 0 items selected Actions v Submit Tag h YY t Products Customers Store View Any From From v To To a red 1 1 Main Website Main Website Store Default Store View oO rock amp roll 1 1 Main Website Main Website Store Default Store View oO t shirt 1 1 Main Website Main Website Store Default Store View Figure 234 Pending Tags Page 233 Managing Customer Generated Content This page shows a list of tags that have not yet been approved 2 Use the check boxes in the left column to select all of the
12. To set your VAT ID and location country 1 Navigate to System gt Configuration gt GENERAL gt General 2 In the Current Configuration Scope field select the desired store view 279 Appendix VAT ID Validation 3 6 Expand the Store Information field set In the Country field select your country In the VAT Number field enter your VAT number You can validate the entered value by clicking the Validate VAT Number button The result of validation will be displayed immediately Note If your VAT number is valid then apart from validation result for each customer s VAT ID validation the validation server will send to Magento the following additional information VAT request identifier and VAT request date If a customer s VAT validation is performed during checkout then the VAT request identifier and VAT request date are saved in the Comments History section of the Order View page under Sales gt Orders gt select appropriate order To save the settings click Save Config To modify the list of the countries that are EU members I 2 cF 4 Navigate to System gt Configuration gt GENERAL gt General In the Current Configuration Scope field select the desired store view Expand the Countries Options field set In the European Union Countries field make the necessary changes in the list of countries that are EU members To save the changes click Save Config VAT ID Validation Implementation
13. Upload package file Manage Existing Extensions Check for Upgrades Figure 246 Selecting to create a backup in Magento Connect Manager Staging Environment If you plan to change and develop your web store over time we recommend that you set up a staging environment also called a testing environment in which you can test your ideas before applying them to the live store We highly recommend that you also use this environment when updating new versions of Magento CE At its simplest the staging environment is just like any other Magento CE installation that is not accessible to the public If you are modifying the files you can keep them synchronized with the live files using any of the various available version control tools 249 Keeping Your Store Healthy Updating Magento CE Magento CE is constantly evolving New features are added and problems resolved on an ongoing basis From time to time you will be notified about a new Magento CE version This notice will be published in the Magento CE blog and the backend will display a message when you log in If the update is critical contains mandatory updates or resolves issues that you have encountered you should definitely update your web store Warning If your store has a custom theme when you upgrade it to a new version you will benefit from the bug fixes but new front end functionality may not be visible Upgrading between majo
14. documentation 4 Introducing the Frontend In order to familiarize you with the features of the frontend this chapter describes the basic browsing and purchasing features provided for your customers by a web store created using Magento CE This knowledge will help you make better decisions when setting up your store Overview The frontend provides the view of your web store that is publicly available to customers using the Internet The frontend shows your product catalog and provides your customers with ordering payment and tracking features You can access the Magento demo web stores by navigating to http demo magentocommerce com The Single Store Demo is a sample Magento store that uses Magento s default theme and sample data This sample store is referenced throughout this user guide You can access your own store by browsing to the address that you defined for it during installation era Introducing the Frontend The illustration in Figure 26 shows the first page of a default Magento CE store with sample data Search entire store here Search M Magento Demo Store Default welcome msg Hoes English v Furniture Electronics Magento end of summer SALE i MV CART You have no items in your shopping cart E COMPARE PRODUCTS You have no items to compare Anashria Limited Offer 20 OFF BACK TO SCHOOL Keep your eyes open for our special Back RKEBE FREE SHIPPING on orders
15. Come see what 100 Cotte items 1 to 9 of 12 total Page 1 2 gt View as Grid List Zolof The Rock And Roll Destroyer LOL The Get Up Kids Band Camp Pullover Hoodie Cat T shirt LA eo kiti 2 2 30 00 13 50 As low as 9 50 Add to Cart Add to Wishlist Add to Compare Add to Cart Add to Wishlist Add to Compare 83 Category Page with Layered Navigation Show 9 W per page Sort by Best Value T Ay The Only Children Paisley T Shirt 100 00 As low as 570 00 Add to Cart Add to Wishlist Add to Compare a men A O Compare Products 2 MY CART There is 1 item in your cart Cart Subtotal 15 00 Recently added item s Coalesce Functioning On Impatience T Shirt 1x 15 00 Details COMPARE PRODUCTS You have no items to compare RECENTLY VIEWED PRODUCTS Coalesce Functioning On impatience T Shirt BACK TO SCHOOL Keep your eyes open for our special Back to School items and save BIG amp amp COMMUNITY POLL What is your favorite Magento feature O Layered Navigation O Price Rules O Category Management Attributes also determine which products are displayed when a customer performs a 68 search for a keyword System attributes define the properties that are required by the store to function properly These attributes cannot be deleted Setting Up Your Catalog You can add as many additional
16. ELECTRONICS Default welcome msg My Account My Wishlist My Cart 1 item APPAREL Checkout Log In Kona Eunicea English v Search Search entire store here Go TAKE ADVANTAGE OF THE SUNSHINE Special Savings Olympus Stylus 750 Buy 1 for 161 94 ea Buy 2 for 140 ea Buy 3 for 120 ea Buy 4 for 110 ea 4 Sadals lt Tank Tops T Shirts Cargo Pants Shorts lt Swimsuits Buy 50 and get FREE SHIPPING o SHOES ACCESSORIES APPAREL FUNITURE About Us Customer Service Site Map Search Terms Advanced Search Contact Us Newsletter Sign up Enter your email address SUBMIT Help Us to Keep Magento Healthy Report All Bugs ver 1 2 1 2003 Magento Demo Store All Rights Reserved your entire or Head over to Womens GET INTO THE GROOVE Find out how you can help Every year Magento Demo Store sponsors national scholarships for 4 students who will oe otherwise be unable to fulfill their academic potentials Find out how you are helping to build a bright future by purchasing from Magento Demo gt We re available 24 7 Call us now REQUEST A CATALOG i i Stock latest 555 555 01 23 Pere Npa i aea Patni Figure 170 Frontend Home Page With New Theme 77 Design and Content Managing CMS Pages Content Management System CMS pages are static pages such as your Homepage About Us and Customer Service pages that provide information about th
17. Magento Community Edition User Guide M Magento Version 1 8 Copyright 2013 Magento Inc All rights reserved 12 15 13 version 1 8 1 II Table of Contents Table of Contents ABOUT THIS GUIDE 1 SUPPORT AND CONTACT INFORMATION 1 CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS GUIDE 1 1 INTRODUCING MAGENTO COMMUNITY EDITION 3 WHAT IS MAGENTO CE 3 MAGENTO CE LICENSE 3 MAGENTO CE FRONTEND AND BACKEND 3 FRONTEND THE WEB STORE FRONT 4 BACKEND THE BACK OFFICE 5 MAGENTO CE CONCEPTS 5 ADVANCED MAGENTO CE CUSTOMIZATION OPTIONS 8 2 INSTALLING MAGENTO CE 9 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 9 INSTALLING MAGENTO CE 10 STEP 1 DOWNLOADING MAGENTO CE 10 STEP 2 DOWNLOADING SAMPLE DATA 11 STEP 3 UPLOADING TO YOUR SERVER 12 STEP 4 GRANTING FILE ACCESS PERMISSIONS 13 STEP 5 SETTING UP THE WEB STORE DATABASE 13 STEP 6 INSTALLING MAGENTO CE 13 3 BASIC CONFIGURATION 23 ACCESSING THE BACKEND 23 STORE HIERARCHY 25 WEBSITES 25 STORES 25 STORE VIEWS 25 STORE PAGES GENERAL CONFIGURATION 25 HTML HEAD FIELD SET 26 HEADER FIELD SET 28 FOOTER FIELD SET 29 III Table of Contents STORE CONTACTS CONFIGURATION 29 WEB STORE EMAILS 29 CONTACTS 30 SALES EMAILS 31 SHIPPING SETTINGS 32 COOKIE RESTRICTION MODE 33 ENABLING AND CONFIGURING COOKIE RESTRICTION MODE 34 COOKIE RESTRICTION MODE IMPLEMENTATION DETAILS 34 COOKIES USED IN MAGENTO 35 4 INTRODUCING THE FRONTEND 37 OVERVIEW 37 FINDING THE RIGHT PRODUCTS 38 CATEGORIES 38 FILTERING THE DISPLAY
18. page 88 before you define products that have those attributes 95 Setting Up Your Catalog Product Types Magento CE offers a variety of product types that enable significant flexibility when defining products The following lists the available product types and their typical usage Simple Product This is the most basic product type It is suitable for all kinds of 9 L2 physical shipped products Grouped This option enables you to display several similar products on a single page For example if you are selling chefs knives and you have the same knife in four sizes you can make a grouped product to display all four of these sizes Customers can select the size s that they want and the quantity they need and add them to the cart from this page Configurable This product type enables your customers to select the variant that they want by choosing options For example you can sell T shirts in two colors and three sizes You would have to create six variants as individual products each with its own SKU and then add these six to a configurable product where customers can choose the size and color and then add it to their cart A very similar functionality is possible by using Custom Options for Simple products The difference between a configurable product and a product including custom options is that inventory is not checked or updated for individual options during the purchase of the latter and there i
19. s and merchant s location countries This feature enables merchants to create different tax rules for intra country domestic and intra EU sales and to apply the corresponding VAT amount automatically Note VAT related tax rules do not influence other tax rules and do not prevent applying other tax rules where applicable Only one tax rule can be applied at a given time Magento performs VAT ID validation using the web services of the European Commission server http ec europa eu taxation_customs vies VAT ID Validation Quick Reference The following table lists the main tasks concerned with the VAT ID Validation feature and the locations where they can be performed in the Admin Panel TASK ADMIN MENU Create customer groups which Customers gt Customer Groups can be used as default for the VAT ID Validation functionality Enable the VAT ID Validation System gt Configuration gt CUSTOMERS gt Store view functionality Customer Configuration gt Create New Account Options o Set the default groups for System gt Configuration gt CUSTOMERS Store view customers from your country and gt Customer Configuration gt Create New from other EU countries Account Options o Set your country and VAT ID System gt Configuration gt GENERAL gt General Store view gt Store Information o Modify Magento list of EU System gt Configuration gt GENERAL gt General Global countries gt Countries Options o Edit the VAT Number
20. COMMUNITY POLL Red 3 White 2 MANUFACTURER Anashria 1 Asics 2 CN CLogs 1 Ecco 1 The Get Up Kids Zolof The Rock And The Only Children Kenneth Cole 1 Band Camp Pullover Roll Destroyer LOL Paisley T Shirt PR tan Hoodie Cat T shirt Fiii o titi kti i Steve Madden 1 Px a As low as 70 00 2 2 SHOE TYPE 30 00 13 50 Dress 2 As low as 9 50 Add to Wishlist Golf Shoes 1 EE abate Add to Compare GolfS Add to Ca High Heels 2 Add to Wishlist Running 2 Add to Compare Add to Wishlist Sandal e i Add to Compare Sandal 2 Tennis 1 E a a a Figure 28 Category Page with Products Filtering the Display of Products What is your favorite Magento feature Layered Navigation O Price Rules O Category Management O Compare Products Typically the first step of a customer when browsing through the web store may be to select the category or subcategory of the products of interest The customer can then filter the products in that category according to the various attributes of these products 39 Introducing the Frontend The SHOP BY area on the left side of the frontend page provides a variety of product attributes that can be used to access the products in that category The attributes in a category appear in groups each with its own title In the frontend page shown above the groups that appear are PRICE which shows ranges of prices COLOR MANUFACTURER and SHOE
21. E E Price Range No No l Use config 7 E USD Figure 198 Prices Options In the Special Price field enter the special price GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL GLOBAL WEBSITE WEBSITE GLOBAL Optionally set Special Price From To Date If you leave these fields blank the special price is applied immediately and applies until removed on the same page Click Save Microsoft Wireless Optical Mouse 5000 Regular Price 59 04 Special Price 49 99 Add to Cart Add to Wishlist Add to Compare Figure 199 Special Price Frontend 203 Promotions Tier Pricing Tier Pricing is a promotional tool that enables a web store owner to price products differently when higher quantities are purchased This is an effective way to move more merchandise and appeal to customers who buy more than one product at a time When a customer adds a certain quantity of a product to their shopping cart the price is automatically changed to reflect the discount To define Tier Pricing 1 In the Admin Panel select Catalog gt Manage Products to display the list of products Click the Edit link on the right side of the relevant product s row Click the Prices tab in the left navigation panel Add tiers by clicking the Add Tier button You can create as many tiers as you need Prices Create New Attribute Price qq qq GLOBAL USD Cost 40 00 GLOBAL USD Tier Price Website Customer Gr
22. Getting Started with URL Rewrites page 263 2 Click Add URL Rewrite 3 From the Create URL Rewrite list click one of the following For Category Redirect to a category page Magento system category paths use the format catalog category view id category string You can optionally redirect to a custom CMS path if you have already set one up For Product Redirect to a product page Magento system product paths use the format catalog product view id string or catalog product view id product string category category string You can optionally redirect to a custom CMS path if you have already set one up Custom Redirect to any valid path To use this option you must know the exact request and target path The bottom section of the page refreshes to reflect the choices available for the type of URL rewrite you selected 4 Do any of the following o Custom redirect Enter the required information For more information see step 6 Category redirect Click the name of the category o Product redirect Click the name of the product 5 For product redirect only Optionally click the name of a category or click Skip choosing category to let the product remain associated with its original category You need to click a category name only if you want the URL redirect to go to a different category 6 Enter the following information Usually displays Custom From the list click the name of the store to which the URL rewri
23. In order to import a CSV file into Magento CE it must have certain characteristics Specifically each column heading must exactly match the Attribute Code for the attribute in that column Tip To ensure that a CSV file s column headings are understood by Magento CE first export a product CSV file see Exporting Product Data page 126 You can then edit this file by adding or updating rows and then re import it For the Category column specify product category in textual form based on a category s path with a slash between each category level for example Furniture Living Room Do not include the Root Category in the path 124 Setting Up Your Catalog Importing Product Data With the Import feature you can upload a file that contains the records for as many products as you want The file that you upload must be in Comma Separated Values CSV format Most spreadsheet and database applications can read and create CSV files To import a product CSV file 1 In the Admin Panel select System gt Import Export gt Import to open the Import page as shown in Figure 130 Import Check Data Import Settings Entity Type Products Mi Import Behavior Append Complex Data i Select File to Import Figure 130 Import Page 2 Select Products from the Entity Type drop down list 3 Select one of the Import Behavior options from the drop down list Append Complex Data Adds new or edite
24. M Community Edition Mage nto connect Compatibility ENTERPRISE DEVELOPER 414 Get Extension Key Please note that this extension is provided as is It amp recommended to always backup your installation prior to usage FREE Need help Discuss this Extension Find a Magento Professional Request New Feature 4y Report a Bug View More By This Developer Overview Specs Reviews Releases Patches Docs 4 Overview The extension provides iDEAL payment integration Which enables payment procces through an existing Internet banking product Requires PHP OpenSSL extension to be installed Changes from previous release Added XML notification support for iDEAL pea Basic Added ability to enter api urls for IDEAL Basic so this extension can be used not only by clients of ING Bank Uris need to be entered only if you are not client of ING Bank Notice Like provided in documentation for this iDEAL Basic if you will get this notification it still can not guarantee status of your transaction so please make sure to check this in your merchant dashboard before process order Figure 249 Extension Details Page Click Get Extension Key to display the following 253 Keeping Your Store Healthy Magento Connect Version 4 0 What is this By checking this box agree to the extension license agreement 5 Click the link to read the license agreement then accept the licensing agreement by selecting the
25. Note Figure 93 shows the products defined in the Sample Data provided with Magento If you downloaded Sample Data as described in the Step 2 Downloading Sample Data section on page 11 then you may want to leave the products in for you to refer to as examples and delete them later Click Add Product on the top right of the page to display the New Product page Figure 94 Product Information OW New Product Back Settings Attribute Set Default FProditi Tye Simple Product Figure 94 New Product Page Product Wizard First Page The New Product page is the first page of a product definition wizard that walks you through the process of defining a product I In the Attribute Set field select the attribute set that contains the attributes that best describe this product See Managing Product Attributes page 88 for a description of how to define attributes In the Product Type field choose the type of product you want to create Click Continue to display the General tab as shown in Figure 95 This tab may look different depending on the product type that you choose oF Setting Up Your Catalog Product Information General New Product Default Back Reset Save and Continue Edit General Create New Attribute Prices Meta Information Name E VIEW Images SKU GLOB Description Design Weight ae Recurring Profile Status Please Select SITE Gift Options o Tax Class
26. Select Sales gt Tax gt Import Export Tax Rates Fixed Product Tax Some tax jurisdictions have a fixed tax that must be added to certain types of products Magento lets 140 you set up a fixed product tax FPT for use in your store s tax calculations For example in some countries FPT can be used to set up a Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive WEEE tax also known as ecological tax or eco tax that is collected on certain types of electronics to offset the cost of recycling This tax is a fixed amount rather than a percentage of the product price Your tax jurisdiction might also have rules about how you display the price of products to your customers either with or without tax Be sure you understand those rules so that you can set your FPT display options accordingly Fixed Product Tax FPT Calculation Fixed product taxes are applicable at an item level based on the product In some jurisdictions this tax is subject to an additional tax calculation FPT is not taxed Excluding FPT Treat FPT as a separate row in the cart and include the value of FPT in the appropriate tax calculations Including FPT FPT is added to the base price of an item but is not included in tax rule based calculations Excluding FPT FPT description final price Item prices are shown without FPT FPT amount and with FPT included FPT is not included in tax rule based calculations Taxes FPT is taxed Exc
27. The number of reloads is not limited 2I Keeping Your Store Healthy Log in to Admin Panel User Name admin Please type the letters from the image Attention Captcha is case sensitive jj Magento Forgot your password Magento is a trademark of Magento Inc Copyright 2012 Magento Inc Figure 252 CAPTCHA in the backend Admin users can reload the displayed CAPTCHA by clicking the Reload icon in the upper right corner of the image The number of reloads is not limited 258 17 Indexing Indexing is how Magento transforms data such as products categories and so on to improve the performance of your web store As data changes the transformed data must be updated or reindexed Magento has very sophisticated architecture that stores merchant data including catalog data prices users stores and so on in many database tables To optimize storefront performance Magento accumulates data into special tables using indexers For example suppose you change the price of an item from 4 99 to 3 99 Magento must reindex the price change to display it on your web store Without indexing Magento would have to calculate the price of every product on the fly taking into account shopping cart price rules bundle pricing discounts tier pricing and so on Loading the price for a product would take a long time possibly resulting in cart abandonment Index Management Page The Index Manageme
28. These products may be of a better quality more expensive or more popular or produce a higher profit margin These products appear on the Product Information page Related Products Related products appear in the Product Information page in the right column Related products are meant to be purchased in addition to the item the customer is viewing Cross sell Products Products that are promoted in the shopping cart page right before checkout When a customer navigates to the shopping cart whether automatically after adding a product or otherwise these products are offered as suggestions in addition to the products already in the shopping cart They are similar to impulse buys like magazines and candy at the cash registers in grocery stores 185 Promotions Up Sells The up sell products appear in the Product Information page under the Product Description as shown in Figure 177 This example presents a more expensive keyboard and other products as up sells to the less expensive keyboard Microsoft Natural Ergonomic Keyboard 4000 He the firstto review this product Availability In stack Sass ees OE Er L a tte SEE 99 99 Oty Menkat OR Add to Wishlist Add to Compare Quick Overview The most comfortable ergonomic keyboard on the market Ve just made a great deal for this Microsoft Natural ergonomic keyboard Double click on above image to view full picture gt j Product Description The most co
29. first See Managing Categories page 77 for more information about creating root categories For now determine how you want your store hierarchy set up Websites Suppose you want to sell machine shop equipment online and your spouse wants to sell handmade baskets It is unlikely that you would sell both of these product lines in a single store but in a single Magento CE installation you can do both by setting up separate websites Each website can have its own domain name The websites can be set up to share customer data or not to share any data Stores For your handmade baskets website you might want to set up two stores one specializing in wicker and one for other materials You can set up two root categories one for wicker items and one for other items and assign one to each store See Managing Categories page 77 for more information about setting up root categories Several stores of one website can have different independent domain names as well but it should be configured on the store view level of each store Store Views Your market research indicates that about half of your potential customer base speaks English and the other half speaks Spanish Within each store you can create separate store views one for English and one for Spanish The store views share the same catalog but each is presented in its respective language Customers use a drop down list on the frontend to switch from one store view to
30. includes extensive integration with major shipping carriers for USPS DHL FedEx and UPS you can create shipment orders and print shipping labels right from the Magento CE Admin Panel See Shipping page151 for details about shipping system integration To define general shipping options 1 In the Admin Panel select System gt Configuration gt SALES gt Shipping Settings 2 Inthe Current Configuration Scope drop down list in the left upper left corner select the scope for which you want these configurations to apply 3 Click the Origin and Options tabs to expand the page to display the shipping options as shown in Figure 24 Shipping Settings Save Config Country United States WEBSITE Region State California WEBSITE ZIP Postal Code 90034 WEBSITE City WEBSITE Street Address WEBSITE Street Address Line 2 WEBSITE Options O Allow Shipping to Multiple Yes WEBSITE Addresses Maximum Qty Allowed for 100 WEBSITE Shipping to Multiple Addresses Figure 24 Shipping Settings Page 4 Configure the options to match your store 5 Click Save Config to save your changes See General Shipping Settings page 151 for details about configuring shipping methods Cookie Restriction Mode Magento can notify store customers about cookies that are being used by a The feature is called Cookie Restriction Mode It is aimed at helping store owners to comply with the European Union Privacy and
31. v3 0 an open source certified license More information about Magento s licenses can be found at http www magentocommerce com license Magento CE Frontend and Backend The following sections provide an overview of the two visible interfaces of Magento CE the frontend and the backend Introducing Magento Community Edition Frontend The Web Store Front The frontend is the public view of your web store with which your customers can interact through a standard web browser It presents your products product categories and promotions and provides your customers with ordering payment and purchase tracking features An example is shown in Figure 1 Search M Magento Demo Store Default welcome msg na enecens English v Furniture Electronics Apparel 2 MY CART Magento end of summer SALE You have no items in your shopping cart COMPARE PRODUCTS You have no tems to compare Anashria Limited Offer 20 OFF R wn BACK TO SCHOOL Keep your eyes open 7 for our special Back Buy Canon KEBEL a FREE SHIPPING on orders over 50 Te er ax This offer is valid on all our store items Starting at 499 a Best Selling Products COMMUNITY POLL a oe Sony VAIO VGN Nine West Women s TXN27N B 11 1 Lucero Pump What is your favorite Magento Notebook PC P PR feature E ERER ss SEARES Layered Navigation Price Rules Figure 1 Magento CE Frontend Introducing Magento Com
32. 1 Approved bones 4 Approved cool t shirt 1 Approved emo 1 Approved Geil 1 Approved good 1 Approved green 3 Approved hip 3 Approved Hohoho 2 Approved Hupe 1 Approved mal E B PES 1 Approved m ties a ee 1 Approved Figure 109 Product Tags Tab Note You can click on a tag row to edit it or Approve Reject Disable or Delete it 109 Setting Up Your Catalog 110 Customers Tagged Product Tab This page enables you to see which customers have tagged specific products FirstName Last Hame Email Tag Name John Doe john doe example com bones John Doe john doe example com tshirt John Doe john doe example com hip John Doe john doe example com mal John Doe john doe example com young John Doe john doe example com Test John Doe john doe example com green John Doe john doe example com tight John Doe john doe example com young John Doe john doe example com pas John mamm O Doe m cam good ene Mag Manang n Figure 110 Customers Tagged Product Tab Note You can click on a tag row to edit it or Approve Reject Disable or Delete it Custom Group Configuration Pages Additional configuration pages may appear depending upon the groups that you have created using the Attribute Sets tool See Creating Attribute Sets page 92 for more information about attribute sets An example custom group T Shirts attribute is shown in Figure 111 T shirts Attributes Create New Attribute Gender Mens G
33. 1 T Shirt 2 T Shirt 3 Excl Tax 45 00 Excl Tax 40 00 Excl Tax 50 00 Incl Tax 45 00 Incl Tax 40 00 Incl Tax 50 00 Out of stock ADD TO CART ADD TO CART Add to Wishlist Add to Compare Add to Wishlist Add to Wishlist Add to Compare Add to Compare Figure 25 A warning message is displayed in the frontend when the cookie restriction mode is enabled Basic Configuration The message contains a link to the Privacy Policy page which provides a list of cookies being collected and explains on how they are used The default content of this page can be changed under CMS gt Pages gt Manage Content gt Privacy Policy After a customer clicks Allow the message disappears If a customer does not click Allow the message persists but the store functionality is available as usual However Google Analytics cookies are not stored in this case even if the Google Analytics functionality is enabled Cookies Used in Magento The following table lists cookies which are always stored by Magento on the customer s side If links to a product were sent to friends this cookie stores the timestamps in the timeStamp1 timestamp2 timestampN format The following table contains a list of cookies which Magento additionally stores on customers side if the Full Page Cache functionality is enabled CUSTOMER Hashed value of a customer ID in the customer_ customerld format CUSTOMER_INFO Hashed value of a cu
34. 154 Seagate 500GB HD 5400RPM 500gb5400 299 00 v 153 Intel Core 2 Extreme QX9775 3 20GHz Retail intelcore2extreme 2 049 99 F 152 24 Widescreen Flat Panel LCD Monitor W2452T TF 699 99 E 151 Intel C2D E8400 3 0GHz Retail intelc2d 98 99 150 Western Digital 500GB HD 7200RPM 500gb7200 299 00 F 149 Western Digital 1TB HD 7200RPM 1tb7200 399 00 F 148 AMD A64 X2 3800 2 0GHz OEM amda64 98 99 iv 147 22 Syncmaster LCD Monitor 226bw 399 99 Figure 262 Demo Category 13 Click Save Category 14 View your web store 15 Search for or browse to the category you created 16 If necessary refresh the page to see the changes you made The following figure shows an example of adding several products to a subcategory of Electronics Podi Indexing we Demo category 8 Item s View as Grid List Show 9 lw per page Sort By Position lw T 22 Syncmaster LCD Monitor 399 99 Ardid tr art Add to Wishlist Add to Compare Intel Core 2 Extreme QX9775 3 20GHz Retail 2 049 99 Add to Wishlist Add to Compare 19 Widescreen Flat Panel LCD Monitor 399 99 Add to Wishlist Add to Compare Sony VAIO 11 1 Notebook PC As low as 52 699 99 Add to Wishlist Add to Compare _ Gaming Computer From 4 999 95 To 6 348 95 Add tr art Add to Wishlist Add to Compare Microsoft Natural Ergonomic Keyboard 4000 99 99 Add to Lari Add to Wishlist Add to Co
35. 5 00 Tax 12 38 Grand Total 167 38 Thank you again Main Website Store Figure 56 Confirmation Email Managing Customer Relations 56 Customer Emails Magento CE can send a variety of automatically generated customer emails such as when a customer places an order or opens an account and enables you to customize them as you require For more information about customizing the emails sent from the store to customers see Customizing Transactional Emails page 181 Ratings and Reviews Rating and review functionality is provided by Magento CE to enable customers and web store owners to give their opinions feedback and comments about products They appear in the frontend as shown in Figure 57 Introducing the Frontend Coalesce Functioning On Impatience T Shirt A fr 2 Review s Add Your Review Availability In stock 15 00 Quick Overview e 6 102 100 preshrunk heavyweight cotton Double click on above image to view full picture e Shoulder to shoulder taping 5i E e Double needle sleeves and bottom hem Figure 57 Ratings and Reviews The number of stars indicates the satisfaction rating You can click on the Review s link to display the actual textual reviews provided by customers For more details see Managing Ratings and Reviews page 231 Community Polls Each web store can provide a Community Poll as shown in Figure 58 For more details see Managing Polls page
36. 5 06 Subtotal 116 060 Grand Total Figure 147 Regular Two Tax Calculation With compound taxes the first tax is added to the product subtotal and the second tax is applied to that total 50 oo Product Price iooo oo Subtotal 006 aan n 1 bax rake 16 6 50 Total Taxes 100 006 Subtotal 118 80 Grand Total Figure 148 Compound Tax Calculation Setting Up a Compound Tax You set up a compound tax in Magento using different priorities for tax rules If two tax rules with the same priority apply then the taxes are added together If two taxes with a different priority apply then the taxes are compounded When taxes are compounded the first priority tax is calculated on the subtotal amount and then the second priority tax is calculated on the subtotal plus the first priority tax amount Lower numbers have higher priority 148 axes Important In order for compound taxes to work correctly do not select the Calculate off subtotal only check box when you set up your tax rules that apply to compound taxes This check box overrides the compounding calculation and cannot be used in conjunction with compound taxes To set up compound taxes 1 Set up all the tax rates that will be used in your compound tax rule See Tax Zones and Rates page 136 2 Set up the first tax rule for compounding For the first tax rule be sure that you set a higher priority than you will set for the next tax rule whi
37. A price range is not further splitted after the number of products which fall into this range reaches the threshold set in the Interval Division Limit field under System gt Configuration gt CATALOG gt Catalog gt Layered Navigation O Setting Up Your Catalog Managing Product Attributes What is an Attribute in Magento An attribute represents a property of a product such as its name image SKU color manufacturer and so on Attributes enable you to add new product properties without having to write a single line of code or to add any columns to your database Understanding attributes is crucial for making your store easy to use for customers You assign attributes to your products in order to enable your customers and search engines to find them more easily Your Magento CE web store automatically displays products according to their attributes for easy accessibility by your customers in the SHOP BY layered navigation panel on the left of your web store as shown in Figure 83 Home Apparel Appare SHOPPING OPTIONS CATEGORY Shirts 4 Shoes 7 Hoodies 1 PRICE 0 00 100 00 8 COLOR Black 1 Blue 1 Brown 2 Gray 2 Green 3 Red 3 White 2 MANUFACTURER Anashria 1 Asics 2 CN CLogs 1 Ecco 1 Kenneth Cole 1 Nine West 1 Steve Madden 1 SHOE TYPE Dress 2 Golf Shoes 1 High Heels 2 Running 2 Sandal 2 pS ae Figure
38. Archives How to Get Started Full Release This is the latest stable release of the Magento Community Edition Learn More ver 1 5 1 0 Added April 26 2011 Select your format v DOWNLOAD Magento 9 Try our new hosted solution E ICE EE AGE Preview Release This is the latest preview release of the Magento Community Edition Learn More ver 1 6 0 0 alpha1 Added May 26 2011 Select your format v DOWNLOAD Magento 9 Try our new hosted solution E iC ED AGE Downloader The downloader will install the latest Magento version ver 1 5 0 0 Added February 8 2010 Select your format DOWNLOAD Magento 9 Try our new hosted solution MCE EALE Sample Data Must be installed prior to the basic Magento Installation Learn More ver 1 2 0 Added December 29 2008 Select your format v DOWNLOAD Figure 3 Magento Download Page Magento Downloader Note This page will appear slightly differently on the web after a newer version is released 2 We recommend that you select the Downloader option as shown above The instructions in this chapter are written for the downloader Multiple compressed formats are provided If you are unsure which version to download use the zip format 3 Click the Download button and save the file to the location of your choice Step 2 Downloading Sample Data Magento enables you to load a few basic products and information into your web store to populate your web store fronte
39. CE This section first provides a full description of how to generate a Sales Report and a brief description of other important reports Generating Reports Magento CE provides a variety of reports that you can access at any time To see the reports that you can generate in Magento CE from the Reports menu select a type of report and then select a specific report of that type Some report pages have filter controls that enable you to narrow the scope of the report as shown in Figure 240 Total Shipped Report Show Report For All Websites v Match Period To Order Created Date v Period Day v From E To E Order Status Any v Applies to Any of the Specified Order Statuses Empty Rows No v Figure 240 Report Filter Controls The Show Report For drop down list enables you to select the store view or website or all websites to report on The Match Period To drop down list enables you to select which records to report on based on either the order creation date or the order modified date The Period drop down list enables you to aggregate the report data into rows for each day month or year within your report From and To dates Use the From and To calendar controls to determine the start and end dates that will be covered by the report For Order Status select Any to include all orders or select Specified to select one or more order status values from a list 239 Monitoring and Improv
40. Catalog product fulltext search index Update on Save GED Never Reindex Data 7 Stock Status Index Product Stock Status Update on Save GT ED Never Reindex Data 7 Tag Aggregation Data Rebuild Tag aggregation data Update on Save GED Never Reindex Data Figure 257 Verifying Product URL Redirect 5 Click Catalog gt URL Rewrite Management To open the URL Rewrite Management page 6 Click a row corresponding to a product redirect The following figure shows the example used in this section URL Rewrite Management Add URL Rewrite Page 4 gt of 42 pages View 20 gt per page Total 832 records found ID 4 Store View Type ID Path Request Path Target Path Options Action 1004 Main Website Custom product 159 greatest keyboard html microsoft natural RP Edit Main Store ergonomic keyboard English 4000 html 7 Open anew browser window or tab page 8 In the browser s location or address field construct the URL to the product as follows o Start with the scheme http or https then your web store s domain name followed by o Append to it the value of the Target Path field from the Admin Panel followed by o Append to it the value of the Request Path field For a Magento web store whose domain is http www example com the URL should look like the following http www example com sale keyboard html 9 Press ENTER The following figure shows an example of a successful redirect Indexing Home Mic
41. Count Default Recently Compared 5 STORE VIEW Products Count Figure 71 Recently Viewed Compared Products Settings F3 Setting Up Your Catalog 4 Price The Price section contains only the Catalog Price Scope drop down list in which you can select the scope of the base currency Global or Website Layered Navigation The Layered Navigation section enables you to choose whether the price ranges that are displayed in the layered navigation tool are calculated automatically or manually If you select Manual the Default Price Navigation Step field becomes visible enabling you to specify the default size of the price ranges Category Top Navigation The Category Top Navigation section enables you to define how many levels of subcategories are displayed by clicking on a category in the top navigation bar on the frontend Setting this value to O zero enables all levels to be displayed If you have a large number of subcategory levels this can potentially make it difficult for the user to navigate Search Engine Optimizations In order to make your site more search engine friendly configure the following Search Engine Optimizations Autogenerated Site Map Enable se STORE VIEW Popular Search Terms Enable STORE VIEW Product URL Suffix tml STORE VIEW Cache refresh needed Category URL Suffix html STORE VIEW Cache refresh needed Use Categories Path for Product Yes se STORE VIEW URLs Create Perm
42. Destroyer LOL Cat T shirt ww mY 2 Review s Add Your Review Availability In stock gt Buy 5 for 12 50 each and save 8 gt Buy 10 for 11 50 each and save 15 gt Buy 20 for 9 50 each and save 30 Add to Wishlist Add to Compare Double click on above image to view full picture Quick Overview Printed on American Apparel Classic style 5495 California t a t shirts MORE VIEWS vi J D Green 5 25 La Red 13 50 Figure 128 Product Variation in the Frontend In this example you can see that the price is 13 50 However if the Green color is selected then the price is 18 75 as shown in Figure 129 123 Setting Up Your Catalog Size Color Green yt Required Fields 18 75 Figure 129 Price Change for Product Variation Note If this product is added to the customer s shopping cart then the variation information appears there as shown below Remove Product Name Unit Price Qty Subtotal Si Zolof The Rock And Roll Destroyer LOL Cat T shirt 18 75 4 18 75 5 Size i p Small Color Green Continue Shopping Update Shopping Cart Importing and Exporting Product Data Unless you have a small product catalog the prospect of creating each product manually one by one is daunting Magento CE has a solution Import your product data from a comma separated values CSV spreadsheet file You can also export your product data to a CSV file Working with CSV Files
43. Editing Customers To view existing customers 1 In the Admin Panel select Customers gt Manage Customers to display the Manage Customers page as shown in Figure 211 The Manage Customers page contains a list of all the customers that opened accounts in your web store or were added using the Add New Customer feature e Manage Customers Add New Customer Page 1 of 1 pages View 20 perpage Total 2 records found a Exportto CSV v Select All Unselect All Select Visible Unselect Visible 0 items selected Actions v 1D Name Email Group Telephone ZIP Country State Province Customer Since Website Action Any From p ao 7 All countries w From E v To 5 Tose JE 2 Test test testcompany com General 123 123 1234 90123 United States California Mar 23 2009 Main Website Edit Customer 12 13 12 AM 1 John Doe john doe example com General Aug 30 2007 Main Website Edit 11 23 13 PM Figure 211 Manage Customers Page 2 Click the Edit link on the right side of a customer s row to display the customer information page as shown in Figure 212 Customer Information Vincent Van Gogh Back EGS Delete Customer Save and Continue Edit Customer View Reser Account Information cccccococosocsoncoccsocsoncocoscosoncoccsccccccsocsocccecsonsocesocconcoeo Personal information Addresses Orders Last Logged In Never Offline Asoo Billing Address p oe SE
44. Electronic Communications Directive and its amendment According to these documents websites cannot use cookies until a user consents 33 Basic Contiguration Enabling and Configuring Cookie Restriction Mode To enable the cookie restriction mode 1 Log into 2 Navigate the Magento Admin Panel to System gt Configuration gt GENERAL gt Web 3 In the Current Configuration Scope in the upper left corner of the page select the desired website Expand the Session Cookie Management filed set In the Cookie Restriction Mode field select Yes To save the changes click the Save Config button Cookie Restriction Mode Implementation Details After the cookie restriction mode is enabled a message is displayed on the top of each page in the store front The message informs customers that the website requires cookies to provide all of its features and requests users to confirm that they are informed and consent See Figure 25 Welcome to our store Log In or register M Magento PUE composite Home Simple Simple Shop By Price 20 00 29 99 1 30 00 39 99 1 40 00 49 99 5 50 00 and above 2 My color blue 5 red 4 34 MY ACCOUNT MY WISHLISTS 1 MY CART 0 v CHECKOUT Q Enter search keyword GO Service view as Sort By Position t Compare Products 9 Item s Show 9 per page You have no items to compare NOW ACCEPTING PayPal T Shirt
45. Excl Tax 4 50 x SKU b1 Incl Tax 4 50 Incl Tax 4 50 Incl Tax 4 50 Book _gift cart Excl Tax 100 00 1 Excl Tax 100 00 0 00 Excl Tax 100 00 x SKU b7 Incl Tax 100 00 Incl Tax 100 00 Incl Tax 100 00 Subtotal 104 50 Total 2 product s Apply Coupon Code Update Items and Qty s Clear Shopping Cart Figure 221 Clearing the Shopping Cart on the Shopping Cart Page Refunding You can create a record of a product refund from an existing order by generating a credit memo To view the list of refunds made in your web store From the Sales menu select the Credit Memos option to display the Credit Memos page as shown in Figure 222 Credit Memos Page 1 of 1 pages View 20 w perpage Total 0 records found E Export to csv v Select Visible Unselect Visible 0 items selected Actions v Credit Memo Created At Order Order Date Bill to Name Status Refunded Action Any From From v From To Rl To fl To No records found Figure 222 Credit Memos Page To refund a product from an existing order 2268 Note You can create credit memos only for orders for which invoices were created Without an invoice an order is assumed not to be paid so that there is nothing to refund In the Admin Panel select Sales gt Orders to display a list of the existing orders 2 Click the View link on the right side of the row of the desired order to display the
46. From this moment each time you create an online invoice for this order a new authorization and capture will be conducted only for invoices totals Also Magento will determine whether the number of the conducted captures is equal to the Number of Child Authorizations value each time If the number specified there is already reached creating online invoices for the order will not be possible If you click the Void button on the order view page the Order transaction is voided After this no online invoice can be created for the order Note PayPal provides an option of capturing an amount larger than was ordered However this option is not supported in Magento Other Payment Methods To define payments methods 1 In the Admin Panel select System gt Configuration gt Payment Methods to display the Payment Methods page as shown in Figure 160 Payment Methods Zero Subtotal Checkout Check Money order Purchase order T Authorizre met Payflow Pro T PayPal Express Checkout PayPal Website Payments Pro Direct Payments PayPal Website Payments Standard PayPal Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition Express Checkout PayPal Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition Direct Payments Figure 160 Payment Methods A few payment options are described as follows Saved Credit Cards This option enables you to take credit cards and to process them offline This method is useful when you have a card terminal in
47. Having trouble installing Magento Check out our Installation Guide Figure 5 M Magento Community Installation Welcome Validation Magento Connect Manager Deployment Download License Agreement Localization Configuration Create Admin Account You re All Set Having trouble installing Magento Check out our Installation Guide Figure 6 Welcome to Magento Downloader This wizard will install Magento to your server Please visit Magento community site http www _magentocommerce com before you start to install Magento Downloader Welcome Page Validation for Magento Downloader PHP version is right Your version is 5 3 5 PHP Extension curl is loaded PHP Extension dom is loaded PHP Extension gd is loaded PHP Extension hash is loaded PHP Extension iconv is loaded PHP Extension mcrypt is loaded PHP Extension pcre is loaded PHP Extension pdo is loaded PHP Extension pdo_mysql is loaded PHP Extension simplexml is loaded Host localhost User Name User Password Magento Downloader Validation Page Check for InnoDB support 2 Click Continue to proceed to the Validation page as shown in Figure 6 Installing Magento CE This page tests your environment to determine if it will support Magento If error warnings are displayed correct the errors and click Check Again 3 When there are no more errors specify the host user name
48. LCD Cinema HD Monitor 524 99 1x19 Widescreen FlatPanel LCD Monitor 299 99 C 124 Widescreen Flat Panel LCD Monitor 524 99 Q 1x22 Syncmaster LCD Monitor 299 99 Required Fields Price as configured 112 50 Oty Add to Cart Figure 115 Bundle Product In Bundled product types there are differences in the General and Prices pages as follows SKU Fixed or Dynamic General tab Specifies whether the entire product is assigned an SKU based on its components or is the SKU fixed for the bundle 114 Setting Up Your Catalog Weight Fixed or Dynamic General tab Specifies whether the entire product s weight is based on the weight of its individual components or is the weight fixed for the entire bundle Price Fixed or Dynamic Price tab Specifies whether the price of the product us based on the price of its individual component or is the price fixed for the entire bundle Price View Price tab Specifies whether the product s price is shown as a range from the least expensive component to the most expensive Price Range or is only the least expensive shown As Low As The Bundle Items tab contains the following settings Ship Bundle Items Specifies whether individual components are shipped separately or whether the entire product is shipped Bundle Items Bundled Items appear in the store as a list of available options You can add a new option using the Add New Option button For
49. MSRP and define how the actual price is displayed Product level MAP settings override the global ones Setting up MAP on the global level By default the MAP functionality is disabled globally To enable and configure MAP 1 In the Magento Admin Panel select System and click Configuration 2 In the Current Configuration Scope in the upper left corner of the page select the desired website 3 In the left column under SALES click Sales 4 On the Minimum Advertised Price field set configure the following settings 210 Promotions Option Description Scope Select Yes to enable the MAP Website Enable MAP Apply MAP Default Value Display Actual Price Applies MAP to all catalog products If set to Yes all prices in the catalog on the frontend are substituted with the Click for price links On product pages the prices are either substituted with the Click for price links or with the information about how to see prices depending on the Display Actual Price setting Defines how the actual price is displayed on the frontend Select from the following On Gesture Clicking the Click for price link opens a pop up window containing the actual price On all other stages of the ordering process in the shopping cart on the order review the actual price is displayed normally In Cart Clicking the Click for price link in a catalog redirects to the product page On the product page the price is r
50. New Order RSS Reset Filter Select All Unselect All Select Visible Unselect Visible 0 items selected Actions Key ee Order Purchased from store Purchased On Bill to Name Ship to Name G T Base G T Purchased Status Action Filtering lAn M I v From fi From From v To i To To Sorting Figure 67 Filtering Controls Note The list displays only those orders that meet all the criteria that you specified 63 Introducing the Backend 64 Sorting orders Click on the header of a column to sort the orders by the value of that column Each click toggles between an ascending sort and a descending sort Order actions The Actions drop down list provides a list of actions that may be performed on the selected orders The actions that can be performed include the following Actions we Unhold TO Print Invoices Print Packingslips Print Credit Memos Print All Print Shipping Labels o Cancel Sets the order status to Canceled and disables any further processing o Hold Puts the order on hold The order is not affected in any way but no further action may be performed unless you release it from Hold status o Unhold Releases the order from Hold status o Printing options These options enable you to print various documents related to the order Viewing an order To view and or edit an existing order click row for the desired order or click the View option in the order s row in the Acti
51. Newsletter Templates to display a list of newsletter templates 2 In the Action drop down list for the relevant template select the Queue Newsletter option 3 In the Queue Date Start field specify when the newsletter will start being sent In the Subscribers From field select one or more store views whose customers this newsletter will be sent to 5 Review the template and parameters and then click the Save Newsletter button to schedule sending the newsletter Tip To ensure delivery of your newsletters it is recommended that you integrate your Magento CE installation with a third party newsletter provider These services are whitelisted by email service providers Look for newsletter providers in the Magento Connect website Newsletter Reports Three newsletter reports are provided in the Newsletter menu e Newsletter Queue Shows the newsletter queues that have been defined and indicates their progress in sending emails Newsletter Subscribers Shows a list of customers that have subscribed to your newsletter It also enables you to unsubscribe these customers manually Newsletter Problem Reports Shows a list of errors that have occurred while sending the email This Report enables you to remove the incorrect emails from the subscribers list 218 13 Managing Orders and Customers This chapter describes how to manage customer records and how to add orders from the backend Managing Customers Viewing and
52. Promotions 6 Click on the three dots to the right of the words is one of to display the value field as shown in Figure 187 Catalog Price Rule Rule Information Conditions Actions New Rule lt Back Reset Save and Apply Save Rule Conditions leave blank for all products lf ANY ofthese conditions are TRUE SKU is one of S06 Figure 187 Value Field 7 Click on the Chooser icon to display a list of products from which you can select as shown in Figure 188 Conditions leave blank for all products IfALL ofthese conditions are TRUE SKU is one of coal_sm oc_sm zol_r_sm co OO Page 1 ofi pages View 20 E x per page Total 16 records found M ID SKU Product Hame Any v shirt IV 35 coal_sm Coalesce Functioning On Impatience T Shirt IV 37 oc_sm The Only Children Paisley T Shirt IV 38 zol_r_sm Zolof The Rock And Roll Destroyer LOL Cat T shirt IV 117 coal_md Coalesce Functioning On Impatience T Shirt IV 118 coal_Irg Coalesce Functioning On Impatience T Shirt IV 119 coal_1 Coalesce Functioning On Impatience T Shirt V 123 oc The Only Children Paisley T Shirt IV 124 oc_med The Only Children Paisley T Shirt IV 125 oc_Irg The Only Children Paisley T Shirt IV 126 zol Zolof The Rock And Roll Destroyer LOL Cat T shirt IV 127 zol_g_sm Zolof The Rock And Roll Destroyer LOL Cat T shirt IV 128 zol_r_med Zolof The Rock And Roll Destroyer LOL Cat T shirt IV 129 zol_g_med Zolof The Ro
53. Reviews Other 438 More info 45 564 Downloads Version 1 4 0 0 last uploaded Sat February 13 2010 By Magento Core Tee dele S l Performance 51 Personalization 121 Pricing amp Promotion 141 Blue Skin FREE Search 52 Blue skin to Magento default theme Q 34 Reviews SEO 80 Ss More Info e a amp 39 559 Downloads Shipping 229 Version 1 3 1 last uploaded Sat April 18 2009 z Q By Magento Core Shopping Cart 84 Widgets 143 View All osCommerce Migration Tool FREE osCommerce Migration Tool Q 125 Reviews Figure 166 Magento Connect 3 This example demonstrates the implementation of the Modern Theme Scroll down the list of extensions and select the Modern Theme 4 Install the theme as you would any other Magento extension See Extending Magento page 252 for more information 5 You can now activate this theme so that the web store appears with a new layout Select System gt Configuration gt Design and expand the Themes section The Design page is displayed as shown in Figure 167 175 Design and Content Save Config Design Package Themes Translations Templates Add Exception Match expressions in the same order as displayed in the configuration Skin Images CSS Layout Add Exception Add Exception Default Add Exception HTML Head Header Footer Product Image Watermarks Figure
54. Select the check box next to one or more indexers to change 2 From the Actions list click Change Index Mode This displays the Index Mode list From the Index Mode list click the desired option Click Submit The value in the Mode column updates to indicate your choice Using URL Rewrites URL rewriting sometimes referred to as request rewriting enables you to access resources such as product pages categories and so on by additional uniform resource identifiers URIs For example suppose your web store has a product named Microsoft Natural Ergonomic Keyboard 4000 assigned to the Computer Peripherals category By default the product can be accessed using a URL like http www example com peripherals microsoft natural ergonomic keyboard 4000 html1 URL redirect enables you to create an additional URL like http www example com great keyboard html Using URL rewriting you can choose a combination of Custom category or product URL rewrite type Request path which can be any valid URI for example for a seasonal promotion you might want a product URL to end with best valentines gift html Target path which specifies the actual path to the product or category for example for a promotion you might want a category named spring sale Note The custom and target path options enable you to redirect to a custom path such as a Content Management System CMS path The target path must be valid otherwis
55. Shipping Address select the Shipping Method and select the Payment Method The last step of the checkout process enables the customer to review the entire order as shown in Figure 54 34 O Order Review Product Name Coalesce Functioning On Impatience T Shirt Size Small Forgot an Item Edit Your Cart Price Qty Subtotal 15 00 1 15 00 Subtotal 15 00 Shipping amp Handling Flat Rate Fixed 5 00 Tax 1 24 Grand Total 21 24 Place Order Figure 54 Order Review Introducing the Frontend YOUR CHECKOUT PROGRESS Billing Address Change Test User Company test street 1 test street 2 Test City California 90123 United States T 123 123 1234 Shipping Address Change Test User Company test street 1 test street 2 Test City California 90123 United States T 123 123 1234 Shipping Method Change Flat Rate Fixed 5 00 Payment Method Change Check Money order Note The right column shows the summary of information entered during the previous checkout steps and enables you to change any of the information that is incorrect Customers then confirm the order and receive an order number or they can change their minds and edit their carts using the Edit Your Cart link If they proceed with the order and the payment is processed successfully then a Thank You page is displayed as shown in Figure 55 Your order has been received Thank you for your purchase Your o
56. Use the WYSIWIG editor to define the content for this page Click Design in the left navigation bar to open the design options as shown in Figure 172 Design and Content Page Layout Layout 4 column w Layout Update XML Custom Design Custom Design From Po E Custom Design To Po E Custom Theme Please Select M Custom Layout Please Select O M Custom Layout Update XML Figure 172 Custom Design Options 9 Click the Layout field and then select one of the following options Empty Shows the content of an empty page with no header footer or side bars 1 Column Displays all the content entered in a single central column with a header and footer 2 Columns with left right bar Displays all the content entered on the page with a header footer and left right bar 3 columns Displays both the left and right columns from the design package with the content shown between 10 Click Save Page You can now open a browser and browse to this Landing page The URL is taken from the value that you specified for URL Key as described above For example our_history is added to the web store s URL 179 Design and Content 180 11 The following steps show how to add a link to this page from the frontend s footer Select CMS gt Static Blocks option to display the list of existing Static Blocks 2 Click on the Footer Links row to display the definition of the frontend s footer Edit Block
57. You can always remove it later What s this aS kS kS aty 7 Add to Cart ie nn OR The safer easier way to pay Details Brown Bear Click on image to zoom Figure 207 Product page on the fronted Display Actual Price of the product is set to In Cart Before Order Confirmation Clicking the Click for price link in a catalog redirects to the product page where the following message is displayed instead of the price or next to the crossed out MSRP See price before order confirmation The What s this link points to further explanations The actual price and totals are displayed on the Order Review step of the one page checkout or on the order review pages of the Google checkout or PayPal checkout See Figure 208 M M a ento MY ACCOUNT MY WISHLIST amp MY CART 0 v CHECKOUT ij 8g Q Enter search keyword GO Paton Toy Sets Accessories Home Fluffy Toys LadyBird Funny Toy LadyBird Funny Toy Be the first to review this product Availability In stock 408 See price before order confirmation What s this ey Qty 1 Add to Cart ae OR The safer easier way to pay Details Fluffy Toys Click on image to zoom gt Email to a Friend Figure 208 Product page on the fronted Display Actual Price of the product is set to In Cart 209 Promotions For products that allow configuration on the frontend and whose prices depend on the variant selected t
58. a brick and mortar store or have access to a virtual terminal This payment method is enabled by default in the Sample Data 167 Payment Tip When using the Credit Cards payment method it is highly recommended to configure an SSL certificate for your web store Note Saving customer card data is discouraged unless absolutely necessary Even though the data is encrypted it still poses a security risk to hold this information To set up the Saved Credit Cards payment method 1 3 Select System gt Configuration gt Payment Methods to display the Payment Methods page In the Current Configuration Scope drop down list select the scope for these configuration selections Expand the Saved CC section to define credit cards as shown in Figure 161 Saved CC al Enabled Title New Order Status Credit Card Types Request Card Security Code 20 Secure Card Validation Payment from Applicable o E Payment from Specific Minimum Order Total Maximum Onder Total Yes J WEBSITE STORE VIEW WEBSITE WEBSITE Ha w i EBSI TE Nog WEBSITE AI Allowed Countries M WEES ITE WEBSITE WESTE WESSITE Figure 161 Saved Credit Card Configuration Options 4 Make your configuration selections Most of these options are self explanatory The options that may need some explanation are as follows 168 Payment Request Card Security Code Determines whether the payment method in
59. a newer version is released Select a format for downloading Sample Data Multiple compressed formats are provided If you are unsure of which version to download then use the zip format Click the Download button and save the file to the location of your choice Step 3 Uploading to Your Server l2 After you have downloaded the Magento downloader and Magento Sample Data you must upload these packages to your server To upload to your server 1 The file names are magento downloader x x x zip or tar gz or tar bz2 depending on the format that you downloaded for the Magento downloader and magento sample data x x x zip for the Magento Sample Data Extract unzip the files to a directory of your choice Use your favorite FTP SFTP program to copy the contents of the magento folder from the Magento downloader package to the server s root WWW directory which is usually named public_html or any other subdirectory of your choice such as store Installing Magento CE Step 4 Granting File Access Permissions The top level Magento directory on the server the directory to which you uploaded the decompressed files and all Magento directories under it must have the correct permissions in order for the Magento Installer to operate properly For instructions on setting file permissions see the following Knowledge Base article http www magentocommerce com knowledge base entry ce1 8 and ee1 13 installing install p
60. agreement check box 6 An extension key similar to the following is displayed magento core Mage_lIdeal This is a special link to an extension that Magento recognizes Click Select to select it and then copy it to the clipboard Ctrl C 7 In the Admin Panel select System gt Magento Connect gt Magento Connect Manager Log in using your backend username and password and click Log In 9 Paste the extension key in the Install New Extensions section as shown in Figure 250 Install New Extensions El Search for modules via Magento Connect Paste extension key to install magento core Mage_Ideal Install Figure 250 Pasting the Extension Key 10 Click the Install button and wait until the installation has finished You can now return to the backend and start using the extension that you have just installed Note After you install a payment module this new option appears in the System menu under Configuration gt SALES gt Payment Methods CAPTCHA CAPTCHA functionality is used to ensure that a human being is interacting with the site rather than another computer It can be used in the backend and frontend CAPTCHA in Magento is visual and is fully configurable The CAPTCHA was implemented using a module from Zend Framework CAPTCHA Quick Reference The following table lists the main tasks related to the CAPTCHA functionality and the places where they are performed in the Magento Admin Panel Task
61. and search engine optimization To define general page features 1 Click the HTML Head heading to expand the field set as shown in Figure 17 Design Basic Configuration Save Config Package a HTML Head O Favicon Icon Default Title Title Prefix Title Suffix Default Description Default Keywords Default Robots Miscellaneous Scripts Display Demo Store Notice Header Footer Product Image Watermarks Pagination Browse STORE VIEW Allowed file types ICO PNG GIF JPEG APNG SVG Not all browsers support all these formats Magento Commerce STORE VIEW STORE VIEW STORE VIEW Default Description STORE VIEW Magento Varien E commerce STORE VIEW INDEX FOLLOW STORE VIEW STORE VIEW This will be included before head closing tag in page HTML Yes STORE VIEW Figure 17 HTML Head Field Set Note The words in square brackets for example STORE VIEW indicate th of the associated opti 2 Click the Browse button and select an icon file on your local computer to use as a favicon This small icon appears in the address bar of your customers browsers 3 In the Default Title field specify the page title to be displayed in browsers for those pages that do not have their own title This information is also used to improve search engine visibility and performance 27 Basic Configuration 4 fa In the Title
62. another Store Pages General Configuration This section describes how to configure general aspects of your frontend pages These configurations are performed in the Configuration area of the Admin Panel 23 Basic Contiguration To access the Configuration section select System gt Configuration The tabs in the left column provide access to configuration options for different aspects of your Magento CE instance The Current Configuration Scope drop down list in the upper left corner of the page enables you to select the hierarch level website store store view to which the configuration will be applied To apply configuration settings at the global level that is for all your websites stores and store views leave Default Config selected To open the options for configuring your store pages design click the Design tab in the left column The Design page opens with a number of field sets Design Current Configuration Scope Default Config v Pack Manage Stores Themes Configuration HTML Head Header gt GENERAL General r A eee ree eee Product Image Watermarks An ee E a E E RTA Pagination Figure 16 Design Configuration Page HTML Head Field Set 26 The settings in the HTML Head field set on the Design tab are used to define general information about your store s pages These settings may not be visible to your customers but they are important for things such as traffic analytics
63. box on the Account Information tab of the Customer Information page 264 Appendix VAT ID Validation VAT ID Validation During Order Creation in the Admin Panel This section describes the system behavior when an admin creates a new order in the Admin Panel with the VAT ID Validation functionality enabled and configured During order creation in the Admin Panel no VAT ID validation is performed automatically To validate the VAT ID of the customer address an administrator needs to click the Validate VAT Number button in the Billing Address or Shipping Address section of the Create New Order page See Figure 266 Billing Address Shipping Address Select from existing customer addresses Select from existing customer addresses Alex Marka Street London 1231cv United Kingdom Alex Marka Street London 1231cv United Kingdom E Same As Billing Address Prefix Prefix First Name Alex First Name Alex Middle Middle Namelinitial Namelinitial Last Name Marka Last Name Marka Suffix Suffix Company Company Street Address Street Street Address Street City London City London Country United Kingdom Country United Kingdom State Province State Province Zip Postal Code 1231cv Zip Postal Code 1231 Telephone 123123 Telephone 123123 Fax Fax VAT number 456789 VAT number 456789 Attachment1 Attachment1 T F Save in address book E Save in address book Figure 266 Validating custom
64. can be defined as a shopping cart price rule See Promotions page 185 for more information This option enables you to set up free shipping that is valid only when a customer provides the appropriate discount code To define free shipping 1 Select System gt Configuration gt Shipping Methods 2 Expand the Free Shipping section to enable free shipping with optional minimum order amount as shown in Figure 155 154 Free Shipping Shipping Enabled Title Method name Minimum order amount Displayed Error Message Ship to applicable countries ship to Specific countries sort order No ae Free Shipping Free This shipping method is currently unavailable If you would like to ship using this shipping method please contact us All Allowed Countries E H amp a AT Af Figure 155 Free Shipping Settings 3 Inthe Enabled field select Yes to enable the method In the Minimum order amount field specify the amount for an order over which shipping is provided free of charge 5 In the Ship to applicable countries field you can select the Specific Countries option to enable access to the field under it in which you can select specific countries so that free shipping is only applied to the relevant countries or you can select the All Allowed Countries to specify that free shipping is available for users from all countries Acquiring Additional Shipping Modules Nu
65. custom designs and page layouts see Design and Content page 173 1 For Use Parent Category Settings choose Yes to inherit the settings of this subcategory from its parent category Doing so ensures a consistent look within a category family and disables all other settings on this page This setting is not available for root categories For Apply to Products select Yes to apply the category page settings to the product pages of the products in this category Setting Up Your Catalog 3 Select a custom design from the Custom Design drop down list Magento CE comes with several custom designs already defined and you can modify these custom designs or create your own For more information see Managing CMS Pages page 178 4 For the Active From and Active To fields select the start and end dates for this custom design to be applied to this category If you do not select a start date the custom design is applied immediately If you do not select an end date the custom design is applied to this category until you manually deactivate it 5 For Page Layout select a layout from the drop down list No layout updates Uses the default settings that come with the Magento CE installation Empty Displays the category page without any objects except for the content products or static blocks only category name and view options number to display per page view as grid or list and sort be options 1 column
66. displaying in Magento If besides the regular price a product has promotional price s the lowest price value is displayed in the frontend If a product custom option has price set as a percentage than the lowest promotional price will be used as base for the calculation The same logic is applied when the associated products the options of a configurable product have prices set as a percentage The following table illustrates how the minimum promotional price logic is implemented The table provides several examples but it is not an exhaustive list of possible combinations Backend Price Settings Price Displayed in the Frontend Price 4 For customers from the tier price group s ee 4 S P 5 peee As low as 3 Tier Price 3 For customers from other groups 4 Price 5 For all customers Special Price 3 Special Price 3 Tier Price 4 Price 5 For customers from the catalog price rule group Keera PHee 5 Tier Price 4 Special Price 2 Special Price 3 Price after a catalog price rule applied 2 For customers from other groups Special Price 3 Price 5 For customers from the price group Reet Pree 5 Special Price 3 Special Price 4 Group Price 3 For customers from other groups Special Price 4 Important Note When a group price is set for a product then the catalog price rules for the corresponding customer groups are applied to the group price
67. do to keep your store healthy by setting up administrator roles and permissions using backups and rollbacks using a staging environment updating Magento CE and extending Magento CE Limiting Administrator Access to the Admin Panel Backend In Magento CE you can create individual accounts for each user to whom you want to allow access to the backend Admin Panel You can even create roles that define which Admin Panel functionality those administrator users will have access to Additionally Magento enables you to further restrict that admin access to only a specific site or set of sites and their associated data If you have multiple brands or business units with separate stores all on the same Magento installation this feature enables you to provide admin access to each of your business units but to still hide and protect their data from one another To limit which websites or stores administrator users can see when they log in to the Admin Panel you create a role with a limited scope and resources After you have created a restricted role you can assign that role to a specific admin user account Administrator users assigned to a restricted role will be able to see and change data only for websites or stores associated with that role They will also be unable to change global settings or data If an admin user s access Is restricted to a specific set of websites and or stores the websites and stores for which they are not authoriz
68. each option you can configure its title input type single and multiple selection fields are available whether the field is mandatory for example it can be True for a computer processor and False for an additional battery of a laptop computer and its position on the page Shipment Ship Bundle Items Bundle Items Add New Option Default Title Case Delete Option Input Type Is Required Position Drop down v Yes w 1 Add Selection Name Default Qty User Defined Qty Position Default Apevia Black X Cruiser Case ATX Mid Tower Case Default 1 0000 No v 0 K SKU apevia black NZXT Lexa Silver Aluminum ATX Mid Tower Case Default 1 0000 No v lo O SKU nztlexa Default Title CPU Delete Option Input Type Is Required Position B _ ee m DS 1 Add Selection Figure 116 Bundle Items Tab 115 Setting Up Your Catalog After you add options you can specify individual values for each option Click the Add Selection button to open a selection area as shown in Figure 117 Please select products to add Add Selected Product s to Option Page 1 gt of6 pages View 20 w perpage Total 102 records found 1D Product Name Attrib SetName SKU Price C aty To Add v From Any v To 166 HTC Touch Diamond Cell Phones HTC Touch 750 00 O Diamond 162 Microsoft Wireless Optical Mouse 5000 Default micronmouse5000 59 99 F 161 Logitech diNovo Edge Keyboard Default logidinovo 239 99 O 160 Logitech Cordles
69. email address as well as the logo image reference at the top of the page to reflect your own store information in all active templates Click the Save Template button Now that your customized email template is ready and available the next step is to inform Magento CE that it should use this template to send email to customers instead of the default template This is controlled in various configuration sections depending on the type of email Design and Content In our example of customizing a New Account email select System gt Configuration gt Customers gt Customer Configuration Then expand the Create New Account Options section and select your newly customized transactional email in the Default Welcome Email field 183 12 Promotions This chapter describes a variety of ways to promote your products Overview Magento CE features a variety of ways to promote your products These include options for presenting additional products in order to increase conversion rates and for providing various discounts and promotions The possibilities are endless Up selling Related Products and Cross selling Three types of product promotion selling options are provided in Magento CE Up sell products Related products and Cross sell products gt Up sell Products When a customer views a product the Up sells for this product are items that your customer could buy nstead of the product that is being viewed
70. first search for it on Magento Connect which is our marketplace for extensions You can access Magento Connect at http www magentocommerce com magento connect The Magento Connect home page is displayed as shown in Figure 248 Home Magento Connect Mage nto con nect The Official Marketplace for Magento Extensions Featured Extensions A MagentoConnect Manager Sweet Tooth Reward Point MagentoConnect Manager ZizioGroupSale Magento A MANAGER FREE Extension 52 reviews MagentoConnect Manager Learn More Vw MagentoConnect Manager a 378200 downloads GET DETAILS What would you like to do Subscribe to new extensions lt Follow us on Twitter E Sion up for our newsletter Ey Create amp Upload Extensions Search for Extensions Enter keyword Q EXPLORE MAGENTO CONNECT By Version Community Open Source Enterprise By Category Administration 478 Advertising amp Marketing 220 Analytics 48 Automation 86 All Paid Free Community Ed ENTERPRISE DEVELOPER Magento MANAGER MagentoConnect mie a Po h 8 8 prno me A EM Casual Idealo Connect othing Shop Top Paid f Explore Most Popular Extensions 4 Free Extensions lt Choose from among several paid R Browse top free extensions created gt extensions beginning with those that b by top developers around the world have been downloaded the most Y view top extensions gt
71. for the price rule you create the Conditions that specify when the rule is triggered The following example shows how to create a rule that has one condition which checks when the shopping cart subtotal is over 100 To define Catalog Price Rule Conditions Select the Conditions option in the panel on the left and define a rule with the single condition Subtotal equals or greater than 100 as shown in Figure 192 Apply the rule only if the following conditions are met leave blank for all products TALL ofthese conditions are TRUE Subtotal equals or greater than 100 amp amp Figure 192 Shopping Cart Price Rule Condition Defining the Cart Price Rule Actions Now that the condition has been defined that triggers this rule you must define the actions to be taken The following defines that 10 is reduced from the product s original price To define Cart Price Rule Actions 1 Select the Actions option in the panel on the left to display the page shown in Figure 193 Update prices using the following information Apply Percent of product price discount Discount amount 10 Maximum Gty Discount is o E Applied to Discount Qty Step Bu w Free shipping Mo gt Stop further rules Mo processing Figure 193 Specifying Shopping Cart Price Rule Actions 197 Promotions 2 The Action tab has two important sections The first one controls the discount In the Apply field select Percent o
72. i From From v To E To To oO 100000002 Main Website Mar 22 2009 Test User Test User 21 24 21 24 Pending View Main Store 12 24 43 AM English F 100000001 Main Website Mar 22 2009 Test User Test User 21 24 21 24 Pending View Main Store 12 24 10 AM English Figure 64 Orders Page This page displays a list of the orders placed in your web store The following describes some of the options for managing orders in this page Quantity of Orders Displayed The top part of the page enables you to control how many orders are displayed in the page as shown in Figure 65 Page 1 ofipages View per page Total 2 records found New Order RSS Figure 65 Order Display Controls Selecting Orders The area under the order display controls enables you to select unselect all the orders in your web store or to select unselect all the orders currently visible meaning those that are currently displayed in this page Select All Unselect All Select Vssibl Unselect Visible 0 items selected Figure 66 Order Selection Controls Note You can also select individual orders by selecting the check box on the left of each order Filtering Orders The area under the order selection controls enables you to filter the orders that are displayed by specifying values in one or more of the fields and then clicking Search To display all orders click Reset Filter Page 4 of1pages View 20 w per page Total 2 records found
73. in the Default Value field 7 Ifthe value of the attribute must be unique for each product for example a SKU number select Yes for Unique Value 8 If the value of the attribute cannot be blank for any product select Yes for Values Required 90 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Setting Up Your Catalog In the Input Validation for Store Owner field select the type of validation that should be enforced on values of this attribute For example if the values of this attribute will be email addresses select Email to cause the system to check each entered value of this attribute against the rules for valid email addresses If this attribute will apply only to certain Magento CE product types select Selected Product Types for Apply To In the list that appears select one or more product types for this attribute use Ctrl click to select multiple items For Use in Quick Search and Use in Advanced Search select Yes to enable the quick search and advanced search tools to search this attribute s values For Comparable on Front end select Yes to have this attribute appear in the compare window when products are compared The Use in Layered Navigation field defines whether the attribute is used in layered navigation The following options are available Filterable with results Only those attribute values that correspond to the existing products in your frontend catalog will be used in the layered navigation
74. number of attempts to log in from one IP address is 1 000 This limitation is only applied when the CAPTCHA functionality is enabled CAPTCHA Timeout minutes Defines for how long the displayed CAPTCHA is valid After the timeout a user needs to reload the page Number of Symbols Defines the number of symbols that are used for creating CAPTCHA Maximum allowed value is 8 You can also specify a range for example 5 8 Symbols Used in CAPTCHA Defines what symbols are used in CAPTCHA Only letters a z and A Z and numbers 0 9 are allowed The default set of symbols suggested in the field excludes similar looking symbols like i I 1 Displaying these symbols in CAPTCHA decreases the chances that a user will recognize CAPTCHA correctly e Case Sensitive Defines whether letters in CAPTCHA are case sensitive 5 To save the settings click Save Config 256 Keeping Your Store Healthy CAPTCHA User Experience The CAPTCHA in Magento is visual The following pictures illustrate the way CAPTCHA is displayed in the frontend and the backend Login or Create an Account Registered Customers Ifyou have an account with us login using your email address Email Address Password Please type the letters below LOGIN Remember Me What s this Required Fields Figure 251 CAPTCHA in the frontend Users can reload the displayed CAPTCHA by clicking the Reload icon in the upper right corner of the image
75. over 50 eee o re oc bere Buy Canon t lt This offer is valid on all our store items ana 2 aha Starting at 499 Best Selling Products sasn amp COMMUNITY POLL Sony VAIO VGN Nine West Women s What is your favorite Magento TXN27N B 11 1 Lucero Pump ees Notebook PC SLE See all Shoes Layered Navigation See all Laptops toy 9 Price Rules Category Management POPULAR TAGS Compare Products Olympus Stylus 750 Acer Ferrari 3200 Camera Hohoho SEXY Test LAMP Digital Camera Notebook Computer PC Vote opie bones COO soo t shirt srap See all Digital Cameras See all Laptops aod green hip aptop Modern nice y te notebook phone red tight young View All Tags ASICS Men s GEL Kayano XII Coalesce Functioning On Impatience T Shirt See all Shoes See all Shirts AboutUs Customer Service Site Map Search Terms Advanced Search Contact Us Help Us to Keep Magento Healthy Report All Bugs ver 1 2 1 2008 Magento Demo Store All Rights Reserved Figure 26 Magento CE Store Frontend Finding the Right Products The Magento CE frontend is also referred to in this guide as your web store It provides a variety of options for browsing through the products offered and then drilling down to view detailed information about each product Magento CE enables you to define the default appearance of how multiple products are presented such as whether the
76. section as shown in Figure 132 Tax Class for Shipping Tax Class for Giff Options Figure 132 Tax Class for Shipping and Gift Options 4 In the Tax Class for Shipping field designate a product tax class for the shipping amount or select None if your store does not charge an additional tax on shipping expenses 5 In the Tax Class for Gift Options field designate a product tax class for gift options or select None if your store does not charge an additional tax on gift options Note For more information about product tax classes and how to set them up see Product Tax Class page 135 6 Expand the Calculation Settings section as shown in Figure 133 137 1axes 132 Calculation Settings Tax Calculation Method Based On Total WEBSITE Tax Calculation Based On Shipping Address WEBSITE Catalog Prices Excluding Tax WEBSITE Whether catalog prices entered by admin include tax shipping Prices Excluding Tax x WEBSITE Whether shipping amounts entered by admin or obtained from gateways include tax Apply Customer Tax Before Discount WEBSITE Apply Discount On Prices Excluding Tax x WEBSITE Apply discount on price including tax is calculated based on store tax if Apply Tax after Discount is selected Apply Tax On Custom price if available WEBSITE Figure 133 Tax Calculation Settings 7 In the Tax Calculation Method Based On field select which a
77. select the parent category it can be either a root category or a category in the list and click Add Subcategory Four tabs of information are provided to describe this category General Information Display Settings Custom Design and Category Products Click each tab and specify the requested information as described below Note Required fields appear with a red asterisk General Information Tab Most of the fields in this page are self explanatory In this tab you are asked to provide a category name description images used to represent your category as well as meta keywords and description for better search engine positioning 79 Setting Up Your Catalog 80 General Information Name STORE VIEW Is Active No v STORE VIEW URL key STORE VIEW Thumbnail Image C Browse STORE VIEW Description STORE VIEW WYSIWYG Editor Image Browse STORE VIEW Page Title STORE VIEW Meta Keywords STORE VIEW Meta Description STORE VIEW Include in Navigation Menu Yes v STORE VIEW Figure 76 Create a New Category General Information Specify a name for this category in the Name field Set the Is Active field to Yes to specify that this category appears in the store In the URL key field you can specify a relative URL path which can be entered in place of the standard Target Path It is search engine friendly because it can use the name of the category instead of the ID number If yo
78. tags that you want to approve or all of the tags that you want to disable 3 Inthe Action drop down list select Change Status The Status drop down list becomes visible 4 Inthe Status drop down list select Approve or Disable Note To modify a tag or view details about a tag such as the product or products it was applied to or the name of the customer who submitted it click the row for that tag Note If a customer has entered a tag that you do not want to ever see again simply change the status to Disabled Managing Polls Polls provide a powerful marketing tool for finding out the opinion of your customers about your products store customer service or anything else It is very simple to create a poll Figure 235 shows an example of how a poll appears in the frontend gt COMMUNITY POLL What is your favorite color O Green C Red Black O Magenta Figure 235 Poll on the Frontend A poll occupies only a small amount of space on your store pages and is shown in the right column by default Poll results are immediately displayed to the customer after the customer submits an answer as shown in Figure 236 COMMUNITY POLL What is your favorite color Green 4 665 Red 1 1 95 Black 0 0 Magenta 1 17 Figure 236 Poll Results 230 Managing Customer Generated Content To create a poll 1 In the Admin Panel select CMS gt Polls to open the Poll Manager page which shows a list of existin
79. the Results column shows a low number or zero then you should review your product names and descriptions to promote products related to this keyword Search Synonyms and Redirects The following shows you how to fine tune Magento s search behavior Two mains options are provided Search Synonyms Misspelled search terms may mean missed opportunities for you If you know that a frequently used search term is often misspelled by customers and thus does not display results you can add additional search terms Redirects You can specify that when a customer searches for a certain term that they are re directed to a specific page Direct customers to a specific product page a specific brand landing page or an informational page For example the search term Returns can take customers directly to the Shipping Policy page The following example demonstrates how to add the misspelled search term latop so that the results are returned for the correct term laptop To add new search synonym and or redirection 1 In the Admin Panel select Catalog gt Search Terms to display the Search page as shown in Figure 242 Search Add New Search Term Page 1 of2pages View 20 perpage Total 39 records found Reset Filter Search Select All Unselect All Select Visible Unselect Visible 0 items selected Actions v Submit Search Query Store Results Number of Uses Synonym for Redirect Di
80. the Full Magento Package from the Community download page 14 Click Continue Magento installation to proceed 15 Read and agree to the terms of Magento s license More information is provided about this subject in the Magento License section on page 3 Click Continue 16 On the Localization page Figure 10 select your locale time zone and default currency These are default values for any web stores and web store views you create when you set these up you can select localization preferences for each one Installation Localization Welcome Locale settings Validation Magento Connect Manager locana Deployment English United States English United sfz Download License Agreement Time Zone Default Currency Localization Pacific Standard Time America Los_Ange US Dollar Configuration Create Admin Account You re AIl Set Having trouble installing Magento Check out our Installation Guide Required Fields Figure 10 Magento Installation Wizard Localization Page Note Localization settings can be changed later if needed Click Continue to proceed to the next page 1 7 On the Configuration page Figure 11 change the default values as needed according to your requirements and database information 18 Installing Magento CE M Magento Installation Configuration Welcome Database Connection Validation Magento Connect Manager Host Database Name Deployment localhost magento Dow
81. the customer does not already exist in your customer records click Create New Customer on the first Create New Order page You will need to complete all the address information 4 Click the Add Products button to display the list of products as shown in Figure 219 Please select products to add Add Selected Product s to Order Page 1 gt of6 pages View 20 w perpage Total 104 records found Reset Filter BERE Product Name O Qty To Ac 4 Any w 166 HTC Touch Diamond HTC Touch 750 00 F Diamond 162 Microsoft Wireless Optical Mouse 5000 micronmouse5000 59 99 O 161 Logitech diNovo Edge Keyboard logidinovo 239 99 O 160 Logitech Cordless Optical Trackman logitechcord 579 99 Fi 159 Microsoft Natural Ergonomic Keyboard 4000 microsoftnatural 99 99 O 157 30 Flat Panel TFT LCD Cinema HD Monitor M9179LL 699 99 CO 156 19 Widescreen Flat Panel LCD Monitor W1952TQ TF 399 99 Fj 155 Seagate 250GB HD 5400RPM 250gb5400 99 00 F 154 Seagate 500GB HD 5400RPM 500gb5400 299 00 O 153 Intel Core 2 Extreme QX9775 3 20GHz Retail intelcore2extreme 2 049 99 oO 152 24 Widescreen Flat Panel LCD Monitor W2452T TF 699 99 O 151 Intel C2D E8400 3 0GHz Retail intelc2d 598 99 F 150 Western Digital 500GB HD 7200RPM 500gb7200 299 00 oO 149 Western Digital 1TB HD 7200RPM 1tb7200 399 00 d La e sAN oO Ta 98 99 FJ B Figure 219 Product List for Creating Orders 5 Use the check boxes to select the products to be purchased and
82. the same website 143 axes Store View The value of this attribute for a given product can differ on all websites and all store views For example if you were creating an attribute called Color with a Store View scope you would be able to set the color of a product to green in one store view and blue in another store view 5 In the Catalog Input Type for Store Owner field select Fixed Product Tax 6 Inthe Apply To field select one of the following options o All Product Types o Selected Product Types If you select this option a dropdown list shows the product types to which you can choose to apply this attribute 7 Click Save Attribute The following figure shows the New Product Attribute for the Fixed Product Tax New Product Attribute Back Save Attribute Save and Continue Edit Attribute Code eco_tax For mternal use Must be unique with no spaces Maximum length of attribute code must be less then 30 symbols Catalog Input Type for Store Fixed Product Tax Owner Apply To All Product Types Figure 145 Fixed Product Tax Attribute Step 3 Assign the FPT Attribute to an Attribute Set To assign the new attribute to an attribute set 1 From the Admin panel select Catalog gt Attributes gt Manage Attribute Sets 2 In the Manage Attribute Sets area click the name of the attribute set in which you want to include the FPT attribute This example uses the Default attribute set 3 The E
83. they can be moved to other attribute groups Therefore you can remove an attribute group as long as there are no system attributes within it The order of both the attribute groups and the attributes can be changed by selecting and dragging them This affects the order of tabs and attributes on the product page in the backend respectively You can also create a new attribute group to which you can move system attributes or associate simple attributes Setting Up Your Catalog Groups Add New Delete Selected Group Double click on a group to rename it Gil General Egname model Ed sku Ea weight Manufacturer Fl status atax_class_id url_key visibility gif_message_available Fn news from date Fal news to date Prices HG Meta Information Descriptions a Images Gi Cell Phone Attributes a Design Figure 92 Attribute Groups To create a new attribute group 1 Click Add New in the Groups area to display a popup window asking for the group name Specify the name of the new group and click OK Click and drag attributes from the Unassigned Attributes area into the newly created group to assign them to this group 4 You can also click and drag attributes that are already assigned to move them between groups Managing Products This section describes how to define and edit products Tip You should first define attributes and an attribute set as described in Managing Product Attributes
84. to point to the domain name for example somecompany_com d Optional In the Sort Order field specify an integer number to determine where this website is listed in scope selection drop down lists in the backend A specification of 1 places this website at the top of the list 2 places it second and so on e Click Save Website 3 To create a new store a From the Manage Stores page click Create Store to open the New Store page b In the Website drop down list select the website that will be the parent of this store c Inthe Name field specify a name for this store d In the Root category drop down list select the root category for this store A root category can be assigned to more than one store or to stores in different websites e Click Save Store 4 Tocreate a new store view a From the Manage Stores page click Create Store View to open the New Store View page 127 Setting Up Your Store Hierarchy b In the Store drop down list select the store that is associated with this store view c Inthe Name field specify a name for this store view for example French d In the Code field specify a code for this store view for example somecompany fr e In the Status drop down list select whether this store view is Enabled or Disabled f Optional In the Sort Order field specify an integer number to determine where this store view is listed under its associated store in scope selection drop
85. to the CSV file In the Entity Attributes list select the Skip check box for any attributes that you want to exclude from the CSV file By default all records are exported to the CSV file Use the controls in the Filter column to limit the records that are exported Click Continue to export your selected product information to a CSV file Open the saved file in your favorite spreadsheet application and edit as needed Setting Up Your Store Hierarchy If you have planned your store hierarchy see Store Hierarchy page 25 and set up the appropriate root categories see Creating Categories page 79 you are ready to set up your store hierarchy To set up your store hierarchy 1 In the Admin Panel select System gt Manage Stores to open the Manage Stores page as shown in Figure 131 Manage Stores Create Website Create Store Create Store View Page 4 ofipages View 20 perpage Total 3 records found Reset Filter Search Website Name Store Name Store View Name Main Website Main Website Store aaaaaaa Main Website Main Website Store Default Store View Test Site Test Store 1 French Figure 131 Manage Stores Page 2 To create a new website a Click Create Website to open the New Website page b Inthe Name field specify a name for this website Typically this will be the site s domain name for example somecompany com c Inthe Code field specify a code name that the Apache Web server will use
86. to view categories for that store You can also click All Store Views In the left pane click the name of an existing category Click Add Subcategory In the Name field specify Demo category eS a E From the Is active list click Yes 9 Click Save Category 10 Click the Category Products tab 11 Click Reset Filter to display your products LeU Indexing 12 Select the check box of several products to add them to the new category The following figure shows an example Delete Category Save Category Demo category ID 36 General Information Display Settings Custom Design Category Products Page 1 of6pages View 20 perpage Total 120 records found Reset Filter wo Name SKU Price Position Any From From To To 166 HTC Touch Diamond HTC Touch 750 00 Diamond Fj 165 My Computer mycomputer 7 164 Gaming Computer computer_fixed 4 999 95 ry 163 Computer computer Fj 162 Microsoft Wireless Optical Mouse 5000 micronmouse5000 59 99 F 161 Logitech diNovo Edge Keyboard logidinovo 239 99 160 Logitech Cordless Optical Trackman logitechcord 79 99 Fj 159 Microsoft Natural Ergonomic Keyboard 4000 microsoftnatural 99 99 v 158 Sony VAIO 11 1 Notebook PC VGN TXN27N BW 157 30 Flat Panel TFT LCD Cinema HD Monitor M9179LL 699 99 Fj 156 19 Widescreen Flat Panel LCD Monitor W1952TQ TF 399 99 155 Seagate 250GB HD 5400RPM 25095400 99 00
87. view full picture om f a Shoulder to shoulder taping MORE VIEWS e Double needle sleeves and bottom hem Choose option 1 0 ay Figure 120 Configurable Product This is the most complex configuration page and it is described below it in three stages Select Configurable Attributes This section enables you to select the product attributes that can be configured The only attributes that are available on this tab are those that have a scope of Global an input type of Dropdown and the Use to create configurable product option set to Yes Select Configurable Attributes iy Only attributes with scope Global input type Dropdown and Use To Create Configurable Product Yes are available Color E Manufacturer E Figure 121 Select Configurable Attributes Use the check boxes to select one or more desired attribute and then click Continue 118 Setting Up Your Catalog Create Simple Associated Product This section enables you to create simple products along with the configurable product Create Simple Associated Product Create Empty Copy From Configurable Figure 122 Create Simple Associated Product Click the Create Empty button to open a popup window with a regular product creation page but which has a preselected product type Simple Product and an attribute set that is the same as the configurable product The Copy from Configurable button works in a very similar manner to the
88. well Date and Time Custom Options The options in this section control how dates and times are displayed in your store Use JavaScript Calendar Enables your store to present a JavaScript powered calendar date picker in any field that requires the customer to select a date When this option is set to No then drop down lists are provided to select the date and time Date Fields Order and Time Format Select the order in which the day month and year values are presented in the format xx yy zz and select a 12 hour a m p m or 24 hour time format These fields are important for store views that are targeted for specific countries that use date and time formats that are different from your local custom Year Range Indicate the range of years that is available for selection in either the JavaScript calendar or calendar drop down lists Use a four digit year format Managing Categories This section describes how to display create and edit categories and subcategories The products in the web store are grouped into categories Categories enable you to give your store structure and form In Magento CE each store you create is assigned to a unique category Any other category that you want to use in your store must be created as a subcategory All categories are technically considered subcategories because you are placing them under the root category See Figure 74 Vin Setting Up Your Catalog Apparel Store Root Categ
89. which you want to define Related Products Promotions 3 Select the Related Products tab in the panel on the left to display the Product Listing page Tip By default the list shows only products that were already selected as Related Products If there are none or you want to add other products click the Reset Filter button to display a list of all the products 4 Use the check box in each row of the products that you want to appear as Related Products to this product 5 Click the Save button Cross sells Cross sell products are shown in a block below the shopping cart products as shown in Figure 182 Based on your selection you may be Interested in the following items 19 Widescreen Flat Panel LCD Monitor 399 99 Add to Cart Add to Wishlist Add to Compare Figure 182 Cross Sell Item Cross sell products are displayed after a product has already been added to the shopping cart By default three products are randomly selected by Magento CE from the products that have been defined as Cross sell products of all the products in the shopping cart To add Cross sell products to a product 1 a In the Admin Panel select Catalog gt Manage Products to display a list of products Click the Edit link that appears on the right side of the row of the product for which you want to define Related Products Select the Cross Sells tab in the panel on the left to display the Product Listing page Tip By def
90. you will be able to generate multiple coupon codes Important If this shopping cart price rule has been used in an automated email reminder rule it will be automatically unassigned after shopping cart price rule is saved Figure 196 The Shopping Cart Price Rule page Enabling the auto generation of coupon codes The default settings for the format of auto generated coupon codes are configured under System gt Configuration gt Promotions gt Auto Generated Specific Coupon Codes For detailed description of the auto generation of coupon codes see Auto Generating Exporting and Managing Coupon Codes page 201 200 Promotions Configuring Coupon Codes Auto Generation Settings You can set the default requirements for the coupon code format under System gt Configuration gt Promotions gt Auto Generated Specific Coupon Codes The following settings are available for configuring Code Length Defines a coupon code length excluding prefix suffix and separators Code Format Defines a coupon code format The options are Alphanumeric a combination of letters and numbers Alphabetical letters only Numeric numbers only Code Prefix Defines a value that will be appended to the beginning of all the coupon codes If you do not want to use a prefix leave this field blank Code Suffix Defines a value that will be appended to the end of all codes If you do not want to use a suffix leave this field blan
91. 167 Design Page Tip The Add Exception option enables you to define special themes displayed for users using specific browsers An example is showing an iPhone optimized theme for users using this device to browse the store In the Default field specify the name of the theme In this example it is called Modern Click the Save Config button on the top right of the page The header footer menu bar and background of the frontend now look different according to the new theme If your home page appears incorrect it may be because the layout that you selected is suited to two columns when your home page has one column or vice versa For the Modern theme the following change must be applied so that that the frontend home page appears properly From the top menu bar in the Admin Panel select CMS gt Pages to display the Manage Pages page as shown in Figure 168 Manage Pages About Us Customer Service Home page Home page 404 Not Found 1 about magento demo store customer service home home no route 1 column 3 columns 2 columns with right bar 1 column 2 columns with right bar All Store Views All Store Views Main Website Main Store English Main Website Main Store German Main Website Main Store French All Store Views All Store Views Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Aug 30 2007 2 01 18 PM Aug 30 2007 2 02 20 PM Aug 23 2007 10 03 25 AM A
92. 236 COMMUNITY POLL What is your favorite Magento feature O Layered Navigation O Price Rules O Category Management O Compare Products Figure 58 Community Poll 7 5 Introducing the Backend In order to familiarize you with the features of the backend this chapter describes the ongoing management tasks that you can perform in the backend while running your Magento web store on a day to day basis See Accessing the Backend page 23 for details on logging in to your store s backend See Setting Up Your Catalog page 69 for a full description of how to set up your catalog Each of the subsequent chapters features a description of the other aspects of customizing your backend Understanding Scope Magento CE enables you to organize your operations into multiple websites stores and store views See Store Hierarchy page 25 for descriptions of these terms Many of the configuration pages in the backend enable you to select the website store or store view that you want your configuration changes to apply to Selecting the website store or store view is known as selecting the scope of your changes To select the scope for configuration changes use the Current Configuration Scope drop down list in the upper left corner of the configuration page as shown in Figure 59 Current Configuration Scope Default Config we Default Config Wain Website Main Website Store efault Store View New View T
93. 4 DEFINING LAYERED NAVIGATION FILTERS 85 PRICE LAYERED NAVIGATION 86 MANAGING PRODUCT ATTRIBUTES 88 WHAT IS AN ATTRIBUTE IN MAGENTO 88 CREATING ATTRIBUTES 89 CREATING ATTRIBUTE SETS 92 CREATING A NEW ATTRIBUTE GROUP 94 MANAGING PRODUCTS 95 PRODUCT TYPES 96 CREATING A NEW PRODUCT 96 MASS CHANGING PRODUCTS 121 CREATING VARIATIONS OF A PRODUCT 121 IMPORTING AND EXPORTING PRODUCT DATA 124 WORKING WITH CSV FILES 124 IMPORTING PRODUCT DATA 125 EXPORTING PRODUCT DATA 126 7 SETTING UP YOUR STORE HIERARCHY 127 8 TAXES 129 GENERAL TAXATION SETTINGS 129 PROBLEM CONFIGURATIONS AND RELATED DISPLAY ISSUES 130 PRODUCT TAX CLASS 135 CUSTOMER TAX CLASS 135 TAX ZONES AND RATES 136 TAX MANAGEMENT RULES 138 FIXED PRODUCT TAX 140 FIXED PRODUCT TAX FPT CALCULATION 140 STEP 1 ENABLE THE FPT TAX 141 STEP 2 CREATE A FIXED PRODUCT TAX ATTRIBUTE FOR PRODUCTS 143 STEP 3 ASSIGN THE FPT ATTRIBUTE TO AN ATTRIBUTE SET 144 STEP 4 APPLY THE FIXED PRODUCT TAX TO PRODUCTS 145 VALUE ADDED TAX 145 STEP 1 SET UP CUSTOMER TAX CLASSES 146 STEP 2 SET UP PRODUCT TAX CLASSES 146 VI Table of Contents STEP 3 SET UP TAX ZONES AND RATES 146 STEP 4 SET UP TAX RULES 147 STEP 5 APPLY TAX CLASSES TO PRODUCTS 147 COMPOUND TAXES 147 SETTING UP A COMPOUND TAX 148 9 SHIPPING 151 GENERAL SHIPPING SETTINGS 151 FLAT SHIPPING RATES 151 ONLINE RATES 153 OFFERING FREE SHIPPING 154 ACQUIRING ADDITIONAL SHIPPING MODULES 155 10 PAYMENT 157 PAYPAL 157 PAYPAL ADVANCED 1
94. 42 SKU 98 Sorting 44 Tax Class 98 135 Tax Classes 135 Taxes 129 Up sell 47 Up sells 185 186 Variations 121 Weight 98 Wizard 97 Promotional Information 45 Promotional Pages 46 Promotions 185 199 Purchasing Functionality 52 R Rates 136 Ratings 56 67 Customizing 232 Managing 231 Recently Viewed 45 Redirects 242 refreshing statistics 240 Refund Email 229 Refunding 228 reindexing 259 Related Products 48 185 188 Reports 239 Customer 222 Generating 67 239 Requirements 9 Reviews 56 67 Approving 233 Managing 231 rewrites URL 261 rolling back a backup 246 Rules Catalog Price 190 Price 190 Shopping Cart Price 195 S Sales Order 224 sales reports refreshing statistics 240 Search Engine 74 Search Redirects 242 Search Synonyms 242 Search Terms 75 Searching 42 Shipment 66 224 Email 227 Rates 151 Settings 32 Tracking Number 227 shipping additional modules 155 flat rate 151 free 154 online rates 153 Shipping Rates 151 Shipping Settings 151 SHOP BY Panel 79 shopping cart clearing 53 227 Shopping Cart Rules 195 Appendix VAT ID Validation Simple Associated Product 119 Site Map 74 Skins 8 SKU 98 Sorting Products 44 Special Prices 202 Staging Environment 249 store creating 127 store hierarchy 127 store view creating 127 Supervising Web Store Activities 61 Support 1 Synonyms 242 system backup 246 S
95. 5 Creating a New Product page 96 This step shows how to fill in product information in order to maximize conversion and how to assign Categories to help customers navigate to the products of interest to them Attribute sets and attributes are assigned to products to describe them provide multiple options and help the customer search through the product list Setting Up Catalog Defaults O The first step to creating your catalog is to configure the catalog system default settings In many cases these settings can be overridden at lower levels such as in individual categories and products To configure catalog defaults In the Admin Panel select System gt Configuration gt CATALOG gt Catalog In the Current Configuration Scope drop down select the scope of this configuration The following describes some of the more important sections in the page Frontend This section determines how your products are shown on the frontend catalog pages Setting Up Your Catalog Frontend List Mode Grid default List z STORE VIEW Products per Page on Grid 915 30 STORE VIEW Allowed Values Comma 2eparated Products per Page on Grid q STORE VIEW Default Value Must be in the allowed values list Products per Page on List 5 10 15 20 25 STORE VIEW Allowed Values Comma separated Products per Page on List Default 10 STORE VIEW Value Must be in the allowed values list Allow All Products per Page No STORE VIEW Whether to s
96. 59 GENERAL CONCEPT 159 CONFIGURING PAYPAL PAYMENTS ADVANCED 159 SETTING PAYPAL PAYMENTS ADVANCED OPTIONS IN THE MAGENTO ADMIN PANEL 160 SETTING THE PAYPAL PAYMENTS ADVANCED ACCOUNT OPTIONS ON THE PAYPAL MANAGER WEBSITE 161 PAYPAL PAYMENTS ADVANCED METHOD CUSTOMER EXPERIENCE 161 ORDER PROCESSING WHEN THE PAYPAL ADVANCED PAYMENT METHOD IS USED 162 PAYPAL EXPRESS CHECKOUT 162 SAVING THE CUSTOMER S BILLING ADDRESS 162 ORDER TRANSACTIONS IN PAYPAL EXPRESS 165 OTHER PAYMENT METHODS 167 SAVED CREDIT CARDS 167 CHECKS AND MONEY ORDERS 170 OTHER PAYMENT METHODS 171 11 DESIGN AND CONTENT 173 OVERVIEW 173 TERMINOLOGY 173 CHANGING THE WEB STORE S THEME 174 VII Table of Contents MANAGING CMS PAGES 178 CUSTOMIZING TRANSACTIONAL EMAILS 181 12 PROMOTIONS 185 OVERVIEW 185 UP SELLING RELATED PRODUCTS AND CROSS SELLING 185 UP SELLS 186 RELATED PRODUCTS 188 CROSS SELLS 189 CATALOG AND SHOPPING CART PRICE RULES 190 CATALOG PRICE RULES 190 SHOPPING CART PRICE RULES 195 EXAMPLE DEFINING A BUY 2 GET 1 FREE PROMOTION 199 AUTO GENERATING COUPON CODES 200 AUTO GENERATING COUPON CODES QUICK REFERENCE 200 CONFIGURING COUPON CODES AUTO GENERATION SETTINGS 201 AUTO GENERATING EXPORTING AND MANAGING COUPON CODES 201 TRACKING THE USAGE OF COUPON CODES 202 SPECIAL PRICES 202 TIER PRICING 204 MINIMUM ADVERTISED PRICE 205 MINIMUM ADVERTISED PRICE GENERAL CONCEPT 205 MINIMUM ADVERTISED PRICE A QUICK VIEW 206 SETTING UP MAP 210 SET
97. A shipment is a record of the products in an order that have been shipped More than one shipment can be associated with a single order Introducing Magento Community Edition Shopping cart The set of products that a customer has selected to purchase but has not yet purchased Store The second level of your store hierarchy A website can have multiple stores each potentially with its own root category and a store can have multiple store views Store View The lowest level of your store hierarchy Typically a store view is created for each locale or language All store views under a given store share the same catalog Customers use a drop down list on the frontend to switch from one store view to another Tax rule A combination of a product tax class customer tax class and tax rate This rule defines which tax calculation is applied Up sell An up sell item is one that is offered to the customer as an alternative to the product the customer is viewing These products may be more expensive of higher quality or more popular or produce a higher profit margin Virtual Product This is a product that does not require shipping or inventory It is generally used for warranties or services Website The highest level of your store hierarchy You can have multiple websites and each website can have a different domain name Websites can be set up to share customer data or to not share data Typically each website has different li
98. ATION IMPLEMENTATION DETAILS CUSTOMER EXPERIENCE ASSIGNING CUSTOMER GROUPS BASED ON VAT ID VALUE DURING REGISTRATION APPLYING AND ASSIGNING CUSTOMER GROUPS DURING CHECKOUT VAT ID VALIDATION IMPLEMENTATION DETAILS ADMIN EXPERIENCE THE VAT NUMBER CUSTOMER ADDRESS ATTRIBUTE DISABLING AUTOMATIC CUSTOMER GROUP CHANGE VAT ID VALIDATION IN CUSTOMER ACCOUNTS IN THE ADMIN PANEL VAT ID VALIDATION DURING ORDER CREATION IN THE ADMIN PANEL INDEX 276 276 276 278 279 280 280 281 283 283 283 284 285 287 XI About This Guide Welcome to the Magento Community Edition User Guide which provides an overview of the Magento Community Edition CE eCommerce platform developed by Magento Inc This guide is intended for web storeowners and first time users of Magento CE It provides a quick guide through the most important steps for getting your web store up and running and ready for selling online The options described in this user guide enable you to generate a feature rich and attractive eCommerce interface without the need for advanced technical expertise This guide first introduces Magento CE and its key concepts and then describes how to install Magento CE The following two chapters introduce the daily experience that a customer can have in a Magento web store and the daily management tasks that a storeowner would perform The rest of the chapters walk you through the process of setting up your Magento CE web store customizi
99. Add to Cart Add to Wishlist Add to Compare Figure 202 As Low As Indication Minimum Advertised Price This section describes how a Minimum Advertised Price MAP policy can be applied in Magento CE Minimum Advertised Price General Concept If you have a minimum advertised price in the agreement with a manufacturer you can still sell the merchandise at lower price though this price will be hidden It will not be visible to customers on the product page and will not be indexed by search engines As a result a price below the minimum advertised will not appear in any catalog of products collected from multiple web stores The crossed out price which can be displayed on catalog and product pages will be the manufacturer s suggested retail price MSRP For storing the MSRP value a new system attribute was added to the default attribute set 203 Promotions An individual setting enables you to specify how the actual price is shown to customers on clicking the Check for price link on a catalog or product page when a product is added to the shopping cart or before the order confirmation The MAP functionality can be applied to all product types except gift card products and bundle products with dynamic pricing The MAP functionality only influences the way products prices are displayed on the frontend The following terminology is used in reference to this feature Actual Price The price t
100. Admin Panel Menu Scope Enable and configure the System gt Configuration gt ADVANCED gt Admin gt Global CAPTCHA for the backend CAPTCHA Enable and configure the System gt Configuration gt CUSTOMERS gt Customer Website CAPTCHA for the frontend Configuration gt CAPTCHA 254 Keeping Your Store Healthy Enabling and Configuring CAPTCHA for the Backend To enable and configure CAPTCHA for the backend 1 Log in to the Magento Admin Panel 2 Navigate to System gt Configuration gt ADVANCED gt Admin gt CAPTCHA Make sure that the Current Configuration Scope is set to Default 3 Configure the following settings Enable CAPTCHA in Admin Enables CAPTCHA for the login pages of the Admin Panel Font Defines the font used for CAPTCHA displaying To add your own font put the font file in the same directory as your Magento instance and specify it in the config xml file that is stored in the app code core Mage Captcha etc folder Forms Defines the form on which CAPTCHA is displayed Available options Admin Login and Admin Forgot Password Displaying Mode Defines preconditions for displaying CAPTCHA Available options Always or After number of attempts to login If the latter is selected the Number of Unsuccessful Attempts to Login text field is displayed Setting Number of Unsuccessful Attempts to Login to 0 zero is similar to setting Displaying Mode to Always The After number of attempts to login optio
101. Config Price Layered Navigation Algorithm Store Customer Experience The price layered navigation algorithm provides the optimal distribution of products among price ranges In addition the feature provides iterative splitting of price ranges Setting Up Your Catalog Previously if a customer selected to view products from a certain price range there was no further subdivision to smaller price ranges on the resulting catalog page For example if a store customer clicked the 0 00 99 range the price filter on the page with a list of products contained the selected range only See Figure 81 shop By Shop By Price 0 00 99 99 90 Currently Shopping by 100 00 199 99 700 200 00 and above 10 Price 0 00 99 99 My color blue 1 Figure 81 Store customer experience with price layered navigation in Magento Enterprise 1 11 and earlier With the iterative splitting feature after a customer chooses to view the 0 00 99 range the price filter on the page with a list of products can contain several sub ranges See Figure 82 B Shop B Shop By Poy Currently Shopping by Price 0 00 99 99 90 Price 0 00 99 99 100 00 799 99 100 200 00 and above 10 Price My color 60 00 29 99 20 blue 1 30 00 49 99 20 00 00 64 99 15 69 00 79 99 15 60 00 99 99 20 Figure 82 Store customer experience with price layered navigation in Magento Enterprise 1 12 Note
102. D Group Name Tax Class 1 General Retail Customer 0 NOTLOGGED IN Retail Customer 3 Retailer Retail Customer 2 Wholesale Retail Customer Figure 214 Customer Groups Page 2 Do one of the following To create a new customer group click Add New Customer Group To edit an existing customer group click the row for the desired group The customer group editing page opens as shown in Figure 215 New Customer Group Back Group Information Group Name Tax Class Retail Customer v Figure 215 New Customer Group Page 3 Specify a unique name for this customer group or modify the existing name 4 Selecta tax class to associate with this group 5 Click Save Customer Group Checking Online Customers You can check which customers are currently online and view their activity To view online customers In the Admin Panel select Customers gt Online Customers to display the Online Customers page as shown in Figure 216 S Online Customers Page 1 of 1 pages View 20 M per page Total 1 records found ID First Name Last Name Email IP Address Session Start Time Last Activity Type Last Url From From From w To To To 2 Test Customer test testcompany com 127 0 0 1 Mar 24 2009 8 59 00 Mar 24 2009 Customer http www magentostore com index php customer account AM 9 57 13 AM Figure 216 Online Customers Page Zel Managing Orders and Customers Customer Reports A vari
103. Details Customer Experience Assigning Customer Groups Based on VAT ID Value during Registration If the VAT ID Validation feature is enabled after registration each customer is proposed to enter the VAT ID number However only those who are registered VAT customers are expected to fill this field After a customer specifies the VAT number and other address fields and chooses to save the system saves the address and sends the VAT ID validation request to the European Commission server According to the results of the validation one of the default groups is assigned to a customer This group can be changed if a customer or an administrator changes the VAT ID of the default address or changes the whole default address And the group can be temporarily changed group change will be emulated in some cases during one page checkout 280 Appendix VAT ID Validation Applying and Assigning Customer Groups During Checkout The system behavior concerned with the VAT ID validation and the customer group change during the checkout depends on how the Validate on Each Transaction and the Disable Automatic Group Change settings are configured This section describes the implementation of the VAT ID Validation functionality for the checkout on the frontend In case a customer uses Google Express Checkout PayPal Express Checkout or another external checkout method when the checkout is performed completely on the side of the external pay
104. Displays the contents category name and view options as well as the header footer search field and navigation bar Column on the left Adds the left column to the 1 column display which by default includes the currency selection and layered navigation Column on the right Adds the right column to the 1 column display which by default includes the shopping cart view wishlist compared products list polls and newsletter sign up 3 columns Displays both the left and the right columns 6 The Custom Layout Update is essentially a static block with a few differences Rather than HTML the structure must be in XML format The Update will appear at the bottom of the page below the products whereas a static block will appear above the products if the static block is set to display with products The custom layout update will appear on the page only during the dates specified in the Active From and Active To date range Click Save Category to save your changes Catalog Products Tab This tab enables you to specify the products that belong to this category Note You can also assign a product to a category when editing a product s record For more information see Managing Products page 95 OF Setting Up Your Catalog 84 Fage 1 of 1 pages View 20 perpage Total 6 records found Reset Filter Search Cl ip 4 Hame SKU Price Position an D YP a E m To To 6 Cat picture 1239549974 1 00 Fi 5 conf
105. LING BACK THE SYSTEM 247 LIMITING ACCESS TO THE BACKUP AND ROLLBACK FUNCTIONALITY 248 CREATING A BACKUP FROM THE MAGENTO CONNECT MANAGER 248 STAGING ENVIRONMENT 249 UPDATING MAGENTO CE 250 EXTENDING MAGENTO 252 CAPTCHA 254 CAPTCHA QUICK REFERENCE 254 ENABLING AND CONFIGURING CAPTCHA FOR THE BACKEND 255 ENABLING AND CONFIGURING CAPTCHA FOR THE FRONTEND 256 CAPTCHA USER EXPERIENCE 257 17 INDEXING 259 INDEX MANAGEMENT PAGE 259 UNDERSTANDING THE COLUMNS ON THE INDEX MANAGEMENT PAGE 260 HOW TO REINDEX MANUALLY 260 USING URL REWRITES 261 SAMPLE URL REWRITES 262 URL REWRITE OPTION SETTING CATEGORY AND PRODUCT URL SUFFIXES 262 GETTING STARTED WITH URL REWRITES 263 CREATING NEW URL REWRITES 264 VERIFYING URL REWRITES 265 EDITING OR DELETING URL REWRITES 267 USING FLAT CATALOG AND PRODUCT REINDEXING 267 FLAT CATALOG PREREQUISITE ENABLING FRONTEND OPTIONS 268 VERIFYING THE RESULTS OF THE FLAT CATALOG CONFIGURATION 269 18 GETTING HELP 273 KNOWLEDGE BASE 273 WEBINAR ARCHIVE 274 SCREEN CASTS 274 MAGENTO DESIGNER S GUIDE 274 MAGENTO BLOG 274 MAGENTO ON TWITTER 274 TECHNICAL DOCUMENTS AND MAGENTO CORE API 274 APPENDIX VAT ID VALIDATION 275 VAT ID VALIDATION QUICK REFERENCE 275 Table of Contents CONFIGURING VAT ID VALIDATION CREATING THE VAT RELATED CUSTOMER GROUPS CONFIGURING THE VAT RELATED TAX RULES ENABLING AND CONFIGURING THE VAT ID VALIDATION FUNCTIONALITY CONFIGURING ADDITIONAL SETTINGS FOR THE VAT ID VALIDATION FEATURE VAT ID VALID
106. LOBAL Figure 111 Custom Attribute Fill in the attributes that appear in this page according to the definitions that are specified in the attribute set Some of these attributes may be mandatory and each may be one of a variety of types according to the definitions of the attribute set Custom Options Tab This page enables you to easily create product variants or products that can accept n customer input such as custom imprints or gifts See Creating Variations of a Product page 121 for more information on this topic Setting Up Your Catalog Product Type Dependent Configuration Pages Depending upon the product type additional configuration tabs may be available The following provides a quick review of these types of pages Downloadable Products Downloadable Information Tab The Downloadable Information tab enables you to specify options for a downloadable product Samples O Title Samples STORE VIEVvY Title File Sort Order File O URL Add New Row Upload Files Links Title Links STORE VIEV Links can be purchased Yes vy GLOBAL separately Title Price Max Downloads Shareable Sample File Sort Order USD 0 Useconfigy O File bcaa File Laced K C Unlimited O URL O URL Figure 112 Downloadable Information Tab This page contains two sections The Samples section enables you to display a sample of the downloadable product on the product s information page For example this ca
107. Name LastName Credit Card Type Visa Credit Card Number 4111111111111111 Expiration Date 12 2010 Order was placed using USD Figure 163 Credit Card Information Frontend 169 Payment Tip You can use the following test credit card number to test the payment methods in your web store Visa 4111111111111111 MasterCard 5555555555554444 American Express 378282246310005 Use any expiration date in the future and for the CVV CVC verification code use 123 or 000 Checks and Money Orders This payment method enables you to accept paper checks and money orders as payment The order remains in Pending status until the payment is received or clears your bank if you prefer This payment method is enabled by default in the Sample Data Expand the Check Money Order section to define how checks and money orders are accepted in your web store as shown in Figure 164 Check Money Order Enabled Yes g WEBSITE Title Check Money onder STORE VIEW New Order Status Pending qe WEBSITE Payment from Applicable All Allowed Countries ae WEBSITE Payment from Specific Afghanistan VEBSTE Make Check Payable to STORE VEN q Send Check to STORE VIEW Minimum Order Total WEBSITE Maximum Order Total WEBSITE Sort Onder WEBSITE Figure 164 Check Money Order Configuration Options In the Make Check payable to field specify the name of the entity to which the checks must be made out 170 This option appears in the
108. OF PRODUCTS 39 POPULAR TAGS 41 SEARCHING 42 COMPARING PRODUCTS 42 SORTING PRODUCTS 44 GRID LIST VIEW 44 RECENTLY VIEWED 45 PROMOTIONAL INFORMATION 45 PRODUCT LIST BANNERS 46 PROMOTIONAL PAGES 46 UP SELL PRODUCTS 47 RELATED PRODUCTS 48 CROSS SELL PRODUCTS 48 PRODUCT PAGES 49 WEB STORE PAGE HEADER AND FOOTER 50 THE HEADER 51 THE FOOTER 51 PURCHASING FUNCTIONALITY 52 MANAGING CUSTOMER RELATIONS 56 CUSTOMER EMAILS 56 RATINGS AND REVIEWS 56 COMMUNITY POLLS 57 IV Table of Contents 5 INTRODUCING THE BACKEND 59 UNDERSTANDING SCOPE 59 MANAGING ADMINISTRATOR MESSAGES 60 SUPERVISING WEB STORE ACTIVITIES 61 CHART 61 LEFT INFORMATION PANEL 62 BOTTOM INFORMATION TABS 62 MANAGING ORDERS 62 VIEWING THE ORDERS IN YOUR WEB STORE 63 VIEWING AN ORDER S DETAILS 64 COMMENT HISTORY PAGE 66 TRANSACTIONS PAGE 66 CREATING NEW ORDERS 66 MANAGING RATINGS AND REVIEWS 67 GENERATING REPORTS 67 6 SETTING UP YOUR CATALOG 69 OVERVIEW 69 SETTING UP CATALOG DEFAULTS 70 FRONTEND 70 SITEMAP 72 PRODUCT REVIEWS 72 PRODUCT ALERTS 72 PRODUCT ALERTS RUN SETTINGS 73 PRODUCT IMAGE PLACEHOLDERS 73 RECENTLY VIEWED COMPARED PRODUCTS 73 PRICE 74 LAYERED NAVIGATION 74 CATEGORY TOP NAVIGATION 74 SEARCH ENGINE OPTIMIZATIONS 74 CATALOG SEARCH 75 DOWNLOADABLE PRODUCTS OPTIONS 76 DATE AND TIME CUSTOM OPTIONS 77 MANAGING CATEGORIES 77 DISPLAYING CATEGORIES 78 CREATING CATEGORIES 79 EDITING CATEGORIES 84 Table of Contents LAYERED NAVIGATION 8
109. Options Because attributes are stored in many tables and that includes copies of some of the same attributes SQL queries are long and complex The flat catalog feature creates new tables on the fly where each row contains all necessary data about a product or category To enable flat catalog and product indexing 268 Log in to the Admin Panel as an administrator Click System gt Configuration In the CATALOG group click Catalog In the right pane click Frontend From the Use Flat Catalog Category list click Yes From the Use Flat Catalog Product list click Yes The following figure shows an example Catalog Save Config Frontend A List Mode Products per Page on Grid Allowed Values Products per Page on Grid Default Value Products per Page on List Allowed Values Products per Page on List Default Value Allow All Products per Page Product Listing Sort by Use Flat Catalog Category Use Flat Catalog Product Allow Dynamic Media URLS in Products and Categories Grid default List 915 30 i Comma feparated E Must be in the allowed values list 5 10 15 20 25 Comma Separated 10 a Must be in the allowed values list No t Whether to show AIP option in the Show X Per Page dropdown Best Value Yes E g imedia ur pathto image jpo h iskin url path to picture gif
110. Prefix and Title Suffix fields specify a prefix and a suffix to be appended to the pages of your web store that have their own title such as a prefix of My Web Store In the Default Description and Default Keywords fields specify words that describe your web store to be used by search engines when page specific information is not provided Keywords must be separated by commas Optional Select Display Demo Store Notice to display a notice at the top of every page that indicates that this is a demo store and that no transactions will be processed This option is useful while you are setting up your store prior to opening for business Click the Save Config button on the top right of the page Header Field Set The options on the Header field set define the look of the top of each page in your store To define the header of each web store page 1 28 Click the Header tab to expand the section as shown in Figure 18 Logo Image Src images logo gif STORE VIEW Logo Image Alt Magento Commerce STORE VIEW Welcome Text Default welcome msg STORE VIEW Figure 18 Header Field Set In the Logo Image Src field specify the logo graphic file to appear on the top left of each page of your web store as shown in Figure 19 for the Magento Demo Store Make sure that you name your logo something other than logo gif so it does not get overwritten in future upgrades Logo Image Welcome Message Search entire store here Search Dem
111. Products The Get Up Kids Band Camp Pullover Hoodie went 2 30 00 Add to Cart Add to My Wishlist Model The Get Up Kids Band Camp Pullover Hoodie SKU 4fasd5f5 Short Description Printed on American Apparel Classic style 5495 California Fleece Pull Over Hoodies Description Printed on American Apparel Classic style 5495 California Fleece Pull Over Hoodies Sizing info is available here Color Green 30 00 Add to Cart Add to Wishlist gt Print This Page The Only Children Paisley T Shirt 100 00 As low as 70 00 Add to Cart Add to My Wishlist paisley oc Printed on American Apparel Classic style 5495 California cotton T shirt e 6 102 100 preshrunk heavyweight cotton e Double needle sleeves and bottom hem White 100 00 As low as 70 00 Add to Cart Add to Wishlist Close Window Figure 36 Compare Products Page Note A row also appears for each comparable attribute defined for these products such as Color See Managing Product Attributes page 88 for more information about defining attributes 43 Introducing the Frontend Sorting Products A customer can sort the products that are displayed by selecting the relevant option in the Sort by drop down list as shown in Figure 37 View as Grid List Sort by Anashria Womens ASICS Men s GEL CN Clogs Premier Leather Kayano XII Beach Garden Clog Sandal GPE 134 99 wee Ce ae 3
112. RCO CEC ED Confirmed email Confirmed Vincent Van Gogh pc ea cit ee ER a rer Account Createdon Jun 16 2011 11 37 41 PM 131 N Main St ne Recurring Profiles beta eo Cee hake Sherman Oaks California 91423 ae Soe ie ee etierarieny aoe gt i United States A een ee eee ee enera T 818 555 5555 Wishlist Newsletter DS A E AREA AE ITT T A AT TET Sales Statistics Product Reviews 7 ifeti Boe e E E S EA AA E AEEA Website Store Store View Lifetime Sales Average Sale _ ProductTags Main Website Main Website Store Default Store View 480 00 240 00 All Store Views 480 00 240 00 Recent Orders Shopping Cart 0 item s v Wishlist 0 item s O Figure 212 Customer Information Page The tabs in the left panel provide a variety of types of information about the customer and for handling the relationship with a customer such as when the customer last logged in and out addresses ordering statistics recent orders current shopping cart contents their last reviews the newsletter to which they subscribed and so on 217 Managing Orders and Customers Adding a Customer Customers typically register themselves in your web store using the My Account link in the header of each page In addition you can use the following procedure to add a customer using the backend To add a new customer 1 In the Admin Panel select Customers gt Manage Customers 2 Click the Add New Customer button to display the New Customer pag
113. Shopping Cart Price Rule page See Figure 197 above for illustration of the grid You can also create detailed report about coupon usage in orders To create a report about the usage of coupons generated for a specific shopping cart price rule 1 Navigate to Reports gt Sales gt Coupons The Coupons Usage Report page opens 2 Inthe Show Report For field select the scope configure report filters In the Shopping Cart Price Rule field select Specified and select the desired rule s 3 Click Show Report in the upper right corner of the page Special Prices Special prices enable you to define a discounted price for a product for a specified period of time 402 To define Special Price i 6 The special price is shown on the frontend as shown in Figure 199 Promotions In the Admin Panel select Catalog gt Manage Products to display the list of products Click the Edit link on the right side of the relevant product s row Click the Prices tab in the left navigation panel Prices Create New Attribute Price Group Price Tier Price Special Price Special Price From Date Special Price To Date Price View Is Product Available for Purchase with Google Checkout Apply MAP Display Actual Price Manufacturers Suggested Retail Price Dynamic ral Website Customer Group Percent Discount Action Add Group Price Website Customer Group Qty Percent Discount Action Add Tier
114. TING UP MAP ON THE GLOBAL LEVEL 210 SETTING UP MAP ON THE PRODUCT LEVEL 212 HOW MAP IS APPLIED FOR DIFFERENT PRODUCT TYPES 212 HOw MAP IS APPLIED FOR DIFFERENT PRICE SETTINGS 213 PRODUCT GROUP PRICE 213 TERMINOLOGY 213 SETTING A GROUP PRICE FOR A PRODUCT 214 GROUP PRICE IMPLEMENTATION DETAILS 214 NEWSLETTERS 215 NEWSLETTER TEMPLATES 216 NEWSLETTER QUEUES 218 NEWSLETTER REPORTS 218 VIII Table of Contents 13 MANAGING ORDERS AND CUSTOMERS 219 MANAGING CUSTOMERS 219 VIEWING AND EDITING CUSTOMERS 219 ADDING A CUSTOMER 220 MANAGING CUSTOMER GROUPS 220 CHECKING ONLINE CUSTOMERS 221 CUSTOMER REPORTS 222 IMPORTING AND EXPORTING CUSTOMER INFORMATION 222 MANAGING ORDERS 223 ORDERS TERMINOLOGY 224 CREATING NEW ORDERS 224 CLEARING THE SHOPPING CART 227 REFUNDING 228 14 MANAGING CUSTOMER GENERATED CONTENT 231 MANAGING RATINGS AND REVIEWS 231 ADDING A CUSTOM RATING 232 APPROVING REVIEWS FOR PUBLIC VIEWING 233 MANAGING TAGS 234 ADDING TAGS 235 APPROVING TAGS 235 MANAGING POLLS 236 EDITING A POLL 238 15 MONITORING AND IMPROVING THE WEB STORE 239 REPORTS 239 GENERATING REPORTS 239 REFRESHING SALES REPORT STATISTICS 240 AVAILABLE REPORTS 240 SEARCH SYNONYMS AND REDIRECTS 242 GOOGLE ANALYTICS 243 16 KEEPING YOUR STORE HEALTHY 245 LIMITING ADMINISTRATOR ACCESS TO THE ADMIN PANEL BACKEND 245 BACKUPS AND ROLLBACKS 246 BACKUP AND ROLLBACK QUICK REFERENCE 246 CREATING AND MANAGING BACKUPS 246 IX Table of Contents ROL
115. TYPE Next to each attribute is the number of products that have that attribute For example The Apparel category has three green products as shown in Figure 29 COLOR Black 1 Blue 1 Brown 2 Gray 2 Green 3 lt i Red 3 White 2 Figure 29 Category Product Counts After a customer clicks on the Green attribute all the green products are displayed in the web store for browsing and the SHOP BY area indicates that the products in this category have been filtered by the Color Green attribute as shown in Figure 30 SHOP BY Apparel 2 MY CART CURRENTLY SHO s T an a ats nee ee sete aan ip itt Ca en ED You have no items in your shopping cart COLOR Green Clear All tems COMPARE PRODUCTS SHOPPING OPTIONS You have no tems to compare CATEGORY Shirts 2 Hoodies 1 RECENTLY VIEWED A PRODUCTS PRICE Zolof The Rock And Roll Destrover LOL Cat T shirt 10 00 20 00 2 30 00 40 00 1 3 Item s Show 9 per page View as Grid List f T BACK TO SCHOOL Keep your eyes open Did you know Our customer service is available 24 7 555 555 0123 for our special Back to School items and save BIG Hold on help is on the way A amp COMMUNITY POLL What is your favorite Magento f The Get Up Kids Coalesce Zolof The Rock And eR Band Camp Pullover Functioning On Roll Destroyer LOL Layered Navigatio
116. VIEWS Double click on above image to view full picture E RECENTLY COMPARED PRODUCTS The Only Children Paisley T Shirt Product Description BACK TO SCHOOL Printed on American Apparel Classic style 5495 California Fleece Pull Over Hoodies Sizing info is available here zr Keep your eyes open for our special Back to School items Additional Information and save BIG Model The Get Up Kids Band Camp Pullover Hoodie amp amp COMMUNITY POLL You may also be interested in the following product s uier bi paler PR i v feature O Layered Navigation Price Rules Category Management Compare Products Apple MacBook Pro Akio Dresser MA464LL A 15 4 Notebook PC 399 99 2 299 99 Kee 3 Review s kkkt Add Your Review 3 Review s Add Your Review Product Tags Other people marked this product with these tags cool 1 nice 1 areen 1 sexy 1 warm 1 Add Your Tags Use spaces to separate tags Use single quotes for phrases Figure 45 Product Page Most of the features provided to present a product in your web store are self explanatory The following describes a few of these features Image The customer can use the slider to zoom in and out of the image click on it to enlarge it or pan it to see different parts of it 49 Introducing the Frontend Description The top of the page shows a short description in the Quick Overview area and farther d
117. View No Yes No No No active_to_date Active to Date No Store View No Yes No No No color Color No Global No No Yes Filterable with results Yes computer_manufacturers Brand Yes Global No No Yes Filterable no results Yes contrast_ratio Contrast Ratio Yes Store View No No No Filterable with results Yes cost Cost No Website No No No No No country_orgin Country of Origin Yes Global No No Yes No Yes cpu_speed CPU Speed No Store View No No No No No custom_design Custom Design No Store View No Yes No No No custom_design_from Active From No Store View No Yes No No No custom_design_to Active To No Store View No Yes No No No custom_layout_update Custom Layout Update No Global No Yes No No No description Description No Store View Yes Yes Yes No Yes dimension Dimensions Yes Global No No Yes No Yes disable_googlecheckout Not available for purchase with Google Checkout No Global No Yes No No No finish Finish Yes Global No No Yes No Yes gallery Image Gallery No Global No Yes No No No gender Gender No Global Yes No Yes No No gift_message_available Allow Gift Message No Global No Yes No No No Figure 84 Manage Attributes Page Click Add New Attribute to display the New Product Attribute page Figure 85 in which you can define a new attribute 89 Setting Up Your Catalog Attribute Properties Attribute Code For internal use Must be unique with no spaces Scope Store View Mi Declare attribute value saving scope Catalog Input Type for Sto
118. Virtual The actual price is not shown on the catalog and product pages it is displayed according to the Display Actual Price setting The custom 212 Promotions Product type MAP implementation options prices are displayed normally Grouped Prices of the associated simple products are not shown on the catalog and product pages they are displayed according to their Display Actual Price setting Configurable The actual price is not shown on the catalog and product pages it is displayed according to the Display Actual Price setting The prices of the options are displayed normally Bundle with fixed The actual price is not shown in the catalog it is displayed according price to the Display Actual Price setting The prices of the bundle items are displayed normally Downloadable The actual price is not shown on the catalog and product pages it is displayed according to the Display Actual Price setting The prices of the links are displayed normally How MAP Is Applied for Different Price Settings The following describes how MAP is applied for different price settings Price setting MAP implementation Tier Price If tier pricing is set the tier pricing message is not displayed in the catalog On the product page a notification is displayed that indicates that the price can be lower when ordering more than a certain quantity but the discount is displayed in percentages only For associated products of a grouped product the
119. Yes to specify that the URL links for products include the associated category and a separate link is generated for each associated category Select No to specify that the URL rewrites include only the product name and that there is only one link for each product regardless of how many categories the product is associated with Create Permanent Redirect for old URLs if URL key changed Selecting Yes automatically creates a redirect for the old URL that points to the new URL if a page is moved Doing so eliminates the 404 Not Found error message that customers see if a page they had bookmarked is moved Page Title Separator Specify a character to replace the space character with when the system uses the page title to construct the page s URL Typically you would use an underscore _ or hyphen Use Canonical Link Meta Tag For Categories and Use Canonical Link Meta Tag For Products Select whether to add a tag to each category or product page that points to a preferred URL for search engines to index when encountering pages that contain the same content but which may be sorted differently for Instance Catalog Search The options in this section define how the catalog search feature behaves Minimal Query Length Defines the minimum number of characters that the customer must specify in the Search field on the frontend Maximum Query Length Defines the maximum number of characters that the customer may spe
120. abled O WEBSITE Tax Class Taxable Goods o d STORE VIEW URL Key nokia 2610 phone GLOBAL 4 Greate Permanent Redirect for old URL Visibility Catalog Search STORE VIEW Set Product as New from Date po E GLOBAL Set Product as New to Date fo E GLOBAL Country of Manufacture es WEBSITE Figure 260 Changing an Attribute Value 8 Click Save 9 View your web store 209 Indexing 10 Search for the product you edited or browse to the category that contains it 11 If necessary refresh the page to see the result of the change you made The following figure shows an example Nokia 2610 Phone_DEMO Email to a Friend was 3 Review s Add Your Review Availability In stock 149 99 Qty 4 OR Add to Wishlist Add to Compare Quick Overview The words entry level no longer mean low end especially when it comes to the Nokia 2610 Offering advanced media and calling features without breaking the bank Double click on above image to view full picture YC G MORE VIEWS A 8 Figure 261 Product Page Showing Updated Attribute Verifying Flat Catalog Changes for Multiple Products To verify flat catalog changes for multiple products 1 Log in to the Admin Panel as an administrator In a different browser tab page or window open your web store s front page In the Admin Panel click Catalog gt Manage Categories oe From the Choose Store View list click the name of a store
121. above but it pre fills many of the fields with information from the selected configurable product as shown in Figure 123 Quick simple product creation Name leste Functioning On Impatience T Shirt STORE VIE iVi Autogenerate SKU coal 1 GLOBAL M Autogenerate Weight GLOBAL Status Please Select w WEBSITE Visibility Please Select vy STORE VIEVY Shirt Size v Qty 0 Stock Availability In Stock Figure 123 Quick Simple Product Creation This area enables you to quickly create simple products without filling in all the information Fill in the required fields and click the Quick Create button to create this product The Auto generate option enables Magento CE to select the Name and SKU based on the attributes Super Product Attributes Configuration This section enables you to specify the attribute name that appears in the store for selection and the price for each of the options Two price options are provided Fixed or Percentage 1719 Setting Up Your Catalog Super product attributes configuration Price values for options should be specified in system base currency Attrribute names can be specified per store t Shirt Size Attribute Name Size Option Small Price Fixed Option Medium Price Fixed Option Large Price Fixed The price for configurable products is a combination of the price from the Prices tab as described in Prices Tab page 99 and the values e
122. actual tax based upon your store s tax configuration To define tax zones and rates 1 Select Sales gt Tax gt Manage Tax Zones and Rates option to display a list of the previously defined tax zones and rates Manage Tax Rates Add New Tax Rate Page 4 of 1 pages View per page Total 2 records found E Exportto CSV v Tax Identifier US CA Rate 1 United States US NY Rate 1 United States Figure 139 Manage Tax Rates Page 2 Click Add New Tax Rate to display the Add New Tax Rate page as shown in Figure 140 136 Taxes amp Add New Tax Rate Tax Rate information Tar Identifier Lod Angeles Courty Country Linked States State Calfomia Zip Postis Range Yes Range Fram range fo Fate Percent English Franch Hole Leave empty to use tas identher Figure 140 Add New Tax Rate Page Tax Identifier This is the title of the newly created tax rate Do not use spaces This identifier is not visible to customers if the alternate Tax Titles section is used Select the country to which the specific tax applies Country is required Available for countries that have states You have the following options e To apply the tax rates to all states click asterisk a wildcard character that enables you to apply the same tax rate to all states in the selected country To select a state click the name of a state to which to apply a tax rate Zip Post is Range If you click No spe
123. age shown in Figure 183 190 Promotions General Information Fule Mame Summer Sale i Description Summer T shirt Sale 10 off Status Active Websites wain website Customer Groups NOT LOGGED IN General Wholesale Retailer From Date como H To Date 08 31 09 ed Priority a Figure 183 Adding a New Catalog Price Rule 2 Inthe Rule Name and the Description fields specify a unique name and a description for this Catalog Price Rule 3 In the Status field select Active In the Websites field select the website to which this rule applies 5 In the Customer Groups field select one or more customer groups to which this rule applies 6 In the From Date and To Date fields set a date range for the rule to take effect If you leave the date range empty then the rule is enabled as soon as it is created Advanced Tip You can use the Priority field 1 is the highest priority when there are multiple rules This determines which rule takes effect when more than one Catalog Price Rule applies 191 Promotions Defining the Catalog Price Rule Conditions After you have set up the general information for the price rule you must create the conditions that specify when the rule is triggered The following example shows how to discount every T shirt that is over 20 by 10 by defining a rule that has two conditions To define Catalog Price Rule Conditions 1 Selec
124. ail To display all the messages in your inbox Click the Go to messages inbox on the top right of the page The Messages Inbox page is displayed which provides standard message handling features see Figure 61 a Messages Inbox Page 4 ofipages View 20 perpage Total 18 records found SelectAll Unselect All Select Visible Unselect Visible 0 items selected Actions an Submit Severity Date Added 4 Message Actions oO Mar 3 2009 11 03 58 PM Magento version 1 2 1 2 now available Read Details Mark as Read Remove Magento version 1 2 1 2 is now available for download and upgrade This version includes some updates to improve admin security as described in the release notes page O I Feb 27 2009 1 39 24AM CSRF Attack Prevention Read Details Mark as Read Remove We have just posted a blog entry about a hypothetical CSRF attack on a Magento admin panel Please read the postto find out if your Magento installation is at risk at http wwww magentocommerce com blog comments csrt vulnerabilities in web application and how to avoid them in magento O E Feb 24 2009 12 45 47 AM Magento version 1 2 1 1 now available Read Details Mark as Read Remove Magento version 1 2 1 1 now available This version includes some issue resolutions for Magento 1 2 x that are listed in the release notes section O CI Feb 2 2009 9 57 00 PM Magento version 1 2 1 is now available for download and upgrade Read Details Mark as Read Rem
125. aintenance mode for the time of backup creation select the corresponding check box After the backup creation is completed the maintenance mode is turned off automatically If you are creating a system backup select the Include Media folder to System Backup check box if you want to include the media folder Confirm the backup creation Database backup files are compressed using the gz format For the system backups and database and media backups the tgz format is used Backup files are stored in the var backups directory in your Magento file system The files that are stored in the var cache var log var session and var report folders are excluded from the backup Records about all created backups are listed in a grid on the Backups page Deleting a record deletes the archive file as well Rolling Back the System To roll back the whole system or the database Ty ve In the Magento Admin Panel navigate to System gt Tools gt Backups The Backups page opens where all previously created backups are listed in a grid For the desired backup click the Rollback link in the Action column Note that all changes made since the backup creation will be lost after the rollback Confirm rolling back specify your Magento Admin Panel account password and choose whether you want to put your store into the maintenance mode for the time of rolling back When restoring file system or database and media files you can choose to use
126. alifornia 90123 v O Same As Billing Address td Billing Address No items 5 Select from existing customer addresses Test Customer Test Street 1 Test Street 2 Test City California 90123 v Prefix Prefix Last ordered items 0 2 First Name Test First Name Test No items Middle Middle Namerinitial Namelinitial Last Name Customer Last Name Customer Suffix Suffix Company Company Products in Compare List 0 2 z Soto Street Address Test Street 1 Street Address Test Street 1 TestStreet2 Test Street 2 City Test City City Test City Country United States vj Country United States v State Province California State Province iforni rea 2 j ate Province California v No items Zip Postal Code 90123 Zip Postal Code 90123 Telephone 123 123 1234 a Telephone 123 123 1234 Fax Fax C Save in address book CO Save in address book Recently Viewed Products 0 2 No items Shipping Method Get shipping methods and rat Payment Method Credit Card saved Check Money order No Payment Information Required Update Changes Order Totals Order History Order Comments Subtotal 0 00 Grand Total 0 00 Append Comments Email Order Confirmation Submit Order Figure 218 Create New Order for lt customer gt Page Vise Managing Orders and Customers 226 Note If
127. alog Mobile Customers Promotions Newsletter CMS Reports System Get help for this page Order View i5 Order 200000001 Jan 19 2011 1 38 26 PM Back Information Invoices Page 1 of 1 pages View 20 perpage Total 1 records found _ CreditMemos lt ID Order ID Transaction ID Parent Transaction ID Payment Method Name Transaction Type Is Closed Created At 4 T DEMS oe a x From Comments History To To E Transactions 1 200000001 0O 3A6137245J549934B PayPal Express Checkout Order No Jan 19 2011 1 39 29 PM Figure 159 Order transaction for PayPal Express Checkout The funds on the customer s account are put on hold and you can capture the payment only from the Magento Admin Panel To capture you need to create an online invoice Once you choose to create an online invoice Magento determines whether the number of days passed from the first authorization exceeds the Order Valid Period value If more days have passed you cannot create an online invoice for this order 166 Payment If the order is valid Magento determines whether the first authorization is valid comparing the number of days passed with the Authorization Honor Period value If the authorization is valid the necessary sum is captured the rest is left on hold and the number of captures is not limited If the authorization is not valid anymore it is voided A new authorization and capture are created but for the invoice total not the order total
128. and change your settings In this error message the source link points to a Magento Knowledgebase article The Tax configuration link takes you to System gt Configuration gt Sales gt Tax in the Admin panel There you can change your tax settings to avoid the problematic configurations detailed above Catalog Prices Including Tax These settings are available in the Admin panel at System gt Configuration gt Sales gt Tax gt Calculation Settings options Catalog Prices and Tax Calculation Method Based On Excluding tax Including tax Including amp Excluding tax 130 Taxes If you set up your tax calculation settings in ways that trigger any of the problematic configurations discussed in this section the system displays the following notification Q Warning tax discount configuration might result in different discounts than a customer might expect Please see source for more details Click here to go to Tax configuration and change your settings In this error message the source link points to a Magento Knowledgebase article The Tax configuration link takes you to System gt Configuration gt Sales gt Tax in the Admin panel There you can change your tax settings to avoid the problematic configurations detailed above To configure general taxation settings 1 From the System menu select the Configuration option 2 From the SALES section in the panel on the left select Tax 3 Expand the Tax Classes
129. and user password for the database server in the Database Connection box To check the authorization data for connecting to the database server and to the data storage click the Check InnoDB support button The installation will not proceed if the information entered in any of these fields is invalid 4 Click Continue to proceed to the Magento Connect Manager Deployment page M Magento Community Installation Magento Connect Manager Deployment Welcome Loader Protocol Validation Magento Connect Manager Magento Connect Channel Protocol Deployment HTTP Download License Agreement Localization Configuration Stability Create Admin Account Magento Connect Manager Version Stability You re All Set stable Having trouble installing Magento Check out our Installation Guide Se can a Deployment Type Local Filesystem 5 FTP Connection Figure 7 Magento Downloader Connect Manager Deployment Page 5 Choose whether Magento Connect Manager will be downloaded via the HTTP or the FTP protocol We recommend that you choose HTTP because it takes less time than using the FTP protocol If outgoing HTTP connections are not allowed in your hosting environment then choose FTP 6 In the Magento Connect Manager Version Stability drop down list select the Stable option The available options are stable beta or alpha For Deployment Type select either Local Filesystem or FTP Connection to indicate whether Magento Connect Manage
130. andling Information Check Money order Flat Rate Fixed 5 00 Order was placed using USD Items Ordered Product Item Status Original Price Price Qty Subtotal Tax Amount Tax Percent Discount Amount Row Total Product 3 Ordered 150 00 150 00 Ordered 1 150 00 0 00 0 0 00 150 00 SKU 333 Comments History Order Totals Add Order Comments Subtotal 150 00 Shipping amp Handli 5 00 Pending i ipping amp Handling Grand Total 155 00 Comment Total Paid 0 00 Total Refunded 0 00 Total Due 155 00 C Notify Customer by Email Submit Comment C Visible on Frontend A Jun 18 2011 4 49 54 PM Pending Customer Not Notified Figure 68 Order Information Page Note The SKU Stock Keeping Unit specifies the product code that is used to keep track of the actual inventory SKUs are defined during product creation For details about managing your product catalog see Setting Up Your Catalog page 09 The Comments History area of this page provides information about the lifecycle of the order Every time that an invoice shipment or credit memo document is created a record with each document s identification is added on this tab Also here you can find out whether the customer was notified about the creation of each order document For each partial refund the system provides the order amount to be returned to the customer You can change order status in the Status drop down list To add a comment to the order t
131. anent Redirect for Yes STORE VIEW old URLs if Url key changed Page Title Separator STORE VIEW Use Canonical Link Meta Tag For No STORE VIEW Categories Use Canonical Link Meta Tag For No lt STORE VIEW Products Figure 72 Search Engine Optimization Settings Auto generated Site Map Enable this feature to display a Site Map link in the footer of the frontend pages This enables a customer to view an automatically generated site map including a list of all of your existing categories In addition to the auto generated site map Magento CE enables integration with Google Sitemap More information is provided on the following pages Setting Up Your Catalog Popular Search Terms Enable this feature to display a Search Terms link in the footer of the frontend pages This enables customers to link to a list of all search terms This is an SEO feature because each of these search terms counts as a link to your site and is explored by search engines to discover content on your site Product URL Suffix and Category URL Suffix These options determine which suffix is displayed on each product and category page Typically this value will be html or htm When you change this value and click Save Config you must perform a cache refresh by selecting System gt Cache Management and clicking Flush Magento Cache Use Categories Path for Product URLs This option determines how the URL is composed Select
132. ange drop down list at the top of the chart Underneath you can see the revenue tax and shipping amounts of your orders and the total quantity of the orders Only orders for which at least one invoice shipment or credit memo has been created or which have been created from external gateways for example PayPal Express are included in the reports Amounts tab The Amounts tab in the center of the page shows a graph indicating the revenue for each point on the time scale within the specified range The range is selected in the Select Range drop down list at the top of the chart Revenue Tax Shipping and Quantity These statistics are calculated as follows Revenue Total Invoiced Amount Tax Invoiced Amount Shipping Invoiced Amount Total Refunded Amount Tax Refunded Amount Shipping Refunded Amount e Tax Tax Invoiced Amount Tax Refunded Amount Shipping Shipping Invoiced Amount Shipping Refunded Amount 61 Introducing the Backend Note Charts can be enabled or disabled under System gt Configuration gt ADVANCED gt Admin gt Dashboard Left Information Panel The panel on the left shows you the total amount of orders handled in your Magento CE web store the average amount of each order information about your last five orders and the last five and top five search terms Bottom Information Tabs The bottom of the Dashboard Figure 63 provides additional information about your web store as
133. ariations of a product i From the Catalog menu select the Manage Products option to display a list of products Click the Add Product button to create a new product or click the Edit link to the right of the relevant product to open the edit page Select the Custom Options tab Click the Add New Options button on the top right of this page to display the controls shown in Figure 126 Custom Options Add New Option Title Input Type Is Required Sort Order Delete Option Pleaseselect B Yes Text Field Area Select Drop down Radio Buttons Checkbox Multiple Select Figure 126 Creating Custom Options In the Title field specify a name for this new property such as the name Size In the Input Type field select the type of input that can be given in this field such as text or dropdown menu as shown above In the Is Required field select Yes to indicate that this is a mandatory field meaning that a customer must select an option in this field in order to purchase this specific product If there is more than one option then specify the order in which this option appears in the Sort Order field A value of 1 indicates that it appears first Click the Add New Row button to display the row shown in Figure 127 in which you can define the new variation of this product For example the product in a certain size and its corresponding price Custom Options Add New Option Title Input Type Is Requ
134. ase URL then use http www mywebstore com admin to access your backend Note The Magento CE Demo Store backend can be accessed at http demo admin magentocommerce com admin The Log in to Admin Panel page is displayed as shown in Figure 12 Log in to Admin Panel _ User Name Password jj Magento Magento is a trademark of Magento Inc Copyright amp 2011 Magento Inc Figure 12 Backend Login Page Log in using the user name and password that you created during the installation process Note The backend of the Magento Demo Store can be accessed using the User Name admin and Password 123123 Click the Login button to display the administration panel as shown in Figure 13 23 Basic Contiguration Logged in as adm Sunday June 12 2011 Magento Admin Panel Global Record Search ogged in as admin unday Jun Dashboard Sales Catalog Mobile Customers Promotions Newsletter CMS Blog Dealer Inquiries Customerreview Reports System Get help for this page Latest Message Knowledge Base v 1 1 by aheadWorks has been released Read details You have 22 minor and 2 notice unread message s Go to messages inbox Dashboard Choose Store View All Store Views b Lifetime Sales Orders Amounts 0 00 Average Orders 0 00 Last 5 Orders Customer Items Grand Total Select Range Last 24 Hours No Data Found No records found Last 5 Search Terms SearchTerm Results Number of Uses No record
135. at enable you to apply your own customized look and feel to your Magento web store with basic HTML knowledge Tip See http www magentocommerce com design_ guide for a description of how interfaces themes skins layouts and blocks are used and to gain access to resources that will assist in their implementation Terminology Following are some of the terms you should be familiar with when customizing the design of your store Block A Magento CE feature that modularizes page elements for easier management Content block Block that produces content such as the content of a category list mini cart or product list See also Structural block Content Management System CMS A Magento CE feature that stores pages or parts of pages that you can use in your store Layout File that maps content blocks to structural blocks More than one content block can be mapped to a single structural block Skin file File that define the visual functional specifications of page elements such as text graphics and the logic behind buttons and other controls Structural block Block created for the sole purpose of assigning visual structure to a store page for example header footer left column main column Template A collection of XML and other files that define the block structure and logic for visual presentation Theme a collection of templates and skin files that control the visual elements of your store These visual el
136. at s The text field for editing the text of the What s this This Text Message information tip i 5 To save the configuration click the Save Config button in the upper right corner of the page Setting Up MAP on the Product Level MAP settings on the product level become available once the MAP functionality is enabled For gift cards and bundle products with dynamic pricing the MAP settings are not available To configure MAP settings on a product level 1 Select Catalog and click Manage Products 2 Open the product for editing 3 On the Prices tab the following MAP settings are available Option Description o Apply MAP Defines whether MAP is applied to the product Display Actual Defines how the actual price of the product is displayed on the frontend Price The value here overrides the corresponding global setting Manufacturer s The price at which a manufacturer suggests to sell the product If Suggested specified it appears crossed out on the catalog and product pages on the Retail Price frontend 4 To save the settings click Save or Save and Continue Note If a product added to the shopping cart has MSRP specified it will not be displayed crossed out in the mini shopping cart or in the shopping cart side block How MAP Is Applied for Different Product Types The following describes how MAP is a for different product types Product type MAP MAP implementation sssss s sSS Simple
137. ately 8 In the Payment Applicable From field leave the All allowed countries selection or select Selected Countries to select from a list of countries 9 In the Sandbox Mode drop down list select whether this payment method is in sandbox mode Sandbox mode is used when you are setting up and testing the payment method no actual payments are processed 10 In the Transfer Cart Line Items drop down list select whether information about each individual line item in the order is sent to the payment processor Yes or only the order total No 11 In the Debug Mode drop down list select whether this payment method is in debug mode Debug mode is used when there is a problem processing a payment and you want to know what data is being exchanged with PayPal and where the error is occurring Data except for credit card numbers is stored in the system log file 12 Click Save Config Note This procedure includes only the basic setup items for this particular PayPal payment method For information about other PayPal payment methods and configuration options see http Awww magentocommerce com knowledge base entry setting up paypal for your magento store PayPal Advanced The PayPal Advanced payment method is available for merchants in the United States only General Concept The PayPal Payments Advanced payment method passes the information about the card entered by a customer directly to PayPal it is never stored in your Mag
138. ation is configured in the Magento Admin Panel under System gt CATALOG gt Catalog gt Layered Navigation To set and configure the new price layered navigation algorithm 1 Log in to the Magento Admin Panel 2 Navigate to System gt Configuration gt CATALOG gt Catalog 3 In the Current Configuration Scope in the upper left corner of the page select the desired store view 4 Expand the Layered Navigation field set In the Display Product Count field decide whether the number of products which fall into a price range will be displayed 5 In the Price Navigation Step Calculation field select Automatic equalize product counts Additional options appear Note The Automatic equalize price ranges option of the Price Navigation Step Calculation field is similar to the Automatic option which was available in the previous versions of Magento If you select the Automatic equalize price ranges option the previously existing price layered navigation algorithm will be used 6 In the Display Price Interval as One Price field decide what will be the system behavior if all products which fall into a certain price range have the same price Select Yes if you want to display a single price not the range finite values 7 In the Interval Division Limit field specify the threshold for a number of products within a price range after which the range cannot be further split The default value is 9 8 To save the changes click Save
139. attributes as desired In the Magento CE backend you can define attributes in sets Attribute sets ease the definition process so that similar products can be created with the same attributes Attribute sets enable you to assign multiple attributes to a product at one time by assigning an entire attribute set to a product If a store sells televisions shoes books and power tools then four attribute sets could be defined one specific to televisions one for shoes and so on When a new power tool product is added to your catalog you can simply select the Power Tool attribute set to add the relevant attributes to this product You should first define attributes then define attribute sets and assign the relevant attributes to the attribute sets as described in this section Creating Attributes Attributes must be defined before defining attribute sets and products Note Only attribute sets can be assigned to a product not individual attributes To define attributes 1 Select Catalog gt Attributes gt Manage Attributes A list of existing attributes is displayed as shown in Figure 84 Manage Attributes Page 1 gt of 4 pages View 20 perpage Total 61 records found Attribute il COOU Attribute Label Visible Scope Required System Searchable Use In Layered Navigation Comparable mE ae al T aL a E activation_information Activation Information Yes Global No No No No No active_from_date Active from Date No Store
140. ault Value field enter a name for this rating 4 Click the Save Rating button Approving Reviews for Public Viewing New reviews that are submitted by customers must be approved by the web store administrator in the backend before they appear on the frontend To view and approve new reviews 1 In the Admin Panel select Catalog gt Reviews amp Ratings gt Customer Reviews gt Pending Reviews to display the Pending Reviews page as shown in Figure 230 Pending reviews Page 1 Select All Unselect All Select Visible Unselect Visible 0 items selected of1pages View 20 perpage Total1recordsfound Pending Reviews RSS Reset Filter Actons JESA Review Visible In Type Product Name Product SKU Action ID CreatedOn Title Nickname Any Mil From l i i To O 114 Mar 24 2009 Great Product test 11 58 12 PM a_i Good quality Main Guest Coalesce coal_1 Edit and Website Functioning On interesting Main Store Impatience T Shirt print English Figure 230 Pending Reviews Page 2 Click the Edit link on the right side of the relevant review s row to display the Review Details page as shown in Figure 231 233 Managing Customer Generated Content Review Details Product Coalesce Functioning On Impatience T Shirt Posted By Guest Summary Rating ktkt Detailed Rating 1 star 2 stars 3 stars 4 stars 5 stars Quality O O O O Price O O Val
141. ault the list shows only products already selected as cross sells If there are none or you want to add other products click the Reset Filter button to display a list of all the products Use the check box in each row of the products that you want to appear as Cross sells for this product Click the Save button 189 Promotions Catalog and Shopping Cart Price Rules There are two types of price rules in Magento CE Catalog Price Rules and Shopping Cart Price Rules Catalog Price Rules are applied to products before they are added to the shopping cart Shopping Cart Price Rules are applied to products in the shopping cart Catalog Price Rules Catalog Price Rules are applied to products before they are added to a shopping cart They can be used to create sales and discounts that do not require that a discount code be supplied by the customer The process of defining a Catalog Price Rule consists of three stages e Defining the Catalog Price Rule Information page 190 defines general information about the rule e Defining the Catalog Price Rule Conditions page 192 defines the conditions that trigger the rule e Defining the Catalog Price Rule Actions page 194 defines the actions that are executed when the conditions of this rule are met Defining the Catalog Price Rule Information To create a Catalog Price Rule 1 From the Admin Panel select Promotions gt Catalog Price Rules gt Add New Rule button to display the p
142. automatically assigned to customers coming from your country and whose VAT ID is valid See Configuring Additional Settings for the VAT ID Validation Feature page279 for details about setting your location country Group for Valid VAT ID Intra Union Choose a customer group which is automatically assigned to customers coming from EU countries other than yours and whose VAT IDs are valid See Configuring Additional Settings for the VAT ID Validation Feature page 279 for details about where your location country IS set Group for Invalid VAT ID Choose a customer group which is automatically assigned to customers whose VAD ID is invalid Appendix VAT ID Validation Validation Error Group Choose a customer group which is automatically assigned to customers for whom the VAT ID validation failed Validate on Each Transaction Choose whether VAT ID validation will be performed each time during order creation even if a previously saved customer address with validated VAT ID is used The option applies to one page checkout in the frontend only If a new customer address is used including guest checkout or if a customer has no address assigned to their account then the validation is performed irrespective of this setting During order creation in the Admin Panel no automatic validations are performed Default Value for Disable Automatic Group Changes Based on VAT ID available only if Default Config is selected in Cu
143. ax class corresponding to the downloadable and virtual product types The following table contains the minimal list of tax rules which must be created to use the VAT ID Validation functionality A class for domestic A class for products of all VAT rate of the customers types except bundle and merchant s country l virtual A class for customers with invalid VAT ID A class for customers for whom VAT ID validation failed A class for intra union A class for products of all VAT rates for all EU customers types except countries except downloadable and merchant s country virtual Currently this rate is 0 3 required only A class for domestic A class for downloadable VAT rate of the if you sell customers and virtual product types merchant s country products of bundle or virtual type A class for customers with invalid VAT ID A class for customers for whom VAT ID validation failed 4 required only A class for intra union A class for downloadable VAT rates for all EU if you sell customers and virtual product types countries except products of merchant s country bundle or virtual Currently this rate is 0 type 277 Appendix VAT ID Validation 278 Note It is recommended that you apply the merchant s VAT rate for customers with invalid VAT IDs and those for which validation fails You can create other tax rules and apply other tax rates according to your business logic In the Magento Admin Pane
144. bel Options g yeu do not specify an option value for a store then the default value will be used Admin Engish French German Collar Type Manage Options values of your attribute Admin Engitsh French German Position ts Defaut O Add Option Figure 88 Attribute Value Specifications 23 Click Save Attribute Creating Attribute Sets An attribute set is a collection of attributes customized to fit certain types of products All attribute sets must contain all of Magento s system attributes but you can customize them to include different combinations of simple attributes Only attribute sets not individual attributes can be assigned to a product If you want to add a small number of attributes you can add them to the Default set but if you want to add attributes that will be applied only to a subset of products it is advisable to create an attribute set for each set of attributes that you want to assign to products An attribute set can inherit attributes from another attribute set This feature saves you from redefining sets of attributes that apply to many different products Pe Setting Up Your Catalog To create a new attribute set i In the Admin Panel select Catalog gt Attributes gt Manage Attribute Sets A list of existing attribute sets is displayed as shown in Figure 89 I Manage Attribute Sets Add New Set Page 1 of 1 pages View 20 w perpage Total 14 records found Reset Filter Set Name
145. bility to products that have great prices to retailers so that they are not sold to wholesale customers 6 In the Qty Uses Decimals field select Yes to specify that customers can enter decimal quantities for this product as opposed to integers This is suitable for a product sold by the weight volume or length For example 2 35 pounds of concrete or 3 75 feet of carpeting Setting Up Your Catalog The Backorders field enables your customers to place an order for a product that has an in stock quantity of less than 0 This option also enables you to notify your customers that even though there are no items of a product currently available they can still place an order You can do this by selecting the Allow Qty Below 0 option and the Notify Customer option You can also enable this option without notifying customers by only selecting the Allow Qty below 0 option The Enable Qty Increments field enables you to choose whether this product is sold in quantities other than 1 for example wine that is sold in multiples of 6 bottles If you select Yes for this option the Qty Increments field becomes visible enabling you to specify the quantity increment for this product In the Stock Availability field select the In Stock option if this product is in stock or select Out of Stock otherwise Websites Tab The Websites tab enables you to choose which websites stores and store views this product is available on Use the check boxes to mak
146. by itself or not This feature enables for example the tracks of a music CD product to be purchased separately If you set this option to Yes then you must input the price for each of the downloadable items o Each of the items also has two options controlling its behavior The Max Downloads option controls how many times after purchase a product can be downloaded by the customer The Shareable option controls whether after each purchase of the product the downloadable item is available for download without logging in or if it requires logging in If the Shareable option is set to Yes then customers can click links in the Order Confirmation email that they receive in order to get the product However this setting also enables anyone who gets this link to download the product Setting this option to Yes is the only way to enable Guests to check out or to enable a comparable quick checkout method such as PayPal Express or Google Checkout to download the product There are configuration settings that must be selected to match your store The uploading process is similar to the uploading of the samples as described above with the exception of providing an option to tie in sample files for each downloadable product This feature can be used to provide customers with a short sample of each track of a music CD for example Setting Up Your Catalog Figure 114shows a product in a store with three links and samples for each of them for whic
147. can be created Multiple online refunds are not available for the PayPal Payments Advanced payment method When PayPal Advanced is used an order is created in the Admin Panel once a customer clicks PLACE ORDER on the Order Review step of the one page checkout The order status upon creation depends on the response the system receives from PayPal and can be one of the following Processing The transaction was successful Pending Payment The system did not receive any response from PayPal Canceled The transaction was not successful for some reason Suspected Fraud The transaction did not pass some of the PayPal fraud filters The system receives the response from PayPal that the transaction is under review by Fraud Service PayPal Express Checkout Configuring the PayPal Express Checkout payment method is similar to setting up the other PayPal payment methods For this reason the details of the basic PayPal Express Checkout setup are not described here However there are two aspects of PayPal Express Checkout that you should be aware of when setting it up Saving the customer s billing address and Order transactions Saving the Customer s Billing Address 162 Prior to version 1 11 of Magento Enterprise Edition and version 1 7 of Magento Community Edition the PayPal Express Checkout payment method did not allow saving the complete billing address for the order in Magento Starting with those versions this restriction
148. can see whether it has been used and how many times To delete the coupon codes select the check boxes in the first column select Delete from the Actions drop down menu and click Submit 8 To export the codes filter the list of codes so that only the desired codes are displayed choose the file extension in the Export to field click Export and save the file Dashboard Sales Catalog Mobile Customers Promotions Newsletter CMS Repons System Get help tor this page Shopping Cart Price Rule Edit Rule Sashuk sack Reset 0 Delete Rue O Save Rule Rute information Conditions oupons Information Actions Coupon Oly Labels L ah 12 Manage Coupons Codes ding p 4 Related Banners Code Format Alphanumenc l de Prefix de Suffix D Every X Charact 0 f empty no separa Page 1 of 1 pages View 20 per page Total 4 records found La Expor to CSV JE Search Select Al Unselect Al Select Visible Unselect Visbie O tema selected Actions Coupon Code Created On Used Times Used Any From From To To MYSHOP 40988467 Dec 30 20116 0434PM Yes MYSHOP38395650 Dec 30 20116 0434PM No 0 MYSHOP68219842 Dec 30 2011 6 04 34 PM Yes MYSHOP6 1235997 Dec 30 2011 6 04 34 PM No 0 Figure 197 The Shopping Cart Price Rule page Generating and managing coupon codes Tracking the Usage of Coupon Codes Information about how often each coupon was used is displayed in the grid on the Manage Coupon Codes tab of the
149. ce for Magento Extensions deaan E Sion up for our newsletter Core Extensions Search for Extensions Featured Core Extension Enter keyword Q EXPLORE MAGENTO CONNECT y Magento Core MANAGER 56 reviews By Version MagentoConnect Manager Learn More 970407 A Community Open Source MagentoConnect Manager Magento Enterprise GET DETAILS By Category Administration 480 Sort By Recently Added Name Most Reviewed Most Downloaded Price Advertising amp Marketing 218 Analytics 47 All Paid Free Community Ed Enterprise Ed Automation 86 Order by Ascending Descending Filter by Version v Billing amp Invoicing 70 FREE Catalog 729 MagentoConnect Manager MagentoConnect Manager 56 Reviews Checkout 154 Magento ntent Man ment 11 ice More info 378 187 Downloads reel meike e EE Version 1 4 0 0 last uploaded Sat February 13 2010 Core 25 By Magento Core Customer Service 138 Data 75 Design amp Themes 1690 Modern Theme FREE Gifting 32 Dp Magento mons A ulin Modern theme for Magento frontend interface 130 Reviews integration 150 ees 26 598 Downloads Internationalization amp Version 1 4 0 0 last uploaded Sat February 13 2010 By Magento Core Localization 133 Q Merchandizing 67 Migration tools 112 Mobile 27 Blank Theme FREE sa A eanna Optimization 86 U Magento This is a sample skeleton theme for Magento designers Q 54
150. ch will be compounded on top of this first tax rule Lower numbers are used for higher priority Use O for the highest priority See Tax Management Rules page 138 3 Set up the second tax rule for compounding For the second rule be sure that you set a lower priority use a higher number than you set for the first tax rule 149 9 Shipping A variety of shipping rates are available for selection in Magento CE This section describes a few of these shipping rate options for your web store General Shipping Settings To configure general shipping settings iF ya Select System gt Configuration gt Shipping Settings Expand the Origin section and specify the address used for shipping calculations Typically this is the warehouse address from which products are shipped as shown In Figure 149 Country United States WEBSITE Region State California WEBSITE ZIP Postal Code 90034 WEBSITE City WEBSITE Figure 149 Shipping Origin Settings Expand the Options section as shown in Figure 150 Origin O Allow Shipping to multiple Yes v addresses Maximum qty allowed for 400 Shipping to multiple addresses Figure 150 Shipping Options Settings In this section enable or disable shipping to multiple addresses Shipping to multiple addresses is very useful for stores that sell gifts It enables customers to send various parts of an order to different destinations Click Save Con
151. cify in the Search field Maximum Query Words Count Define the maximum number of terms that can be specified in the Search field This limit applies to the Like search type only Search Type Define the type of search that is performed o Like Includes only results that are close in spelling to the specified search terms o Fulltext Includes only results that exactly match the specified search terms fe Setting Up Your Catalog 76 9 o Combine Like and Fulltext Includes both exact matches and close matches Apply Layered Navigation if Search Results are Less Than Defines the maximum number of results for which layered navigation can be applied If the number of results is more than this number then the results are presented as a simple list If you specify 0 then layered navigation is always applied Limiting the number of results can increase performance Downloadable Products Options This section controls the settings for products of Downloadable type The most important settings are Downloadable Product Options O Order Item Status to Enable Invoiced WEBSITE Downloads Default Maximum Number of 0 WEBSITE Downloads Shareable No WEBSITE Default Sample Title Samples STORE VIEW Default Link Title Links STORE VIEW Open Links in New Window Yes A WEBSITE Use Content Disposition inline STORE VIEW Disable Guest Checkout if Cart Yes v WEBSITE Contains Downloadable Items Gu
152. cify ine apor postal code i A Code field You can use the asterisk wildcard character in this field for example 90 means all zip codes from 90000 through 90999 Click Yes if you want this tax applied to a specific range of Zip codes Range From Range To Specify the starting and ending Zip or postal code ranges Rate Percent Specify the tax rate percent as a value of O zero or greater For example enter 9 75 for a tax rate of 9 75 Tax Titles This option applies only if you have a store in different languages and you want to have the languages displayed differently Tax Titles let you name your tax rate if you have a store that is translated into different languages and you use the same tax rates for all languages 4 Click the Save Rate button 5 The Manage Tax Rates page is displayed where you can arrange your tax rates by using the sort filters at the top of the grid and by clicking the column headings to sort the tax rates 137 axes Tip You can export your tax rates to either CSV comma separated value format or Excel XML format using the Export button at the top of the grid It can be easier to manage your tax rates in a spreadsheet format if you are familiar with the requirements for importing and exporting in CSV or XML formats Tax Management Rules Tax rules are defined as a combination of a customer tax class and a product tax class with a tax rate In other words based on the class of the customer
153. ck And Roll Destroyer LOL Cat T shirt IV 130 zol_r_Irg Zolof The Rock And Roll Destroyer LOL Cat T shirt IV 131 zol_g_lIrg Zolof The Rock And Roll Destroyer LOL Cat T shirt Iv 137 zol_b_med Zolof The Rock And Roll Destroyer LOL Cat T shirt Figure 188 Item Selection The page above shows the list of products filtered to show only those that have the word Shirt in their name 8 Select the check boxes of the products T shirts in this example to which this rule is to apply 9 Save this selection of products by clicking the Apply icon 10 Now this rule specifies that it applies to T shirts You must now add the Condition that the product must cost over 20 in order for the rule to apply To do so click on the icon to display a selection field and select the Price option under Product Attributes from the drop down list 11 Click on the is link and select equals or greater than from the comparison operator drop down list 12 Enter the value 20 00 in the value field on the right to create the second Condition as shown in Figure 189 193 Promotions Conditions leave blank for all products FALL ofthese conditions are TRUE SKJ is one of coal sm oc sm zol r sm cC amp Price equals or greater than 20 6 amp Figure 189 Two Conditions Specified Defining the Catalog Price Rule Actions Now that the conditions have been defined that trigger this rule we must define the actions to be taken when t
154. click the Add Selected Product s to Order button Tip If you selected one of the existing customers then the left column shows a list of the products that this customer has in his her cart wish list recently ordered viewed or compared To add one those products to the order select the required product and click Update Changes button 6 Complete the other mandatory fields of the order Mandatory fields are marked by an asterisk 7 You can define many options for the order such as choosing custom prices for products and applying discount codes 8 After you have completed all the required order information click the Submit Order button to display the order information page 9 To confirm payment click the Invoice button to generate an invoice for your review 10 Review the invoice and if all is well click the Submit Invoice button at the bottom of the page 1 1 When you are ready to ship the products click the Ship button to generate a Shipment document Managing Orders and Customers 12 1f applicable you can add a tracking number received from the shipping service by clicking the Add Tracking Number button Adding a tracking number enables customers to view the status of their shipment using the shipping carrier s website 13 Review the shipment You can modify the quantity to be shipped if only part of the order is ready The order status changes to Completed after all its products have been shipped 14 Cl
155. cnecesse ech ene tne nee Default Category GLOBAL Description Design Status Enabled W WEBSITE es eee ee Tax Class Taxable Goods ia STORE vew Invento inL seassabisdrtedesverseredecttacecrsraiversstsarsiecl URL key shirt 1 GLOBAL Websites He shea estat Sh lacie one RoE ee Ee ate Visibility Catalog Search i STORE vew Related Products Allow Gift Message Use config GLOBAL Witenes ee eS Manufacturer GLOBAL Cross sells icra ee OL Color GLOBAL Product Reviews E E E T aoe eer ene eee tp New fr GLOBAL ere Set Product as New from Eal J O A A T O TAON TAT Date Figure 179 Edit Product Page 3 Select the Up sells tab in the panel on the left 187 Promotions 188 Choose Store View Default Values Product Information General Categories Related Products Up sells Z Cross sells Western Digital 500GB HD 7200RPM Hard Drive lt Back Reset BES Duplicate Save And Continue Edit Page 1 of7 pages View 20 perpage Total 122 records found Reset Filter C 1 Name Type Attrib SetName Status Visibility SKU Price v v v v From To 169 shit 2 Simple Default Disabled Catalog 10 00 Product Search 168 shirt 2 Simple Default Enabled Catalog 1234shin2 10 00 Product Search O 167 shirt 1 Simple Default Enabled Catalog 1234shirt 10 00 Product Search oO 166 HTC Touch Simple Cell Phones Enabled Catalog HTC Touch 750 00 D
156. configurable product where customers can choose the size and color and then add it to their cart Credit memo A credit memo is a statement of credits for example a credit for returned merchandise generates a credit memo According to your store policy you can apply the credit to future orders or refund the customer s payment method Cross sell Cross sell products appear next to the shopping cart When a customer navigates to the shopping cart page these products are displayed as cross sells to the items already in the shopping cart They are similar to impulse buys like magazines and candy at the cash registers in grocery stores Downloadable product A product such as a media file that the customer downloads from the store after purchase These downloadable files can reside on your server or be provided as URLs to any other server Grouped product This option enables you to display several similar products on a single page For example if you are selling chefs knives and you have the same knife in four sizes you can make a grouped product to display all four of these sizes Customers can select the size s that they want and add them to the cart from this page Invoice An invoice in Magento CE represents a confirmation of payment More than one invoice can be associated with a single order If the products in an order are shipped in multiple shipments then an invoice is generated for each shipment for the products in that ship
157. cribed to either of these alerts Product Alerts Run Settings These settings enable you to select how often Magento CE checks for changes that require alerts to be sent Additionally you can select the recipient sender and template for emails that are sent if the sending of alerts fails Frequency Choose how often product alerts are sent out Daily Weekly or Monthly Start Time Choose what time of day the product alert process starts This time should be after any price or inventory updates are performed Error Email Recipient Identify the email address of the person normally a store administrator who should receive an email notification when there is an error in the product alert process Error Email Sender Select the role that the email will be from Error Email Template Select the email template to use for product alert error notifications For more information see Customizing Transactional Emails page 181 Product Image Placeholders This section enables you to specify an image for each of the sizes that are used instead of the product image if it is missing Recently Viewed Compared Products This feature is described in detail in Recently Viewed page 45 The configuration section enables you to specify how many products are shown by default in each list Recently Viewed Compared Products O Show for Current Website V WEBSITE Default Recently Viewed Products 5 STORE VIEW
158. ct Customers from the Entity Type drop down list The system generates a list of entity attributes that are relevant to your customers 3 By default all attributes are exported to the CSV file In the Entity Attributes list select the Skip check box for any attributes that you want to exclude from the CSV file 4 By default all records are exported to the CSV file Use the controls in the Filter column to limit the records that are exported Click Continue to export your selected product information to a CSV file Open the saved file in your favorite spreadsheet application and edit as needed Managing Orders and Customers Importing Customer Data With the Import feature you can upload a file that contains the records for as many customers as you want To import a customer CSV file 1 In the Admin Panel select System gt Import Export gt Import to open the Import page Select Customers from the Entity Type drop down list Select one of the Import Behavior options from the drop down list Append Complex Data Adds new or edited products to your store s database Magento CE will not create duplicate entries for existing products and customers included in your CSV file Replace Existing Complex Data Completely replaces your existing data or portions thereof Delete Entities Completely deletes your existing database or portions thereof Click Browse and locate the CSV file in your local computer s fi
159. customer Customers gt Attributes gt Manage Customer Global address attribute Address Attributes o Create tax rates and tax rules for Sales gt Tax domestic intra EU and other VAT related customer groups 2 5 Appendix VAT ID Validation For assigning groups to customers the default customer s address billing or shipping for tax calculation is used the setting is configured under System gt Configuration gt CUSTOMERS gt Customer Configuration gt Create New Account Options gt Tax Calculation Based On If the VAT ID Validation feature is enabled you can still choose not to apply it for a certain customer by selecting the correspondent check box on the Customer Information page under Customers gt Manage Customers Configuring VAT ID Validation Configuring the VAT ID Validation includes these steps 1 Creating VAT related customer groups 2 Creating tax classes tax rates and tax rules 3 Configuring the VAT ID Validation settings 4 Setting your VAT ID and location country 5 Modifying the list of EU member countries used by Magento This step is only necessary if the EU gets new members or some countries leave the EU Creating the VAT Related Customer Groups VAT ID Validation functionality automatically assign one of the four default customer groups to customers according to VAT ID validation results Domestic Intra EU Invalid VAT ID Validation error You can create new customer group
160. customer tax class the class of the products product tax class in the shopping cart and the region tax rate depending on the shipping address billing address or shipping origin Magento calculates the appropriate tax for each order Note When you set up tax options be sure to set your store scope so that the options are applied across stores and websites appropriately To define Tax Management Rules 1 To define how taxes are charged select Sales gt Tax gt Manage Tax Rules to display a list of the previously defined tax rules as shown in Figure 141 Manage Tax Rules Add New Tax Rule of 1 pages View per page Total 2 records found Reset Filter Customer Tax Class Product Tax Class Tax Rate Priority Sort Order Fi Jij x Retail Customer Taxable Goods Rate 1 Retail Customer Taxable Goods US CA Rate 1 US NY Rate 1 1 Retail Customer default Rate 1 Retail Customer default US CA Rate 1 US NY Rate 1 1 Figure 141 Manage Tax Rules Page Each tax rule is composed of a customer tax class a product tax class and a tax rate 2 To define a new tax rule click Add New Tax Rule to display the Edit Rule page as shown in Figure 142 138 Taxes Edit Rule Tax Rule Information Name Retail Canada PST Customer Tax Class Retail Customer Product Tax Class Canada G3sT US CA Rate 1 US NY Rate 1 1 Tax rates at the same priority are added others are Calculate o
161. d list of the filterable attributes of the products in this category and its subcategories o Figure 78 shows the SHOP BY panel for the Apparel category which is set as an anchor SHOP BY SHOPPING OPTIONS CATEGORY shirts 4 shoes ir Hoodies 1 Figure 78 Anchored Category For Available Product Listing Sort By specify the attributes by which the customer can sort the list of products in this category By default all available attributes can be used for sorting clear the Use All Available Attributes check box to modify the list For Default Product Listing Sort By select the attribute by which the product list is sorted by default This is set in the catalog configuration see Setting Up Catalog Defaults page 70 but you can clear the Use Config Settings check box to select a default sorting attribute for this particular category For Layered Navigation Price Step specify the size of the price range to be used when calculating the price buckets for the Layered Navigation This is set in the catalog configuration but you can clear the Use Config Settings check box to specify a price range size for this particular category Custom Design Tab The Custom Design tab contains additional settings to control the theme and layout updates that are used for this category page Depending on the settings they can also affect child pages as well All of these settings are optional For more information about
162. d products to your store s database Magento CE will not create duplicate entries for existing products and customers included in your CSV file Replace Existing Complex Data Completely replaces your existing data or portions thereof Delete Entities Completely deletes your existing database or portions thereof 4 Click Browse and locate the CSV file in your local computer s file system Note The total size of the CSV file must not exceed the maximum size for your environment typically 32 MB and must be saved with UTF 8 encoding Check your spreadsheet or database application documentation for information about saving a CSV file with UTF 8 encoding Click Check Data to validate the uploaded file If the uploaded file is valid a File is valid response appears Import your products or customers by clicking Import If your file contains errors Magento CE notifies you of the errors and enables you to skip the erroneous rows and importing the valid products or customers by clicking Import When the import is complete the Import was successfully done message appears 27 Setting Up Your Catalog Exporting Product Data To export product information 126 Ta A In the Admin Panel select System gt Import Export gt Export Select Products from the Entity Type drop down list The system generates a list of entity attributes that are relevant to your products By default all attributes are exported
163. d specify the email address that is associated with your PayPal merchant account 4 Select the Website Payments Standard check box to display the Website Payments Standard Settings section shown in Figure 157 APWintegration Settings Website Payments Standard Settings Y Title PayPal Website Payments Standard STORE VIEW itis recommended to set this value to PayPal per store views Sort Order STORE VIEW Payment Action Sale WEBSITE Payment Applicable From All Allowed Countries WEBSITE Sandbox Mode No jm WEBSITE Transfer Cart Line Items Yes WEBSITE Debug Mode No jm WEBSITE Paypal Billing Agreement Settings a Settlement Report Settings a Frontend Experience Settings Figure 157 PayPal Website Payments Standard Settings 5 In the Title field specify a title to be shown to your customers 6 In the Sort Order field specify an integer number to indicate where this payment method should appear on the list of available payments on the frontend A value of 1 places this payment at the top of the list a value of 2 places it second and so on 158 Payment 7 In the Payment Action field select one of the following options Authorization Blocks or holds funds in the PayPal account until these funds have been transferred to your account This usually occurs when you process the Order Sale Specifies that funds are transferred to your account immedi
164. d to No Coupon This selection specifies that the discount takes effect as soon as a customer adds the products to the shopping cart Update prices using the following information Apply Buy get Y free fdiscount amountis Yi E Discount amount 4 Maximum Qty Discount is 0 Applied ta Discount Qty Step Buy J Free shipping No Stop further rules Mo processing Apply the rule only to cart tems matching the following conditions leave blank for all tems TALL ofthese conditions are TRUE SKU is QC 2185 Figure 195 Buy X get Y Free Promotion 2 Do not define any conditions because this rule is always applied to the Digital Camera The deal is created for the Argus QC 2185 Quick Click 5MP Digital Camera available in the Magento Sample Data 3 Click the Actions tab in the left navigation bar In the Apply field select the Buy X get Y free option 4 In the Discount Amount field specify 1 This is the number of units that are offered free 5 In the Discount Qty Step field specify 2 This is the number of units that must be purchased in order to receive the free unit 6 In the bottom section set up the condition to specify the SKU of the item that is featured in this promotion 7 Click the Save Rule button You can now send out your marketing message telling customers that if they buy 3 Argus QC 2185 Quick Click 5MP Digital Cameras one of them will be free 199 Promotions Tip It is good
165. discounts are not displayed on the product page The tier price is shown according to the Display Actual Price setting Special Price If the Special price is specified the special price is displayed according to the Display Actual Price setting Product Group Price The Product Group Price feature enables you to set different product prices for different customer groups on the product level The functionality is aimed at improving the admin user experience with setting promotional prices for customer groups Terminology Regular price The value of the price system product attribute which by default corresponds to the Price field on the Prices tab of the Product Information page available under Catalog gt Manage Products gt des red product 213 Promotions Promotional price A product price that is defined by any of the following system product attributes specia _price group_price or tier_price or the resulting price after a catalog price rule is applied Note The group_price attribute is a system product attribute which was added for storing the group price value Setting a Group Price for a Product To set a group price for a catalog product 1 2 5 Log in to the Magento Admin Panel Navigate to Catalog gt Manage Products gt odesired product The Product Information page opens On the Prices tab in the Group Price field click Add Group Price Select the target customer grou
166. discussed in How to Reindex Manually below Ready if the index is up to date Update Required Indicates whether or not you must manually reindex The value in the Mode column indicates whether the indexer must be manually updated Updated At Displays the date and time an index was last manually updated or Never if the index has never been manually updated Action Displays a Reindex Data link Click the link to reindex that option only How to Reindex Manually For the indexers that require manual updates you have the following options on this page The indexers that require manual updates display with a check box next to their name Product Attributes Tag Aggregation Data and optionally Catalog Search Index Manually reindex To manually update one or more indexers e To update more than one indexer at a time select the check box next to its name From the Action list click Reindex Data and click Submit To update one index only click the Reindex Data link in the Action column on the right Change the By default indexers that require manual updating are set to Update on indexing mode Save which means reindexing occurs after a change is made in the Admin Panel The other option is to manually reindex every time a change is made For example if you change product attributes in the Admin Panel you must 260 Indexing manually update the Product Attributes index To change the indexing mode 1
167. displayed on pages of categories it is associated to but it will not appear in search results o Search The product will be displayed when your customers search for it either using the quick or Advanced Search tools but will not be displayed on the related category page o Catalog Search The product will be available on category view pages to which it is associated and on the search result page The following describes the other fields in this page 98 Setting Up Your Catalog URL key The search engine friendly URL identifier is the name used for this product in the product s URL You cannot use spaces in this field If the URL key is left blank one is automatically generated by Magento CE Manufacturer Select the name of the manufacturer from the drop down list Color Select the color of the product if applicable Set Product as New from to Date The date range in which this product can be promoted as a new product in various locations throughout your site Country of Manufacture Select the country in which the product was manufactured In feed Determines whether this product is included in your store s product RSS feed Note Additional fields may appear on this and other pages if you add attributes to the Default attribute set or base the product on another attribute set Note The Create New Attribute button opens a popup window that enables you to enter an attribute to be added to the select
168. dit Attribute Set Default area displays a list of Groups and a list of Unassigned Attributes Find your FPT attribute eco_tax in this example in the unassigned list and drag and drop it into the attribute group where you want it to appear 4 Click Save Attribute Set In this example the eco_tax attribute is included the General attribute group as shown in the following figure 144 axes Groups Unassigned Attributes Add New Delete Selected Group zj activation_informatior calor Double click on a group to rename it computer_manufactu Cerpi po aC General contrast_ratio egname country_origin Eg description axl shorn_description cpu_speed dimension Eig Sku 3 finish Ej weight gender Er news_from_date hard_drive Er news_to_date hard _drive_speed Eg stalus Jin_depth Eg url_key manufacturer Eig visibility max_resolution Fry is_imported Eg country_of_manufacture Egy is_returnable eco_tax oE Prices megapixels memory model processor ram size Figure 146 General Attributes Group with FPT Tax Attribute Step 4 Apply the Fixed Product Tax to Products To apply the FPT to products 1 From the Admin panel select Catalog gt Manage Products 2 For the product to which you want to add the FPT click the Edit link in the Action column 3 In the Eco Tax area set the scope for the tax and the count
169. down lists in the backend A specification of 1 places this website at the top of the list 2 places it second and so on g Click Save Store View Note If you are associating a separate domain with each website some modifications must be made to the web server configuration files For details see the following Magento Knowledge Base article http www magentocommerce com knowledge base entry tutorial multi site multi domain setup 128 8 Taxes Important No guarantee is offered with respect to any of the information given here Please contact an expert before you take any decisions about tax matters Magento CE provides a variety of options for defining taxes that can be accessed by selecting the Sales menu and then the Tax option Tax classes are used to define tax rules Tax rules are defined as a combination of a Product Class a Customer Class and a Tax Zone and Rate as described below Each type of customer can be assigned a class when you define them and each product is assigned a tax class For a description of how to define a customer see Managing Customers page 220 For a description of how to define a product see Creating a New Product page 96 Magento CE analyzes the shopping cart of each customer and calculates the appropriate tax according to the class of the customer the class of the products in the shopping cart and the region as defined by the customer s shipping address billing addre
170. e Prefix First Name Kristina Middle Name lnitial Last Name Augilera Suffix Email Kristina ex ua Date Of Birth E Tax VAT Number Gender Photo Figure 265 Disabling automatic group change on customer level Important Note The setting does not influence the emulation of the customer group change during checkout The default value of the Disable automatic group change check box is set in the Default Value for Disable Automatic Group Changes Based on VAT ID field under System gt Configuration gt CUSTOMERS gt Customer Configuration gt Create New Account Options The configuration setting is made on the global level The default value applies to new customers and to customers whose records are available in the system when the VAT ID Validation functionality is enabled for the first time VAT ID Validation in Customer Accounts in the Admin Panel When an administrator adds a new default address with a VAT ID to the account of a new or existing customer or changes the VAT ID of the existing default address the system validates the VAT ID and assigns the appropriate customer group to the customer The validation is performed after the Save or Save and Continue button is clicked Note The system behavior is as described when the VAT ID Validation functionality is enabled and configured If you want to disable the automatic change of a customer group select the Disable automatic group change check
171. e as shown In Figure 213 Customer Information New Customer Back Account Information NEISI ARAR ee eta eee z Group General x Prefix First Name Middle Namelinitial Last Name Suffix Email Date Of Birth ed Tax VAT Number Gender v Send Welcome Email Send From Password Management Password or C Send auto generated password Figure 213 New Customer Page This page enables you to define basic identifying information about the customer and his her various addresses Many aspects of the information retained about a customer in Magento CE can be accessed by editing the customer s information as described in Viewing and Editing Customers page 219 3 The fields on this page are self explanatory Specify the customer s information and then click the Save Customer button Managing Customer Groups The customer group to which the customer belongs determines which discounts are given to this customer as defined in the Catalog Price Rules and Shopping Cart Price Rules described in the Catalog and Shopping Cart Price Rules page 189 and the tax rule that is applied to that customer 220 Managing Orders and Customers To create and edit customer groups 1 In the Admin Panel select Customers gt Customer Groups to open the Customer Groups page as shown in Figure 214 S amp S Customer Groups Add New Customer Group Page 4 ofipages View 20 w perpage Total 4records found I
172. e the redirect results in a 404 Not Found error on your web store Redirect type determines how search engines rank the redirect o None useful if you don t want the customer to have to wait the additional time required to redirect o Temporary HTTP 302 Found Permanent HTTP 301 Moved Permanently 26 Indexing Note Magento recommends choosing a permanent redirect because search engines generally preserve the page s ranking A 302 Temporary redirect does not preserve a page s ranking For more information consult a resource such as seomoz org OF google com Sample URL Rewrites Magento CE enables you to create redirects to add additional URLs for items You can do this for example to make items more attractive to buyers You can create a redirect to any valid path including paths you create in your CMS For example you can change the following product URL http www example com peripherals microsoft natural ergonomic keyboard 4000 html and add another one such as http www example com best keyboard html or you can create another URL for a category like http www example com all on sale html To create a category path like the following for a promotion you must first create a path using the CMS or by other means http www example com save now spring sale URL Rewrite Option Setting Category and Product URL Suffixes 262 By default Magento enables web store customers to access produc
173. e Electrical and Electronic Equipment tax according to the requirements for your store and products 134 Taxes Note To assign a fixed tax to a product create an attribute with the Catalog Input Type for Store Owner set to Fixed Product Tax and assign this attribute to the attribute set for the product Product Tax Class You create product tax classes and assign products to them depending on the type of product For example food might not be taxed or might be taxed at a different rate To define a product tax class 1 Select Sales gt Tax gt Product Tax Class to display the Product Tax Classes page Figure 136 which shows a list of the previously defined product tax classes Product Tax Classes Add New Reset Filter Search Page 1 of 1 pages View per page Total 3 records found Class Name t default Shipping Taxable Goods Figure 136 Product Tax Classes Page 2 Click the Add New button to display the New Class page as shown in Figure 137 New Class oo Product Tax Class Information Class Name My Tax Class Figure 137 New Product Tax Class Page 3 In the Class Name field specify a name for this tax class Note You can apply a tax class to a product by editing the product and choosing the appropriate option on the Prices tab 4 Click Save Class Customer Tax Class You create customer tax classes and assign customers to them depending on the type of customer For exa
174. e Title field specify the name of the payment method that will be displayed to customers in the Payment Information section of the one page checkout This parameter can be set up for each store view Sort Order When deciding to use a number of payment methods in the Sort Order field determine the sequence number of this method in the list of available methods in the Payment Information section of the one page checkout Note The payment methods for which the sort order is not set are displayed first Payment Action Choose what type of transaction is conducted when the order is placed and the entities that will be created in the backend as a result The following options are available Authorization The payment is authorized and only an order is created in the backend of your store Sale The payment is captured at PayPal s side and as a result an order and an invoice are created in the backend of your store Payment Applicable From Choose the countries from which customers can use this payment method Choose between the following options All Allowed Countries Customers from the default countries list can use this payment method 6 Payment Specific Countries Only customers whose billing address includes one of the countries selected in the Countries Payment Applicable From field can use this payment method The field basically works as a filter so that this payment method will be listed for only those customers
175. e lines Apply Discounts To FPT Click Yes to apply discounts to the fixed product tax amount Click No to apply discounts to the base price of a product without the fixed product tax included FPT Tax Configuration Available in EE 1 13 1 and later only Determines how FPT tax is calculated as follows e Not Taxed Click this option if your taxing jurisdiction does not tax FPT For example the state of California does not tax FPT Taxed Click this option if your taxing jurisdiction does tax FPT For example Canada taxes FPT Loaded and Displayed with Tax Click this option if FPT is added to the order total before applying tax for example in EU countries Apply Tax to FPT Available in EE 1 13 0 x and earlier only Click Yes to apply tax to the fixed product tax amount Click No to apply tax to the base price of products without the fixed product tax included Include FPT In Subtotal Click Yes to include fixed product tax in the shopping cart subtotal Click No to display fixed product tax under the shopping cart subtotal and is not included in the subtotal itself 142 axes If you select Excluding FPT FPT description final price the following figure shows what your customers see on the shopping cart page Proceed to Checkout PRODUCT HAME FPT is k SUBTOTAL REMOVE shown Eda 75 5307 50 separately te with subtotal Bii CLEAR SHOPPING CART UPDATE SHOPPING CART Discount Codes Estimate Shippin
176. e notified about changes Setting Up Your Catalog Product Reviews Tab This tab provides a list of reviews posted by customers about a product that is being edited the tab is not available for new product records for which there are no reviews You can use the Edit button that appears in each review row to approve edit or remove the review Note The Pending Reviews RSS link enables you to receive notifications of all pending reviews and enables you to first approve them before they are shown on the site Page 1 of1 pages View 20 perpage Total 2 records found A Pending Reviews RSS ID Created On Status Title Nickname Review Visible In Type Product Name Product SKU Action From 5 v v v To fed 74 Aug 31 2007 7 01 23 Approved Amazing Me Whata cool Main Guest Coalesce coal_1 Edit PM shirt i wear Website Functioning On it everyday Main Store Impatience German T Shirt Main Website Main Store French 53 Aug 29 2007 9 07 46 Approved Comfortable Essentl This isthe Main Customer Coalesce coal_1 Edit AM most Website Functioning On comfortable Main Store Impatience shirt own English T Shirt i Main Website Main Store French Figure 108 Product Reviews Tab Product Tags Tab This tab displays the tags that customers have assigned to a product and how many times each tag was used This tab is not available in new product records for which no tags have been assigned Pe TRTE adia From v To blue
177. e received from shipping service providers The tracking number enables customers to learn the status of the shipments in their orders using the My Account option that appears in the header of the frontend For the supported shipping service providers you can create and print shipping labels form the Shipment page Comment History Page The Comment History page enables you to view a list of comments that have been added to the order record over the course of its life cycle It is a good practice to add comments at every stage of the order especially if problems come up Transactions Page The Transactions page enables you to view a list of transactions that are associated with this order Creating New Orders You may want to create an order using the backend for example when an order is received over the phone Introducing the Backend Tip Typically orders are placed by customers in the frontend In addition you can create orders in the backend This enables you to take orders by phone mail or fax and then enter them into your web store to be managed and tracked This feature is useful for call center operators to take orders directly from your customers The ordering process in the backend is not much different from the one your customers experience The backend provides all the same functions that your customers have when creating an order from your web store including the ability to move products between the shopping cart and wishl
178. e share it with others Use the wiki or forums to write and share it There are also several other community features in addition to the forums described above that enable the exchange of ideas and help They are Groups Link community members working on or interested in specific subjects such as Designing For Magento and Drop Shippers Chat Provides a real time discussion with Magento community members Wiki Provides community editable pages for sharing ideas and findings tutorials and information The following lists other resources available to help you use get the most out of Magento Knowledge Base The Magento knowledge base is a Wiki that provides instructions published by Magento or community members in the form of guides and how to articles At http AWwww magentocommerce com knowledge base Li A Getting Help Webinar Archive Up to date webinars are provided by Magento in which you can learn real world tips and tricks in order to get the most out of your stores and promotions At http AWwww magentocommerce com media webinar archive Screen casts Screen casts are presentation videos that can guide you through many of the Magento features At http www magentocommerce com media screencasts Magento Designer s Guide The Magento Designer s Guide provides information for designers describing Magento concepts and design implementation in Magento At http AWwww magentocommerce com desi
179. e some combinations of tax related options that can result in customer credibility issues due to how tax is calculated and displayed to your customers 129 axes Problem Configurations and Related Display Issues Certain tax configurations in Magento can create customer confidence issues resulting in cart abandonment In general these conditions occur when the tax calculation method is set to Row or Total and a customer is presented with prices excluding and including tax or tax on an item basis in the cart In this instance due to how rounding is done for tax calculation there can be differences between the amount shown in the cart and the amount a customer expects to pay These differences if noticed by a customer usually end up as cart abandonment so you should avoid the problematic tax configurations Catalog Prices Excluding Tax These settings are available in the Admin panel at System gt Configuration gt Sales gt Tax gt Calculation Settings options Catalog Prices and Tax Calculation Method Based On Excluding tax Including tax Including amp Excluding tax If you set up your tax calculation settings in ways that trigger any of the problematic configurations discussed in this section the system displays the following notification Vv Warning tax discount configuration might result in different discounts than a customer might expect Please see source for more details Click here to go to Tax configuration
180. e web store and are managed through the Backend panel CMS Pages are full pages that are available via their own URL addresses Static Blocks are sections of code or graphics that can be referenced inside CMS pages as well as Category landing pages They are page elements that can be reused and referenced throughout your site The following example shows how to create a new page in Magento CE and then how to create a link to it from your store footer To add a CMS page 178 P Select CMS gt Pages to display the list of currently defined CMS pages as shown in Figure 168 Click the Add New Page button on the top right of the page to display the New Page page as shown in Figure 171 Page Information New Page Back Reset Save Page Save and Continue Edit Page Information Page Information Content l Design eae Page Title EEEE URL Key Relative to Website Base URL Store View All Store Views Main Website Main Website Store aaaaaaa Default Store View Test Site Test Store 1 French Status Enabled b Figure 171 New Page Page In the Page Title field specify the words to appear in the browser s title bar In the URL Key field specify the unique identifier to be used in the URL It must contain all lower case letters and no spaces The following example uses our_history Leave the default value in the Store View field In the Status field select Enabled Click Content in the left navigation bar
181. e your selections To set up websites stores and store views see Setting Up Your Store Hierarchy page 127 1 Select the Websites option in the left panel to display the Websites tab as shown in Figure 104 Product In Websites Items that you don t want to show in the catalog or search results should have status Disabled in the desired store Main Website Main Store English French German Figure 104 Websites Tab If your store has more than one website store or store view you must assign the product to the appropriate website in order to make it available in this website Note Sample Data contains three store views If you want to create a product in the Sample Data environment you must select the Main Website option when creating a product Categories Tab The Categories tab enables you to assign this product to one or more categories 1 Select the Categories option in the left panel to display the Categories tab as shown in Figure 105 Product Categories oC Root Catalog 0 E E Furniture 6 oE Electronics 42 oE Apparel 66 E Shirts 19 aHa C Shoes 46 E4 Hoodies 1 an an Figure 105 Categories Tab 107 Setting Up Your Catalog 108 2 Specify the categories to which this product belongs by selecting the appropriate check boxes Note You can assign a product to more than one category Note You can also assign products to a category while editing the cat
182. ebsites Action Any From x xj Frome Frome Ba xj zj To To To m uso j r 166 HTC Touch Diamond Simple Cell Phones HTC Touch 750 00 999997 Catalog Enabied Main Website Eos Product Diamond Search r 165 My Computer Bundle Computer mycomputer 999998 Catalog Enabled Main Website Egs Product Search r 164 Gaming Computer Bundie Default computer foed 4 999 95 999995 Catalog Enabied Main Website Eqs Product Search r 163 Cornouter Bundle Default computer 999995 Catalog Enabled Main Website Eqs Product Search r 162 Microsoft Viireless Optical Mouse 5000 Simpie Defaut micronmouse5000 49 99 999999 Catalog Enabled Main Website Eqs Product Search r 161 Logitech diNovo Edge Keyboard Simple Defaut logidinovo 239 99 199995 Catalog Enabled Main Website Ega Product Search 160 Logitech Cordless Optical Trackman Simple Default logitechcord 79 99 999995 Catalog Enabled Main Website Eas Product Search r 159 Microsoft Natural Ergonomic Keyboard Simpie Defaut microsos natura 99 99 999999 Catalog Enabled Main Website Eos 4000 Product Search r 158 Sony VAIO 11 1 Notebook PC Bundle Computer VGN TXN27 NIE 999998 Catalog Enabled Main Website Eqs Product Search r 157 30 Flat Panel TFT LCD Cinema HO Simple Monitors M9179LL 699 99 999997 Catalog Enabled Main Website Egs Monitor Product Search r 156 19 Widescreen Flat Panel LCD Monitor Simple Monitors W1952TO TF 399 99 999998 Catalog Enabled Main Website Eos Prevteirt Seanrh Figure 93 Manage Products Page
183. ecords 219 Messages 60 Misspellings 242 Money Orders 170 Monitoring 239 Most Viewed Products In Dashboard 62 My Account 51 My Cart 51 52 My Wish List 51 Newsletter 215 Queues 218 Reports 218 Templates 216 Notify Customer 65 O Operating Systems 9 Orders Cancel 64 Creating 66 224 Dashboard 61 Details 64 Filtering 63 Hold 64 Invoices 65 Managing 62 219 223 New 66 224 Sales 224 Sorting 64 Terminology 224 Viewing 63 64 209 Appendix VAT ID Validation P payment checks 170 money orders 170 Payment 157 payment methods PayPal Advanced 159 PayPal Express Checkout 162 PayPal 157 PayPal Advanced payment method 159 PayPal Express Checkout payment method 162 Permissions 13 Polls 57 Editing 238 Managing 236 Popular Search Terms 75 Popular Tags 41 234 price layered navigation 86 Prices 99 Rules 190 Pricing Tier 204 product data exporting 124 import 124 Product Image Placeholders 73 Product List Banners 46 Product Reviews 109 Product Tags 109 Product Types 96 Product Wizard 120 Products Alerts 72 Attributes 88 Catalog Tab 83 Categories 107 Changing 121 Compared 73 Comparing 42 Creating 96 290 Cross sell 48 Cross sells 185 189 Editing 120 Images 100 Inventory 106 Managing 95 Meta Info 100 New 96 Pages 49 Prices 99 Ratings 67 Recently Viewed 73 Related 48 185 188 Reviews 67 72 Searching
184. ed attribute set However we recommend defining the attributes structure first Prices Tab Click the Prices tab in the Product Information panel on the left to display the Prices tab as shown in Figure 96 Prices Create New Attribute Price WEBSITE USD Cost WEBSITE USD Tier Price Website Customer Group Qty Price Action Add Tier Special Price WEBSITE USD Special Price From Date E GLOBAL Special Price To Date E GLOBAL Is product available for purchase Yes v GLOBAL with Google Checkout Apply MAP Use config v WEBSITE Display Actual Price Use config v WEBSITE Manufacturers Suggested Retail WEBSITE Price USD Figure 96 Prices Tab Fill in all the mandatory fields which are indicated by a red asterisk gg Setting Up Your Catalog This tab enables you to enter the Price Cost and Special Price information for this product You can also add Tier Pricing as described in Tier Pricing page 204 The Special Price field is used for discounting or promotions as described in Special Prices page 202 The Cost field is only used in the backend It can be used for generating margin and profit reports The Apply Map Display Actual Price and Manufacturer s Suggested Retail Price fields are used for implementing the Minimum Advertised Price feature for this product For more information see Minimum Advertised Price page 205 Meta Information Tab Click M
185. ed will not be shown in the scope drop downs or they will be displayed as inactive Only the sales and other data for allowed websites and stores will be shown To limit admin role access to specific websites or stores 1 Choose System gt Permissions gt Roles 2 Click on the Add New Role button to create a new role 3 In the Role Info tab specify the following information Role Name required Give the role a descriptive name to help you remember its scope and purpose 4 Select the Role Resources tab in the left column 245 Keeping Your Store Healthy In the Role Scopes panel set the following values o Select Custom from the Role Scopes drop down menu o In the resulting list select the websites and or stores that you want users with that role to have access to In the Role Resources panel set the following values o Select Custom from the Resource Access drop down menu o Inthe resulting list select the menus and features that you want users with that role to have access to Important Note Be sure to disable access to at least the Permissions tool here in the Role Resources section if you are limiting website store access for a given role Otherwise users with this role will be able to modify their own restrictions o If desired select the Role Users tab and assign existing Admin user accounts to this new role 5 Click the WSave Role button to save your new role After creating a restricted r
186. egory Related Products Cross Sell and Up Sell Tabs Each of these pages is similar and enables you to configure relationships between products The interface in Figure 106 appears in each of these pages Page 4 of 1 pages View 20 v per page Total 0 records found ID Name Type Attrib Set Name Status Visibility SKU Price Position Yes v v v v From From To E o m No records found Figure 106 Product Relationship Interface To display all the products in the list click the Reset Filter button Select the relevant checkboxes to assign products You can use any of the filters available to make it easier to search for the products that you want For more information about these pages see Promotions page 185 Product Alerts Tab This page is only available when alerts are enabled System gt Configuration gt Catalog Product Alerts Page 4 of1 pages View 20 perpage Total 0 records found First Name Last Name Email Price Date Subscribed Last Notification Send Count There are no customers for this alert Stock notification was saved successfully O Page 1 of 1 pages View 20 w perpage Total 0 records found First Name Last Name Email Date Subscribed Last Notification Send Count There are no customers for this alert Figure 107 Product Alerts Tab This page displays a list of the customers that have subscribed to each type of alert for this product and the dates on which they wer
187. ements are applied to all pages in your store giving your store a consistent look and feel throughout lya Design and Content Changing the Web Store s Theme When you first install Magento CE the design elements of your store are based on the Default Theme You can modify this theme add themes created by others or create new themes from scratch Tip To design your own theme see the Magento Designers Guide at http www magentocommerce com design_ guide To add and activate a theme in your store 1 4 1 Go to the Magento Connect site http Awww magentocommerce com magento connect This site contains hundreds of extensions which are add ons to Magento software that can extend or enhance the look or functionality of your store New ones are uploaded often 2 Click on the Core link to select one of the free extensions provided by Magento The extensions are listed in the center of the page as shown in Figure 166 Design and Content Q Search entire site SEARCH Get expert training with Magento U Login Register Job Board English v Cart 0 items Try the Demo Contact Us M Magento ECOMMERCE PLATFORM FOR GROWTH 1052 users online Products Services Support Resources Download Customers Partners Company Blog Community Home Magento Connect Filter Core Subscribe to new extensions Magento con nect The Official Marketpla
188. ento system A customer does not need to have a PayPal account to use this method The PayPal Advanced payment method is not available for orders created from the Admin Panel Configuring PayPal Payments Advanced To use the PayPal Advanced method you should have a PayPal Payments Advanced account on PayPal You need to have a separate account for each website Configuring the PayPal Advanced method for each website is a two step procedure for each website 159 Fayment 1 Set the options in the Magento Admin Panel 2 Set the required options of the PayPal Payments Advanced account on the PayPal Manager website Setting PayPal Payments Advanced Options in the Magento Admin Panel 160 To configure the PayPal Advanced payment method in the Magento Admin Panel 1 2 3 Log in to the Magento Admin Panel Navigate to System gt Configuration Select the desired website from the Current Configuration Scope drop down list in the upper left corner of the page Under SALES in the left column click PayPal In the Merchant Country field select United States If any other country is selected the PayPal Payments Advanced settings are not displayed In the Select a PayPal Solution section select the PayPal Payments Advanced check box to make the payment method settings available When the check box is selected the corresponding configuration field set appears The following settings are available Title In th
189. eplaced with the following message To see price add this item to your cart You can always remove it later The What s this link points to an information tip The text of the information tip can be edited in the Default What s This Text Message field The actual price is shown when customer adds the product to the shopping cart It is also shown during the checkout as usual Before Order Confirmation Clicking the Click for price link in a catalog redirects to the product page On the product page the price is replaced with the following message See price before order confirmation The What s this link points to the information tip The actual price is displayed on the Order Review step of the one page checkout or on the order review pages of the Google checkout or PayPal checkout In the shopping cart neither the prices nor the subtotals are displayed When there is at least one item in the shopping cart with Display Actual Price set to Before Order Confirmation the order total is not shown in the cart Instead the message Order total will be displayed before you submit the order is shown Promotions Option Description Scope The option selected defines how product prices are displayed in wishlists and comparison lists as well Default Pop up Text The text field for editing the information message Message displayed if the Display Actual Price field is set to On Gesture Default Wh
190. er VAT ID during order creation in the Admin Panel After the validation the administrator receives a notification about the validation results in the form of a pop up message A customer group which should be assigned to a customer according to the validation results can differ from the customer group that is currently assigned to the customer In this case the system displays a dialog box suggesting that the administrator confirm or reject the group change emulation for the customer s current order If the administrator confirms then the group change is emulated for the current order and the corresponding VAT rate is applied if the corresponding tax rule is configured in the system The actual customer group of a customer is not changed If a new customer account is added during the order creation and an administrator confirms using the customer group that corresponds to the VAT ID validation results then after the order creation the customer account is saved in the system and the customer group that was used for order creation is assigned to it 265 Appendix VAT ID Validation 286 Index A About Us 178 Access Permissions 13 Account My Account 51 Additional Shipping Modules 155 administrator users 245 Approving Ratings and Reviews 67 Reviews 233 Tags 235 Attribute Sets Defining 92 Attributes 88 Defining 89 Groups 94 Sets 92 auto generation coupon codes 200 B Backend Accessing 23 Definitio
191. est checkout will only work with shareable Figure 73 Downloadable Products Options Order Item Status to Enable Downloads Controls whether customers can access their downloadable product links immediately after the order is placed or only after the invoice is created for the order Default Maximum Number of Downloads Controls how many times a downloadable product may be downloaded by the customer after it has been purchased Shareable Setting this option to Yes enables non registered customers guest customers to access their downloads This is the only option for customers to access their products if you want to offer guest checkout or quick checkout methods such as PayPal Express or Google Checkout This setting can be overridden at the product level Default Sample Title and Default Link Title These settings control what is displayed throughout the store when referring to samples and downloadable products links Open Links in New Window Controls whether the download page opens in a new window Use Content Disposition Controls whether the content is opened in a browser window or downloaded Setting Up Your Catalog Disable Guest Checkout if Cart Contains Downloadable Items This setting disables the Guest Checkout option only if there are downloadable items in a cart and leaves it enabled if a customer is purchasing other products If you set this option to Yes be sure to set the Shareable option to Yes as
192. est site Test Store 7 French Figure 59 Selecting Configuration Scope If you select Default Config the option choices you make are applied as default values for all websites stores and store views On the configuration pages you will see scope indicators to the right of each option These indicate the lowest level of the hierarchy at which you can set the value of these options For example the value of the Default Display Currency option may be set at the default global level but can be overridden at the store view level as indicated by the ISTORE VIEW indicator for that option see Figure 60 ID Introducing the Backend Currency Options Base Currency US Dollar vf WEBSITE Base currency is used for all online payment transactions Scope is defined by the catalog price scope Catalog gt Price Catalog Price Scope Default Display Currency US Dollar STORE VIEW Allowed Currencies Afghan Afghani N sTo View Albanian Lek E Algerian Dinar Angolan Kwanza Argentine Peso Armenian Dram Aruban Florin Australian Dollar Azerbaijani Manat Azerbaijani Manat 1993 2006 lt Figure 60 Scope Indicators Managing Administrator Messages When you log in to the backend any new messages are displayed in a pop up box Typically these messages are notifications of new Magento CE or extension releases You can manage these messages much like you would manage your em
193. eta Info on the left to display the Meta Information tab as shown in Figure 97 Meta Information Create New Attribute Meta Title STORE VIEW Meta Keywords STORE VIEW Meta Description Maximum 255 chars Figure 97 Meta Information Tab 4 Specify information that enables search engines to more easily find and index this product Images Tab Customers generally like to see what they are buying before they make a purchase The Images tab enables you to upload pictures of your product 1 Click the Images tab on the left to display the Images tab as shown in Figure 98 Image type and information need to be specified for each store view Small Image Base Image Exclude Remove STORE VIEW Label Sort Order Thumbnail STORE VIEW STORE VIEW No image Image Figure 98 Images Tab 100 Setting Up Your Catalog 2 Specify the image to be displayed in the web store to represent this product Use the Browse button to select the image file from your local file system Tip You can select more than one file in this window to upload multiple images at once 3 After you have specified the image files of this product click the Upload Files button The Images tab shows uploaded the image files as shown in Figure 99 yp Image type and information need to be specified for each store view Image Label Sort Thumbnail Small Image Baselmage Exclude Remove Order STORE VIEW STORE VIEW STORE VIEW N
194. ety of customer reports can be generated by selecting Reports gt Customers in the Admin Panel The following describes the available customer reports e New Accounts Shows the customers that have opened accounts in your web store during the period that you specify Customer by orders total Lists customers in descending order of money spent in your web store Customer by number of orders Lists customers in descending order of number of orders placed in your web store Importing and Exporting Customer Information Another way to add customer records to Magento CE is by importing the data from a comma separated values CSV file The file that you upload must be in Comma Separated Values CSV format Most spreadsheet and database applications can read and create CSV files This feature is convenient if you have existing customer information in another system and you want to bring it into Magento CE In order to import a CSV file into Magento CE it must have certain characteristics Specifically each column heading must exactly match the Attribute Code for the attribute in that column An easy way to get the correct column headings is to export the existing Magento CE customer data to a CSV file then add or update the information to the CSV file before re importing it into Magento CE Exporting Customer Data yee To export customer information 1 In the Admin Panel select System gt Import Export gt Export 2 Sele
195. eview page as shown in Figure 227 Write Your Own Review You re reviewing Coalesce Functioning On Impatience T Shirt How do you rate this product 1 star stars 3 Stars 4 stars 5 stars Quality Price O O O O Value E C oO oO O Nickname Summary of Your Review Review Submit Review Figure 227 Write Your Own Review Page Frontend Adding a Custom Rating By default the customer can rate the quality price and value of a product You might want to add custom ratings to enable customers to rate such aspects as durability warranty and so on This section describes how to create a new customized rating 1 In the Admin Panel select Catalog gt Reviews amp Ratings gt Manage Ratings to display the Manage Ratings page as shown in Figure 228 Manage Ratings Add New Rating Page 1 of 1 pages View 20 perpage Total 3 records found Reset Filter 3 Price 1 Quality 2 Value Figure 228 Manage Ratings Page 2 Click the Add New Rating button to display the New Rating page as shown in Figure 229 New Rating Managing Customer Generated Content Back f Reset Save Rating If you do not specify a rating title for a store the default value will be used Rating Title Default Value English French German Rating Visibility Visible In Main Website Main Store English French German Figure 229 New Rating Page 3 Inthe Def
196. f product price discount 3 Inthe Discount amount field specify 10 to indicate that 10 is reduced from the product s original price Tip Other options not related to this example are available such as Fixed amount discount Fixed amount discount for whole shopping cart and Buy X get Y free 4 In the Maximum Qty Discount is Applied to field specify the maximum quantity of products to which this discount can be applied If you enter 5 in this field then the first five products of this type purchased in the same shopping cart get the 10 discount and the sixth product of the same type does not get the discount 5 In the Discount Qty Step Buy X field specify how often the discount is applied This field is not relevant to our example so leave this field empty If you enter 8 here then a 10 discount is applied to all the products after the eighth product is added to the shopping cart If more than eight items are added to the shopping cart the ninth through 15th products do not get the discount until the 16th product is added to the shopping cart at which point the discount is 10 for all 16 products This discount continues for every factor of eight 6 In the Free Shipping field specify whether to combine the coupon amount with a free shipping offer for only the products for which the coupon is valid or for the entire Order when one of these products is in the shopping cart This field is not relevant to our example so leave
197. feedback when a customer uses the Contact Us option in the store In the Email Sender drop down list select the email address from which feedback messages are sent In the Email Template drop down list select the template to be used for the Contact Us form displayed on the frontend You can create custom email templates For more information see Customizing Transactional Emails page 181 Click Save Config to save your changes Sales Emails You can configure Magento CE to send emails that confirm an order invoice shipment or credit memo to both registered customers and store guests To configure sales emails sent to customers Te 2 In the Admin Panel select System gt Configuration gt SALES gt Sales Emails In the Current Configuration Scope drop down list in the left upper left corner select the scope for which you want these configurations to apply Click the Order heading to expand the Order field set as shown in Figure 23 31 Basic Configuration Sales Emails Save Config Enabled Yes S STORE VIEW New Order Confirmation Email Sales Representative STORE VIEW Sender New Order Confirmation New Order Default Template from Locale STORE VIEW Template New Order Confirmation New Order for Guest Default Template from Low STORE VIEW Template for Guest Send Order Email Copy To STORE VIEW Send Order Email Copy Method Bcc STORE VIEW Order Comments Inv
198. ferent discounts than a customer might expect Please see source for more details Click here to go to Tax configuration and change your settings 12 Set the Apply Discount on Prices field to one of the values in the following table according to your local requirements Note If the Apply Customer Tax field is set to After Discount the applied discount on price including tax is calculated based on store tax Store tax is calculated based on the store s address for display purposes The actual tax that a customer pays on an order is calculated when the customer enters a shipping address and the system updates tax based upon your store s tax configuration settings Excluding Tax Any discount on prices is applied excluding tax Including Tax Any discount on prices is applied including tax 13 Set the Apply Tax On field to one of the options in the following table according to your local requirements 133 axes Custom price if available Tax is applied to any custom prices available Original price only Tax is applied to the original price only 14 Expand the Default Tax Origin Calculation section to specify which country is used by Magento as the default for tax calculation as shown in Figure 134 Default Tax Ongin Calculation Default Country United States ka STL Si Default Post Code FR Figure 134 Default Tax Origin Calculation Note If you select Including Tax for any of the options described in
199. ff subtotal only Sort Order Figure 142 Edit Rule Page 3 In the Tax Rule Information area select the options as shown in the following table Name Specify a name for this tax rule that will make it easy to identify Customer Tax Class Select the customer tax class to which you will apply this tax rule Product Tax Class Select the product tax class to which you will apply this tax rule Tax Rate Select the tax rate to apply for this tax rule 139 axes Priority Calculate off subtotal only Sort Order Specify the priority of this tax when more than one tax applies Lower numbers have higher priority If two tax rules with the same priority apply then the taxes are added together If two taxes with a different priority apply then the taxes are compounded When taxes are compounded the first priority tax is calculated on the subtotal amount and then the second priority tax is calculated on the subtotal plus the first priority tax amount Important Check this checkbox for taxes to be calculated off only the subtotal of the order This means that for this tax rule tax applies only to the subtotal of the order Specify the order in which tax rules are displayed on the Manage Tax Rules page Lower numbers have higher sort order in the list 4 Click Save Rule or Save and Continue Edit to save your changes Tip When numerous taxes must be defined you can ease the process by importing them from a spreadsheet
200. fields appear in the frontend as shown in Figure 152 Shipping YOUR CHECKOUT PROGRESS Billing Address Change Test Customer Test Street 1 El Shipping Method Test Street 2 Test City California 90123 Flat Rate United States Fixed 5 00 T 123 123 1234 Shipping Address Change Back ee RE Test Street 1 5 Payment Information Test Street 2 Test City California 90123 United States T 123 123 1234 Shipping Method Payment Method Figure 152 Flat Rate Shipping Method and Title Note Some Shipping Methods such as UPS provide a variety of shipping methods to choose from 5 In the Type field specify the entity to which the shipping fee applies such as Per Item In this case the shipping fee is dependent on the number of items shipped If you set the rate to be per item it is multiplied by the total quantity of items in the shopping cart If you have two of the same item or two different items then the rate is the same You can also select Per Order in this field 6 In the Ship to applicable countries field you can select the Specific Countries option to enable access to the field under it in which you can select specific countries so that the appropriate and different shipping rates are applied to the relevant countries as shown in Figure 153 ship to applicable countries ship to Specific counties Antarctica Antigua and Barbuda Figure 153 Specific Countries Selection Tip Hold down
201. fig to save your changes Flat Shipping Rates A flat shipping rate refers to a fixed predefined cost for shipping which can be applied per item or per shipment according to your preferences To define flat shipping rates 1 Select System gt Configuration gt Shipping Method 151 Shipping 152 2 Expand the Flat Rate section to define a fixed predefined amount for shipping as shown in Figure 151 Shipping Methods Flat Rate Enabled Yes Title Flat Rate Method name Fixed Price 5 00 Calculate Handling Fee Handling Fee Displayed Error Message This shipping method is currently unavailable If you would like to ship using this shipping method please contact us Ship to applicable All Allowed Countries countries ship to Specific countries sort order Figure 151 Flat Rate Shipping Settings Tip Magento CE also provides the option to specify table rates by expanding the Table Rates section This feature enables you to define shipping rates by weight destination price the number of items and various combinations of these categories The table rates are entered by importing a CSV file See http www magentocommerce com knowledge base entry how do i set up table rate shipping for more information 3 Inthe Enabled field select Yes The flat rate method then appears as an option in the shopping cart and on the shipping page during the checkout 4 The contents of Title and Method name
202. follows Bestsellers Most Viewed Products Product Name Price Number of Views The Get Up Kids Band Camp Pullover Hoodie 30 00 5 CN Clogs Beach Garden Clog 15 99 2 Computer 2 Gaming Computer 4 999 95 2 Coalesce Functioning On Impatience T Shirt 15 00 2 Figure 63 Additional Dashboard Information Bestsellers Tab Shows a list of the best selling products in your web store their price and the quantity ordered Most Viewed Products Tab Shows a list of the most recently viewed products and the number of times they were viewed New Customers Shows a list of the most recently registered customers Customers Shows a list of your top customers meaning the customers that have ordered the most items from your web store in the last year Managing Orders This section first describes how to view and manage orders as well as how to create orders from the backend 62 Introducing the Backend Viewing the Orders in Your Web Store To view the orders in your web store In the Admin Panel select Sales gt Orders to display the Orders page as shown in Figure 64 a Orders Create New Order Page 4 ofipages View 20 perpage Total2recordsfound New Order RSS Reset Filter Select All UnselectAll Select Visible Unselect Visible 0 items selected Actions v Submit Order Purchased from store Purchased On Bill to Name Ship to Name G T Base G T Purchased Status Action Any v From
203. g cart BACK TO SCHOOL Keep your eyes open for our special Back to School items and save BIG g COMMUNITY POLL What is your favorite Magento feature Layered Navigation Price Rules Category Management Compare Products NOW ACCEPTING PayPal Note If a 404 Not Found error appears verify the target path precedes the request path and that each path is separated by one character 10 Optionally verify category and custom redirects the same way Editing or Deleting URL Rewrites To edit or delete a URL rewrite 1 Log in to the Admin Panel as an administrator 2 Click Catalog gt URL Rewrites The URL Rewrite Management page opens 3 Click the row of the URL redirect to edit or delete To edit a URL redirect you can also click Edit in the Action column 4 To delete the URL redirect click Delete You are required to confirm the action To edit a redirect edit or change the information displayed on your screen For additional information see Creating New URL Rewrites page 264 Using Flat Catalog and Product Reindexing Magento uses the Entity Attribute Value EAV model for storing customer product and category data in its database Although the EAV model enables you to have completely extensible attributes for those objects object attributes are stored in multiple tables rather than one very large table 267 Indexing Flat Catalog Prerequisite Enabling Frontend
204. g and Tax Subtotal 217 50 Enter your Giupon code if you have one Enter your destination ib get a shipping estimate i Grand Total Excl Tax 217 50 APPLY COUPROA Country Canada Gift Cards StateiProvince Enter the gift card cade Piata Select region 4a or pravince r Canada G5T 5 1038 SK PST at 5 4 7619 10 37 Zip Postal Code Tax 20 75 Grand Total Incl Tax 238 25 Proceed to Checkout Pio cat with he iple Tifi GET A QUOTE Figure 144 Shopping Cart Page with FTP Shown 5 When complete click the Save Config button to save the settings Step 2 Create a Fixed Product Tax Attribute for Products To create the attribute 1 From the Admin panel select Catalog gt Attributes gt Manage Attributes 2 To add anew FPT product attribute click the Add New Attribute button in the upper right 3 In the Attribute Code field specify a unique identifier for this attribute Do not use spaces or special characters However you can use hyphens or underscores The maximum length is 30 characters In this example eco_tax is the attribute code 4 In the Scope field select the level at which the values of this attribute are shared as shown in the following table Global The value of this attribute for a given product must be the same throughout your website Website The value of this attribute for a given product can differ on different websites however it cannot differ between store views contained under
205. g polls 2 Click the Add New Poll button in the top right corner of the page to display the New Poll page as shown in Figure 237 New Poll Back Reset Save Poll Poll information Poll Question Status Visible In Main Website Main Store English French German Figure 237 New Poll Page 3 In the Poll Question field enter the question that your customer will be asked In the Status field specify whether the poll is Open or Closed The status of the poll is Open by default which means that it appears in your store If you do not want it to appear in your store select the Closed option Select one or more stores that you want the poll to appear in Click the Poll Answers option in the left panel to display Assigned Answers page Click the Add New Answer button to add possible answers to your question that can be selected by customers as shown in Figure 238 New Poll 3 Back Save Poll Assigned Answers Answer Title Delete Votes Count p Answer Title l Delete Votes Count OO Add New Answer Figure 238 Assigned Answers Page 8 In the Answer Title field specify the text of the answer to appear in your store for customers to select 23 Managing Customer Generated Content 238 9 To influence the poll results in advance you can add votes to the count in the Votes Count field which is O by default 10 Repeat steps 7 through 9 for each answer that you want
206. g terms and concepts Attribute A characteristic of a product For example an attribute of a digital camera could be resolution and the value of this attribute for a particular digital camera could be 10 megapixels Customers can filter a list of products by values of one or more attributes Attribute Group A logical grouping of attributes within an attribute set Introducing Magento Community Edition Attribute Set A collection of attributes customized to fit a certain type of product For example if you sell several different kinds of T shirts on your website you can create the T shirts attribute set which will include the simple attributes commonly shared by all of your T shirts This may include color size gender and brand Bundle product This product is composed of components that are presented in different ways and are made from existing products A good example of a bundle is a complete computer For this computer you can configure how much RAM or what kind of monitor is included with this computer in your store Category A user defined product classification A category can have any number of levels of subcategories Configurable product This product enables your customers to select the variant that they want by choosing options For example you can sell T shirts in two colors and three sizes You would have to create six variants as individual products each with its own SKU and then add these six to a
207. gento Admin Panel Navigate to System gt Configuration gt CUSTOMERS gt Customer Configuration In the Current Configuration Scope drop down field select the desired website Expand the CAPTCHA field set Configure the following settings Enable CAPTCHA on Frontend Enables the CAPTCHA for the website frontend Font Defines the font used for CAPTCHA displaying To add your own font put the font file in the same directory as your Magento instance and specify it in the contig xm stored in the app code core Mage Captcha etc tolder Forms Defines the forms where CAPTCHA is used The following options are available Create User Login Forgot Password Checkout as Guest and Register during Checkout Displaying Mode Defines preconditions for displaying CAPTCHA Available options Always or After number of attempts to login If the latter is selected the Number of Unsuccessful Attempts to Login text field is displayed Setting Number of Unsuccessful Attempts to Login to 0 zero is similar to setting Displaying Mode to Always The After number of attempts to login option does not cover the Forgot Password and Create User forms If the CAPTCHA functionality is enabled and these forms are selected in the Forms field the CAPTCHA is always displayed on these forms Note To track the number of unsuccessful attempts to log in the attempts to log in under one email address from one IP address are counted The maximum allowed
208. gn_ guide Magento Blog The Magento Blog contains fresh updates describing new Magento releases interesting showcases and events At http Awww magentocommerce com blog Magento on Twitter You can keep up with Magneto events and announcements by following Magento on Twitter At http twitter com magento Technical Documents and Magento Core API These provide developers with information on how to develop Magento CE At http docs magentocommerce com Here you can find information about all Magento classes and functions At http www magentocommerce com support magento core api Here you can find information and usage examples for calling Magento CE using an API This enables easier integration of Magento CE with existing systems 2 4 Appendix VAT ID Validation All editions of Magento include a value added tax VAT ID validation feature The feature is intended for B2B merchants from the European Union EU where VAT is charged if a merchant and a customer are in the same country and VAT is not charged if a merchant and a customer are in different countries within EU and both parties are EU registered business entities VAT identification number VAT ID Validation enables store administrators to create more than one default customer group which will be automatically assigned to each customer during account creation address creation or update and checkout according to the customer s VAT ID and the customer
209. h the setting Links can be purchased separately was set to Yes Nusantara Demo Email to a Friend wwe 2 Review s Add Your Review Availability In stock 3 98 Add to wishlist Add to Compare Quick Overview 3 songs demo CD Songs Innocentisland MPS sample 4 99 Good Byel MP3 sample 1 99 Queen of Hearts MP3 sample 1 99 Required Fields 3 9 ov sat cor Figure 114 Downloadable Product Links and Samples Bundle Product Bundle Items Tab An example of a bundled product is the Build Your Own Computer offering found in the demo store as shown in Figure 115 113 Setting Up Your Catalog My Computer Email ta a Friend Be the firstto review this product Availabilty In stack From 635 98 To 3 786 70 Price as configured 112 50 oF a Add to Wishlist Add to Compare Quick Overview test description Double click on above image to view full picture gt i Case Oty 1 Apevia Black Gruiser Case ATX Mid Tower Case Default 112 50 w CPU Qty 0 Choose a selection wt Hard Drive Qty 0 Western Digital 1TBHD 7200RPM 299 25 Western Digital 500GB HD 7200RPM 224 25 Seagate 500686 HD 5400RPM 224 25 Seagate 25068 HD 5400RPM 74 25 Ram Oty O Crucial 512M6 PC4200 DDR2 533MHz Memory 74 99 Crucial 166 PC4200 DDR2 533MHzMemory 113 24 Crucial 2GB PC4200 DDR2 533MHzMemory 149 99 Monitor C 1 x30 FlatPanel TFT
210. has been removed and a complete billing address can be saved in a Magento order when the PayPal Express Checkout payment method is used by a customer The billing address can be received from PayPal and can be edited by the customer If you want to receive the billing address of a customer from PayPal for customers using the PayPal Express Checkout payment method you need to take the following steps Payment 1 Enable the corresponding functionality is enabled in your PayPal merchant account Contact the PayPal technical support for details 2 In the Magento Admin Panel under System gt Configuration gt SALES gt PayPal gt Express Checkout Settings in the Require Customer s Billing Address field select Yes and save the configuration If you want to request customers billing address only for orders which contain downloadable and or virtual products only in the Require Customer s Billing Address field select For Virtual Quotes Only When customers choose to pay using PayPal Express Checkout they are redirected to PayPal Having logged in to PayPal and reviewed the payment information they are redirected back to the store to the Order Review page where they choose the shipping method edit the billing and shipping addresses and place the order Note If a billing address cannot be received from PayPal because of your configuration or due to any other reasons the billing address fields on the Order Review page are prepopulated wi
211. hat is specified in the Price of Special Price field on the product view page Manufacturer s Suggested Retail Price MSRP The retail price as suggested by the manufacturer The Actual Price is typically lower than MSRP Minimum Advertised Price a Quick View 206 MAP can be enabled and configured under System gt Configuration gt Sales gt Minimum Advertised Price See Figure 203 Minimum Advertised Price O Enable MAP No WEBSITE Apply MAP Default Value No m WEBSITE Warning Applying MAP by default will hide all product prices on the frontend Display Actual Price In Cart WEBSITE Default Popup Text Message Our price is lower than the manufacturers STORE VIEW Default What s This Text Message minimum advertised price As aresult we cannot show you the price in catalog or the product page lt br gt You have no obligation to purchase the product once you know the price You can simply remove the item from your cart Our price is lower than the manufacturers STORE VIEW minimum advertised price As a result we cannot show you the price in catalog or the product page lt br gt lt br gt You have no obligation to purchase the product once you know the price You can simply remove the item from your cart Figure 203 MAP global settings After MAP is enabled the configuration on the product level becomes available with the Apply MAP Display Actual Price and Manufac
212. he conditions are met The following defines that the price is discounted by 10 To define Catalog Price Rule Actions 1 Select the Actions option in the panel on the left to display the page shown in Figure Update prices using the following information Apply i By Percentage ofthe original prite mn xl Discount amount 10 00 Stop further rules No H processing Figure 190 Specifying Actions 2 The Apply drop down list enables you to define whether the discount that is specified in the Discount amount field is a percentage or a fixed amount of the price of this product It also enables you to define whether the discount amount is subtracted from the original price By or whether the Discount amount field actually defines the final price To For our example in the Apply field select By Percentage of the original price 3 In the Discount Amount field specify the value 10 00 This specification defines a final price that is a 10 reduction of the original price Note Mistakenly selecting the To Percentage of the original price option would give a final price that is equal to 10 of the original price meaning a 90 reduction Select the Save Rule button to create the rule 5 You must also select either the Save and Apply or the Apply Rules button to immediately apply this discount to the selected products Note As you add new rules the system must recalculate the prices and the priorities of the rules Generally syste
213. he variants themselves can actually be either custom options or simple products with their own SKUs and stock management the following logic is implemented if MAP is applied MAP is applied to the main price prices of the options bundle items and associated products which add or subtract from the main price are displayed normally If a product does not have a main price and its price is derived from the associated products prices such as in a grouped product the MAP settings of the associated products are applied Note that the MAP feature is not supported for bundled products with dynamic pricing Regarding other price settings the MAP application logic is the following If tier pricing is set the tier price is displayed according to the Display Actual Price setting s If a special price is set it is considered to be the actual price for MAP In the order management and customer management tools as well as in the reports sections of the Admin Panel only the actual price appears Setting Up MAP MAP functionality can be configured at both the global and product levels On the global level you can enable disable the functionality apply it to all products define how the actual price is displayed and edit the text of the MAP related messages and information tips on the frontend When MAP is enabled globally product level MAP settings become available For a product you can choose to apply MAP specify the
214. hoe_size max_resolution shoe_type megapixels 5 color memory gender processor E Design ram_size response_time room screensize shape shirt_size Figure 91 Edit Attribute Set Note System attributes are indicated by an icon with an orange dot The top left of the page shows the name of the attribute set that you are defining The center of the page shows a hierarchical tree representing groups of attributes An attribute group is a logical grouping of attributes within an attribute set See Creating a New Attribute Group page 94 for a description of how to define attribute groups The right side of the page shows a list of attributes defined in other attribute sets and not assigned to this attribute set 5 Assign attributes to this attribute set by dragging them from the Unassigned Attributes area on the right into a group in the tree in the Groups area Creating a New Attribute Group The center of the Edit Attribute Set page shows a hierarchical tree representing groups of attributes Attribute groups can be thought of as folders that contain attributes Each group corresponds to a different tab on the product page in the backend Magento CE comes with six attribute groups by default General Prices Meta Information Images Recurring Profiles Design and Gift Options They contain the various system attributes System attributes cannot be removed from an attribute set however
215. how AIP option in the Show X Per Page dropdown Product Listing Sort by Best Value STORE VIEW Use Flat Catalog Category No GLOBAL Use Flat Catalog Product Mo GLOBAL Allow Dynamic Media URLs in Yes s STORE VIEW Products and Categories E g imedia url path to image jpg skin url path to picture gif Dynamic directives parsing impacts catalog performance Figure 70 Catalog Frontend Configuration List Mode o Grid Only The products are displayed only in a grid structure o List Only The products are displayed only in a list o Grid Default List The products are displayed in a grid structure by default but your customers are able to switch to list o List Default Grid The products are displayed in a list structure by default but your customers are able to switch to grid Products per Page For each display type List and Grid specify the following o Specify in a comma separated list what the options are for the number of products to display on a product page These options will be listed in a drop down list on the frontend o Specify how many products are displayed on a page by default Allow All Products per Page Select whether the customers are allowed to display all products on a single category page Product Listing Sort By The products are sorted by default by the selected attribute The Best Value products are featured products as determined by the store administrato
216. iamond Product Search Diamond oO 165 My Bundle Computer Enabled Catalog mycomputer Computer Product Search oO 164 Gaming Bundle Default Enabled Catalog computer_fixed 4 999 95 Computer Product Search O 163 Computer Bundle Default Enabled Catalog computer Product Search F 162 Microsoft Simple Default Enabled Catalog micronmouse5000 59 99 Wireless Product Search Optical Mouse 5000 Fi 41h4 anitach Qimnla Nafanlt Enahlad Patalan lanidinnun Q 220 0Q Figure 180 Products Selected as Up Sell Products Tip By default the list shows only products that were already selected as up sells If there are none or you want to add other products click the Reset Filter button to display a list of all the products 4 3 Click the Save button Related Products Use the check box in each row or the products that you want to appear as up sells to this product Related Products are shown in the right column of your web store in a separate block The example in Figure 181 shows a mouse product that was added as a Related Product for a keyboard purchase RELATED PRODUCTS Check tems to add to the cart or select all hicrozott Wireless Optical Mouse 5000 59 99 Add to Wishlist Figure 181 Related Item To add Related Products to a product 1 In the Admin Panel select Catalog gt Manage Products to display a list of products 2 Click the Edit link that appears on the right side of the row of the product for
217. ibe to two types of customer alerts by email price change alerts and in stock alerts For each alert type choose whether to enable users to subscribe to it and select the email template to use Also select a sender display name which applies to both alert types For more information on how to configure email templates and email sender addresses see Customizing Transactional Emails page 181 Product Alerts O Allow Alert When Product Price No v STORE VIEW Changes Price Alert Email Template Product price alert Default Template from Loca w STORE VIEW Allow Alert When Product Comes No A WEBSITE Back in Stock Stock Alert Email Template Product stock alert Default Template from Loce w STORE VIEW Alert Email Sender General Contact STORE VIEW The price change alert creates a Sign up for price alert link in every product page Clicking this link subscribes your customers to this alert for that particular product so that they receive an email each time the product price is changed This includes adding or changing Special Prices in addition to the regular Price field Setting Up Your Catalog The in stock alert creates a link called Sign up to get notified when this product is back in stock in every Out of Stock product Clicking this link subscribes your customer to this alert so that they receive an email when the product status changes to In Stock For each product there is a tab listing all the customers subs
218. ibility of customer group change whether persistent or emulation during checkout It is recommended that you rename the 7ax VAT Number customer attribute to avoid confusion with the new VAT Number customer address attributte that is used for the VAT ID Validation functionality Disabling Automatic Customer Group Change When the VAT ID Validation functionality is enabled the group of a customer can only be changed manually in the Admin Panel no automatic changes of customer group can take place When the VAT ID Validation functionality is enabled the system will automatically permanently change a customer group in the following situations The VAT ID of the customer s default address or the whole default address changes The customer group change was emulated during the checkout for a registered customer who had no previously saved address or a customer who registered during the checkout The automatic customer group change can be disabled by selecting the Disable automatic group change check box on the customer s page under Customers gt Manage Customers gt Yocustomer gt Account Information See Figure 265 283 Appendix VAT ID Validation Customer Information Customer View Account Information Addresses amp Kristina Augilera lt Back Create Order Account Information Associate to Website Sasha s website e Created From Sasha s store view Group ome V Disable automatic group chang
219. ible 0 items selected Actions ne ID 4 Name Type Attrib Set Name SKU Price Qty Visibility Status Websites From From From To To for In USD O 168 shit2 Simple Default 1234shint2 10 00 20 Catalog Enabled Main E Product Search Website F 167 shirt 1 Simple Default 1234shirt 10 00 10 Catalog Enabled Main E Product Search Website Fj 166 HTC Touch Simple Cell Phones HTC Touch 750 00 999997 Catalog Enabled Main E Diamond Product Diamond Search Website g 165 My Bundle Computer mycomputer 999998 Catalog Enabled Main E Computer Product Search Website Fi 164 Gaming Bundle Default computer_fixed 4 999 95 999995 Catalog Enabled Main E Computer Product Search Website F 163 Computer Bundle Default computer 999995 Catalog Enabled Main E Product Search Website O 162 Microsoft Simple Default micronmouse5000 59 99 999999 Catalog Enabled Main E Wireless Product Search Website Optical Figure 178 Manage Products Page 2 Click the Edit link which appears on the right side of the row of the product for which you want to define Up sells The page shown in Figure 179 is displayed i lt Back Delete Save Save And Continue Edit ea ere shirt 2 Default Back EEE FREES Ee Default Values v General Create New Attribute Product Information x Ishi STORE VIEW General Name shirt 2 1 Prices SKU 1234shirt2 GLOBAL ae ene E E aE Weight 0 1000 GLOBAL Images cnaschenda
220. ick the Email Copy of Shipment option to automatically send an email to notify the customer that the products were shipped 15 Click the Submit Shipment button at the bottom of the page 16 Click the Back button to return to the orders page where you can create additional Orders if needed Clearing the Shopping Cart If at any time during the ordering process the customer decides not to move forward with the order you can clear the customer s shopping cart in either of two ways Click the Clear Shopping Cart button on the Create New Order page see Figure 220 eS Create New Order for Alex Marka in Sasha s store view Order Currency US Dollari Update Changes Product Price Qty Subtotal Discount Row Subtotal Action Shopping Cart 2 z 7 No ordered items Item Qty Price n e Book_gift cart 1 100 00 Group General Email alex example com DEn Wishlist 0 Al wismists z Figure 220 Clearing the Shopping Cart on the Create New Order Page Click the Clear Shopping Cart button on the Shopping Cart page Customers gt Manage Customers gt customer gt Manage Shopping Cart see Figure 221 2 Managing Orders and Customers Back Create Order Shopping Cart for Alex Marka in Sasha s store view Choose Store View Sasha s store view x 9 Shopping Cart Items Subtotal Discount Row Subtotal Action Price Qty Product Book Excl Tax 4 50 1 Excl Tax 4 50 0 00
221. iew This information is also shown when products are displayed in a list Design Tab The Design tab contains additional settings to control the appearance of this product s product page as shown in Figure 101 102 Setting Up Your Catalog Design Create New Attribute Custom Design Please Select v STORE VIEW Active From STORE VIEW Active To E STORE VIEW Custom Layout Update STORE VIEW Page Layout No layout updates v STORE VIEW Display product options in Block after Info Column v STORE VIEW Figure 101 Design Tab All of these settings are optional For more information about custom designs and page layouts see Design and Content page 173 1 Select a custom design from the Custom Design drop down list Magento CE comes with several custom designs already defined and you can modify these custom designs or create your own 2 For the Active From and Active To fields select the start and end dates for this custom design to be applied to this product If you do not select a start date the custom design is applied immediately If you do not select an end date the custom design is applied to this product until you manually deactivate it 3 The Custom Layout Update is essentially a static block with a few differences Rather than HTML the structure must be in XML format The Update will appear at the bottom of the page below the products whereas a static block will appear above the products
222. if the static block is set to display with products The Custom Layout Update will appear on the page only during the dates specified in the Active date range 4 For Page Layout select a layout from the drop down list No layout updates Uses the default settings that come with the Magento CE installation Empty Displays the category page without any objects except for the content products or static blocks only category name and view options number to display per page view as grid or list and sort be options 1 column Displays the contents category name and view options as well as the header footer search field and navigation bar Column on the left Adds the left column to the 1 column display which by default includes the currency selection and layered navigation Column on the right Adds the right column to the 1 column display which by default includes the shopping cart view wishlist compared products list polls and newsletter sign up 103 Setting Up Your Catalog 104 3 columns Displays both the left and the right columns 5 For Display Product Options In select a location for the product options to appear in the layout Recurring Profile Tab By default the Recurring Profile tab only appears for simple and virtual products However you can configure it to become available for other product types by changing the Apply To option of the Enable Recurring Profile attribute A recurring pr
223. igurable product ssdfsdf 1 00 C 4 Product 4 32asdf 165 00 Fi 3 Product 3 333 150 00 Fi 2 Product 2 22asd 120 00 Fi 1 Product 1 1111 5100 00 Figure 79 Creating a New Category Products 1 If needed use the filter fields at the top of the table to filter the list of products Click Reset Filter to clear all filter settings 2 Select the check box in the left column for each product that belongs in this category Remember that a product can be assigned to more than one category 3 In the Position column specify a whole number that indicates the order in which the product is listed when the products are sorted by Best Value The product with a Position value of 1 is listed first 2 is listed second and so on If more than one product has the same value for Position the product with the lowest that is closest to 1 ID number is listed first 4 Click Save Category to save your changes You may need to refresh the page to display the category in the tree Editing Categories To edit a Category Click on a category in the tree edit its information and click Save Category Layered Navigation What is Layered Navigation Of course you want the customers browsing through your site to find the products that interest them in the fastest possible way Otherwise your sales opportunities are lost When a customer is confronted with a category containing 60 products spread across multiple pages most customers simply leave the si
224. ilable by default In addition the backend provides a variety of options to customize the customer checkout process such as various payment and shipping methods that can be offered to your customers oo Introducing the Frontend A customer can make a one time purchase as a guest or can register and create an account Customers that have created an account can later track the status of their orders Tip Magento CE also provides multi shipping functionality that enables customers to ship items to more than one address at the same time This is a very useful feature for sending gifts for example This feature can be configured under System gt Configuration gt SALES gt Shipping Settings gt Options Tip Customers can also register and create an account by using the My Account or Log In link on the top right of each page Figure 53 shows an example of checking out as a guest by selecting the Checkout as Guest option in the step above Click Continue to see the next step in which the customer can enter the billing and identification information YOUR CHECKOUT PROGRESS EJ Billing Information First Name Last Name Company Email Address Address City State Province Please select region state or province vi Zip Postal Code Country United States v Telephone Fax Ship to this address Ship to different address Required Fiekis Figure 53 Checkout as Guest Click Continue to specify the
225. ing Customer Generated Content This chapter describes how to manage customer generated content such as ratings reviews tags and polls Managing Ratings and Reviews Rating and review functionality is provided by Magento CE to enable customers and web store owners to give their opinions feedback and comments about products Ratings and reviews appear in the frontend as shown in Figure 225 Coalesce Functioning On Impatience T Shirt LA A Ai 2 Review s Add Your Review Availability In stock Add to Wishlist Add to Compare Quick Overview e 6 1 0z 100 preshrunk heavyweight cotton Double click on above image to view full picture e Shoulder to shoulder taping a a sem i Figure 225 Ratings and Reviews Links on the Frontend The quantity of stars indicates the satisfaction rating You can click on the Review s link to display the actual reviews provided by customers or input your own Review as shown in Figure 226 Customer Reviews 1 term s Show per page Comfortabel Review by Essent Quality te wr Hr r Value thkk Price Wk This is the most comfortable shirt own will buy many of these shirts Posted on 6 29 07 1 tems Show per page Figure 226 Customer Reviews Frontend Interface 231 Managing Customer Generated Content LIL To add a review the customer clicks on the Add Your Review link on the product information page to open the Write Your Own R
226. ing New Orders This section describes how to create an order using the backend such as when an order is received on the phone Managing Orders and Customers To create a new order from the backend 1 Inthe Admin Panel select Sales gt Orders 2 Click the Create New Order button on the top right of the page to display the Create New Order page as shown in Figure 217 8 Create New Order Back Please select a customer Create New Customer Page 1 Reset Filter ofipages View 20 perpage Total 2 records found 1D Name Email Telephone ZIP Post Code Country State Province Signed Up From 2 Test Customer test testcompany com 123 123 1234 90123 United States California English 1 John Doe john doe example com English Figure 217 Create New Order Page 3 Select a customer If you have multiple websites stores or store views select the one to which this order applies The Create New Order for lt customer gt page opens as shown in Figure 218 Submit Order Create New Order for Test Customer in English Order Currency US Dollar v Items Ordered Add Products No ordered items Customer s Current Activities Update Changes Shopping Cart 0 2 No items Account Information Customer Group General 4 Email test testcompany com Wishlist 0 Shipping Address Select from existing customer addresses Test Customer Test Street 1 Test Street 2 Test City C
227. ing a New Shopping Cart Price Rule 1 In the Rule Name field and the Description field specify a unique name and a description for this Shopping Cart Price Rule In the Status field select Active In the Website field select the website to which this coupon applies To specify that this rule only applies when a coupon code is used select Specific Coupon in the Coupon drop down list and specify the code of the coupon that the customer must specify in the web store 5 To specify that each customer can use this coupon only once specify 1 in the Uses Per Customer field Tip If you want to create a limited offer the coupon can be limited to be used a certain number of times by selecting Specific Coupon in the Coupon drop down list and specifying that number the Uses per coupon field 6 In the From Date and To Date fields set a date range for the rule to take effect If you leave the date range empty then the rule is enabled as soon as it is created 196 Promotions Advanced Tip You can use the Priority field 1 is the highest priority when there are multiple rules It determines which rule takes effect first when more than one Cart Price Rule applies By default an announcement of this shopping cart price rule is included in your store s RSS feed To suppress this announcement select No in the Public in RSS Feed drop down list Defining the Cart Price Rule Conditions After you have set up the general information
228. ing the Web Store The Empty Rows drop down list enables you to select whether to include date period rows that have no data The Show Actual Values drop down list enables you to select whether to display actual Yes or projected No values Projected values are based on estimates of amounts to be paid When you are finished making filter selections click Show Report or Refresh in some reports to generate the report To export the report information shown on the screen select the CSV Comma Separated Values option or the Excel XML option from the Export to drop down list and click Export Refreshing Sales Report Statistics To reduce the performance impact of generating sales reports those that are available under Reports gt Sales Magento CE calculates and stores the required statistics for each report When you generate a report the report uses the stored statistics rather than recalculating the statistics each time you generate a report The sales report statistics need to be refreshed in order for the reports to use the most recent data Refreshing the sales report statistics is a manual process To refresh the Sales Report statistics 1 In the Admin Panel select Reports gt Refresh Statistics to open the Refresh Statistics page as shown in Figure 241 Refresh Statistics Select All Unselect All Select Visible Unselect Visible 0 items selected Actions Refresh Statistics forthe Last Day v M Submit Rep
229. iption WEBSITE Display Prices In Emails including FPT and FPT description WEBSITE Apply Discounts To FPT No WEBSITE Apply Tax To FPT No WEBSITE Include FPT In Subtotal No WEBSITE Figure 143 Fixed Product Taxes Options 4 Specify the following information 141 axes Enable FPT Click Yes Display Prices In Product Lists Specifies how prices display in products lists such as the category page Display Prices On Product View Page Specifies how prices display on the product page Display Prices In Sales Modules Specifies how prices appear in the Order Review section during checkout and in the Items Ordered section of a sales order Display Prices In Emails Specifies how prices display in the sales email confirmation that is sent when an order is placed Settings for Click one of the following e Including FPT only to display in the cart a price that includes a Display Prices In Product Lists fixed product tax but not a description of the tax Esp EGES N REGANE VIEN EARE Including FPT and FPT description to display in the cart a Display Prices In Sales Modules price that includes a fixed product tax and a description of the Display Prices In Emails ia Excluding FPT to display in the cart a price that does not include a fixed product tax Excluding FPT FPT description final price to display in the cart a price that does not include FPT but display the FPT amount and subtotal on separat
230. ired Sort Order Delete Option Size Drop down vy Yes v l1 Title Price Price Type SKU Sort Order xL 10 Fixed Y shitx 1 ror Add New Row Figure 127 Creating a Product Variation 10 In the Title field specify the name of this variation of the product such as Size XL 1 1 All the prices in these rows are relative to the price of this product as defined in the aA Prices page of the product wizard described on page 99 In the Price Type field select one of the following options Setting Up Your Catalog Fixed To specify that the price of this variation of the product differs from the price of the base product by a fixed monetary amount such as 1 Percentage To specify that the price of this variation of the product differs from the price of the base product by a percentage such as 10 1 2 In the Price field specify the difference between the price of this variation of the product and the price of the base product Specify a fixed amount or a percentage according to the value that you entered in the Price Type field You can also enter negative values 13 1In the SKU field specify the SKU for this variation of the product 14 If there is more than one variation then specify the order in which this option appears in the Sort Order field A value of 1 indicates that it appears first 15 Click the Save button This example product is shown in the web store as shown in Figure 128 Zolof The Rock And Roll
231. ist It also enables you to give customers special prices and discounts To create a new order from the backend 1 Select Sales gt Orders 2 Click the Create New Order button on the top right A full description of this procedure is provided in Managing Orders page 223 Managing Ratings and Reviews Rating and review functionality is provided by Magento CE to enable customers and web store owners to submit their opinions feedback and comments about products Product reviews and ratings can also be added using the backend To access the ratings and reviews management features select Catalog gt Reviews and Ratings For more information about ratings and reviews see Managing Customer Generated Content page 231 Generating Reports Magento CE provides a variety of reports that you can access at any time These reports are available under the Reports menu at the top of the Admin Panel Some of the most important reports are described in Reports page 239 6 6 Setting Up Your Catalog This chapter describes how to create a catalog for your Magento CE web store how to add products and how to define their attributes Overview The best workflow for creating your products is as follows Step 1 Setting Up Catalog Defaults ne Step 2 Creating Categories page 79 Step 4 Creating Attribute Sets page 92 Step 5 Creating a New Product page 96 ss Step 3 Creating Attributes page 89 s co
232. ively to download a script that verifies whether your server is compatible or not refer to the following web page http Awww magentocommerce com knowledge base entry how do i know if my server is compatible with magento Installing Magento CE Installing Magento CE After you have verified that your hosting environment meets Magento s system requirements as specified above you can download and then install Magento to your server The following is the workflow for downloading and installing Magento Step 1 Downloading Magento page 10 Step 2 Downloading Sample Data page 11 Step 3 Uploading to Your Server page 12 Granting File Access Permissions page 13 Setting Up the Web Store o Database page 13 Step 6 Installing Magento page 13 Step 1 Downloading Magento CE Magento CE can be downloaded free of charge from the Magento community site Tip You can download Magento whether you have registered on the community site or not We recommend registering so that you can later access the various valuable resources that the community has to offer such as forums a wiki groups and screencasts To download Magento Community Edition 1 Use your web browser to navigate to http www magentocommerce com download and log in or go to http www magentocommerce com and select Downloads gt Download Magento to display Download page as shown in Figure 3 10 Installing Magento CE Download Release
233. k Dash Every X Characters Defines the interval at which a dash will be inserted in all coupon codes If you do not want to use a dash leave this field blank Note Coupons whose codes differ only by dash character s are considered to be different coupons These settings can be overridden each time you need to generate a batch of coupons on the Shopping Cart Price Rule page Auto Generating Exporting and Managing Coupon Codes To generate and export a batch of coupon codes i Log in to the Magento Admin Panel Navigate to Promotions gt Shopping Cart Price Rules 2 3 Select an existing rule or create a new one 4 5 Select the Use Auto Generation check box Perform other rule configurations if In the Coupon field select Specific Coupon necessary Important Note Shopping cart price rules with auto generated coupon codes cannot be used in automated email reminders If the shopping cart price rule for which you set Specific Coupon in the Coupon field has been used in an automated email reminder rule it will be automatically unassigned after saving the rule Click Save and Continue Editing The Manage Coupon Codes tab appears See Figure 197 201 Promotions 7 On the Manage Coupon Codes tab specify the quantity of codes to be generated in the Coupon Qty field correct the code format settings if necessary and click Generate The generated coupon codes appear in the grid For each coupon you
234. l all tax rule related entities including tax rules tax rates product tax classes and customer tax classes are managed under Sales gt Tax tax classes are assigned to customer groups under Customers gt Customer Groups gt customer group Enabling and Configuring the VAT ID Validation Functionality To enable VAT ID and set default groups 1 IA 3 Log in to the Magento Admin Panel Navigate to System gt Configuration gt CUSTOMERS gt Customer Configuration In the Current Configuration Scope field in the upper left corner leave Default Config or select the desired store view Expand the Create New Account Options field set In the Enable Automatic Assignment to Customer Group field select Yes The following fields appear Tax Calculation Based On Choose whether VAT calculation will be based on customer s shipping or billing address If the customer does not have a shipping address that is the customer has only now registered and the system does not yet take into account the customer s shipping address the Default Tax Destination Calculation address will be used for tax calculation to be displayed to the customer Important Note If the Tax Calculation Based On is set to Shipping Address then Magento will use billing address for VAT calculation if a customer only buys downloadable and or virtual products Group for Valid VAT ID Domestic Choose a customer group which is
235. le system Note The total size of the CSV file must not exceed the maximum size for your environment typically 32 MB and must be saved with UTF 8 encoding Check your spreadsheet or database application documentation for information about saving a CSV file with UTF 8 encoding Click Check Data to validate the uploaded file If the uploaded file is valid a File is valid response appears Import your products or customers by clicking Import If your file contains errors Magento CE notifies you of the errors and enables you to skip the erroneous rows and importing the valid products or customers by clicking Import When the import is complete the Import was successfully done message appears Managing Orders The section Managing Orders page 62 introduces the procedures for handling the day to day order management tasks in your web store This section assumes that you are familiar with that information See Viewing the Orders in Your Web Store page 63 for a description of how to view and edit the Orders in your web store This section goes into more details about the order life cycle in Magento CE LAI Managing Orders and Customers 224 Orders Terminology This section describes some of the terms used for handling orders in Magento CE In addition to creating orders there are many features in the Magento CE backend that are part of the process of managing and fulfilling orders such as creating in
236. lling address for the item Shipping Origin Use if your store bases tax calculation on the shipping origin address 9 Set the Catalog Prices field to one of the values in the following table according to your local requirements Taxes Excluding Tax Catalog prices do not include tax Including Tax Catalog prices include tax 10 Set the Shipping Prices field to one of the values in the following table according to your local requirements Excluding Tax Shipping prices or those obtained from gateways do not include tax Including Tax Shipping prices or those obtained from gateways include tax 1 1 Set the Apply Customer Tax field to one of the values in the following table according to your local requirements Before Discount Customer tax is applied before the discount is calculated Note Magento advises you to not choose this option because it can lead to errors in calculating the total price After Discount Customer tax is applied after the discount is calculated Note Magento strongly recommends that all merchants set Apply Customer Tax to After Discount regardless of all other tax related settings This avoids issues with calculating the total product price Note In EE 1 13 1 or later regardless of any other settings on this page if you click Before Discount from the Apply Customer Tax list the system displays the following notification 0 Warning tax discount configuration might result in dif
237. loyed via FTP Click Continue to install the Magento Connect Manager When you see the message Magento has been downloaded successfully click Continue to proceed to the Installer wizard M Magento Community Installation Welcome to Magento s Installation Wizard Welcome Validation You are now ready to continue the installation process by downloading the most up to date copy of the Magento software Magento Connect Manager Magento Connect Channel Protocol Http ml EAE Use Custom Permissions No Download License Agreement Deployment Type Local Filesystem Localization i Start the download process Configuration Create Admin Account Youre All Set Having trouble installing Magento Check out our Installation Guide Figure 8 Magento Installation Wizard Welcome Page 10 In the Magento Connect Channel Protocol drop down list select the same protocol that you selected in step 5 11 1In the Custom Permissions field choose how the execute read and write permissions will be applied to the Magento downloaded folders and files on the server Installing Magento CE Yes The Magento CE administrator will be able to execute write and read files in the downloaded folders In the Folders and Files fields that appear specify values in the octal number system which will denote the permissions that the Magento administrator will have for folders and files respectively on the server No cust
238. luding FPT Treat FPT as a separate row in the cart and include the value of FPT in the appropriate tax calculations Including FPT FPT is included in the price of an item and no change to tax calculations is required Excluding FPT FPT description final price Item prices are shown without FPT FPT amount and with FPT included FPT is included in tax rule based calculations Note How you set the option to Display Prices in Sales Modules and Display Prices in Emails can affect customer confidence in their orders For example if you choose to display Order Review prices without showing FPT customers who buy items with associated FPT will see a total that includes the FPT tax amount but they will not see an itemized entry for this amount This might cause abandoned carts if your customers see an order total that does not match what they expect based on an itemized list of products in the order Step 1 Enable the FPT Tax To enable FPT 1 From the Admin panel select System gt Configuration 2 Inthe Configuration panel on the left under Sales select Tax 3 Click to expand the Fixed Product Taxes section The section displays the set of options shown in the following figure Enable FPT Yes WEBSITE Display Prices In Product Lists Including FPT and FPT description WEBSITE Display Prices On Product View Including FPT and FPT description WEBSITE Page Display Prices In Sales Modules including FPT and FPT descr
239. m v v From From v v v To To To In USD v F 45 Argus QC 2185 Quick Click 5MP Digital Simple Cameras QC 2185 37 49 120 Catalog Enabled Main Website Edit Camera Product Search Fi 46 Olympus Stylus 750 7 1MP Digital Camera Simple Cameras 750 161 94 932 Catalog Enabled Main Website Edit Product Search go 156 19 Widescreen Flat Panel LCD Monitor Simple Monitors V1 952TOQ TF 399 99 453 Catalog Enabled Main Website Edit Product Search F 147 22 Syncmaster LCD Monitor Simple Monitors 226bw 399 99 385 Catalog Enabled Main Website Edit Product Search l 152 24 Widescreen Flat Panel LCD Monitor Simple Monitors WWi2452T TF 699 99 504 Catalog Enabled Main Website Edit Product Search go 157 30 Flat Panel TFT LCD Cinema HD Simple Monitors M9179LL 699 99 563 Catalog Enabled Main Website Edit Monitor Product Search Fj 26 Acer Ferrari 3200 Notebook Computer PC Simple Computer LX FR206 001 1 799 99 11 Catalog Enabled Main Website Edit Product Search F 41 Akio Dresser Simple Furniture 384822 399 99 339 Catalog Enabled Main Website Edit Product Search Po o LOAA AFA X2 3800 2 0GHz OEM Simple CPU amdab4 mam A000 303 Catalog Enabled Main Website Edit om ee Product a maana Rearch Figure 125 Product List 2 Click the Edit link on the right side of the row of the relevant product Mass Changing Products Magento CE provides various features that enable changes to be made on multiple products or their properties On the produc
240. m rules are automatically processed and applied each night In order to apply a new rule immediately you must select one of the Apply buttons 194 Promotions Shopping Cart Price Rules Shopping Cart Price Rules as the name implies are applied when a customer reaches the shopping cart They can be applied either with or without the customer entering a coupon code and include features not found in traditional coupon tools This example defines a simple 10 discount coupon to be used for clogs when the shopping cart subtotal is over 100 The process of defining a Cart Price Rule consists of three stages Defining the Cart Price Rule Information page 195 defines general information about this rule Defining the Cart Price Rule Conditions page 197 defines the conditions that trigger the rule Defining the Cart Price Rule Actions page 197 defines the actions that are executed when the conditions of this rule are met Defining the Cart Price Rule Information To create a Cart Price Rule 1 Inthe Admin Panel select Promotions gt Cart Price Rules gt Add New Rule button to display the page shown in Figure 191 195 Promotions General Information Rule Name Description Status Active We Websites Main Website Test Site Customer Groups NOT LOGGED IN General Wholesale Retailer Coupon No Coupon w Uses per Customer From Date El To Date E Priority Fublic In RSS Feed Yes w Figure 191 Add
241. ment Order An order is a request for goods Order status The order status indicates where it is in the order cycle In Magento CE the system order status values are the following Pending Pending orders are brand new orders that have not been processed Typically these orders need to be invoiced and shipped Introducing Magento Community Edition On Hold The user cannot proceed to order processing if the order is in this state This is convenient if for example some data must be verified Pending PayPal possible for PayPal orders only Pending PayPal orders are brand new orders that have not been cleared by PayPal When using PayPal as a payment method customers are redirected to the PayPal website If they have not paid for the order orders will be marked as Pending PayPal It is not recommended to process these orders without referencing PayPal first to see if payment has been made Payment Review As long as an external payment gateway is verifying the payment information from a sales order the order is assigned the Payment Review status both in the payment system and in Magento CE Processing Processing means that the order has been either invoiced or shipped but not both Suspected Fraud possible for PayPal orders only The order transaction did not pass one or more of the PayPal fraud filters and the system receives the response from PayPal that the transaction is under review by Fraud Service
242. ment gateway the Validate on Each Transaction setting cannot be applied Thus the customer group cannot change during checkout The following diagram illustrates the flow of VAT ID validation and customer group change during one page checkout 261 Appendix VAT ID Validation Previously saved and validated address default or not default Yes New address including guest checkout registration during checkout orno address before No No address before or registration during Saas checkout AIl other situations Figure 264 One page checkout with VAT ID validation 282 Appendix VAT ID Validation VAT ID Validation Implementation Details Admin Experience The VAT Number Customer Address Attribute Customer VAT ID value is stored in the vat_id customer address attribute The default label of this attribute is VAT number Customer address attributes are managed under Customers gt Attributes gt Manage Customer Address Attributes The VAT number field is always present in all shipping and billing customer addresses in the backend It is not mandatory Displaying the field in the frontend is configured in the Show VAT Number in Frontend field under System gt Configuration gt CUSTOMERS gt Customer Configuration gt Create New Account Options Note For customers not from the EU countries consider storing the VAT number if any in the existing 7ax VAT Number customer attribute to avoid any poss
243. merous other shipping modules are provided at http www magentocommerce com magento connect and new ones are uploaded often More information on installing shipping extensions is provided in Extending Magento page 252 155 10 Payment Now that you have a method to calculate the cost of the shipping of your products you can configure the payment options that enable the collection of money Magento CE offers several payment options and many more can be added by downloading Magento payment module extensions provided at http Awww magentocommerce com magento connect More information on installing payment module extensions is provided in Extending Magento page 252 The following shows how to set up some of the most popular payment methods Setting up other options is just as simple PayPal PayPal is one of the most popular ways to accept online payments It enables you to accept credit cards and PayPal accounts This section shows how to set up the PayPal Website Payments Standard method Other PayPal payment methods are set up in a similar manner To set up payment by PayPal Website Payments Standard 1 Your first step is to create a PayPal merchant account Please check with PayPal www paypal com for detailed instructions 2 In the Magento CE backend select System gt Configuration gt PayPal to display the PayPal page as shown in Figure 156 157 Payment PayPal Save Config Merchant Acco
244. mfortable ergonomic keyboard on the market ve just made a great deal for this Microsoft Natural ergonomic keyboard And we know you re going to love it This newest addition to the world s best selling line of ergonomic keyboards features a natural wrist alignment that will make your day Just one touch allows you to perform a wealth of common butimportanttasks such as opening documents and replying to e mail The Microsoft Matural Model 4000 ergonomic keyboard also features an improved number pad with easy to reach symbols such left and right equal sign and back space placed just above the number pad Easy access to the Internet Multimedia keys Lockable F keys and much more see complete list of additional features below Don t you think it s time to go natural Microsoft s Natural Ergonomic Model 4000 Keyboard Available right here for the best price You may also be interested in the following product s A Logitech diNovo Computer Gaming Computer Edge Keyboard From 447 96 From 4 999 95 4239 99 To 4 477 92 To 6 348 95 Figure 177 Up Sell Products To add Up sells to a product 1 In the Admin Panel select Catalog gt Manage Products to display a list of products as shown in Figure 178 186 Promotions Manage Products Choose Store View All Store Views v Page 1 of 7pages View per page Total 122 records found R Notify Low Stock RSS Select All Unselect All Select Visible Unselect Vis
245. mount is used as the basis for calculating taxes Because of rounding this selection may affect the total amount of tax you charge on an order Unit Price Using this rounding rule Magento calculates the tax for each item and displays prices tax inclusive To calculate the tax total Magento rounds each of the item taxes individually and then adds them together Row Total Using this rounding rule Magento calculates the tax for each line To calculate the tax total Magento rounds each of the line item taxes and then adds them together Using this rounding rule Magento calculates the tax for each item and adds those tax values to calculate the total unrounded tax amount for the order Magento then applies the specified rounding mode to the total tax to determine the total tax for the order 8 Set the Tax Calculation Based On value to one of the areas of the invoice as shown in the following table according to your local requirements This setting will show your store s tax Store tax is tax that is calculated based on your store s address for display purposes Actual tax for an order is calculated by Magento when the customer enters their information and the system updates the tax based on the appropriate tax rates and rules that apply to that order Shipping Address Use this option if your store bases tax calculation on the address to which the item is shipped Billing Address Use this option if your store bases tax calculation on the bi
246. mpare My Computer From 635 97 To 3 786 68 Add to Wishlist Add to Compare Figure 263 Category Page Microsoft Wireless Optical Mouse 5000 559 99 Add to Wishlist Add to Compare Getting Help 18 Getting Help Magento CE offers a variety of options and possibilities but also has a learning curve Magento provides several resources for getting help discovering Magento CE and using it daily to attain your eCommerce objectives You can start with the Search field at the top of the community site found at http www magentocommerce com which provides results from the Magento forum knowledge base wiki groups and other resources If you are unable to find answers to your questions try posting your question in the Magento Answers site and the Magento forums where thousands of participants help each other with Magento Issues To access Magento Answers Go to http Awww magentocommerce com answers and log in or using the user name and password that you created before downloading Magento CE If you do not have a Magento user name you can register for one from this page Follow the onscreen directions to ask your question To access Magento forums Go to http Awww magentocommerce com boards and log in using the user name and password that you created before downloading Magento CE Choose a forum that best matches your question If you found the answer yourself and were unable to find it elsewhere pleas
247. mple in some jurisdictions wholesale transactions are not taxed but retail transactions are To define a customer tax class 1 Select Sales gt Tax gt Customer Tax Classes to display a list of the previously defined customer tax classes 2 Click the Add New button to display the New Class page as shown in Figure 138 135 1axes New Class Back Save Class Customer Tax Class Information Class Name Wholesale Tax Figure 138 New Customer Tax Class Page 3 Inthe Class Name field specify a name for this tax class Note You can link a customer tax class to a customer group by editing the customer group You can then assign this customer group when creating or editing a customer 4 Click the Save Class button Tax Zones and Rates Tax rates are generally applicable to transactions that take place in specific geographical areas The Tax Zones and Rates feature enables you to specify the tax rate for each geographical area for which you collect and remit taxes Because you give each tax zone and rate specification a unique identifier you can have multiple tax rates for a given geographic area for example for places that do not tax food or medicine but tax other products Note Store tax is used for initial display purposes on orders Store tax is calculated based on the store s address Actual customer tax on an order is calculated after a customer enters their information and then Magento calculates the
248. mputer html M65 categor 27 German 828 Main Website System product 165 my computer html catalog product Edit Main Store Niew lid 165 German Figure 255 URL Redirect Management Page The preceding figure shows the following sample URL rewrites that are created for the Magento sample data The following table discusses the meanings of the columns on this page A unique identifier Magento assigns to the URL rewrite Store View Name of the store with which the URL rewrite is associated Typically displays either System system or Magento default URL rewrites or Custom URL rewrites you configure ID Path The system or actual URI of the product or category Request Path The unique part of the URI for that redirect The request path can be any URL encoded string For example great valentines gift html Target Path The URI that identifies the product category CMS page and so on The target path you enter must be valid otherwise the redirect fails with a 404 Not Found Options Displays one of the following e Rif you chose a temporary HTTP 302 redirect e RP if you chose a permanent HTTP 301 redirect e Nothing if you chose to not redirect Action Click Edit in this column to edit or delete the redirect You can also click the row itself 263 Indexing Creating New URL Rewrites This section discusses how to create new custom product or category URL redirects 1 Complete the tasks discussed in
249. ms selected Actions Reindex Data Submit Index Description Mode Status Update Required Updated At Action E Product Attributes Index product attributes for layered navigation building Update on Save GT ED Never Reindex Data Product Prices Index product prices Update on Save E a Reindex Data Index product and categories URL rewrites Update on Save gt Reindex Data i CED aa F Category Products Indexed category products association Update on Save ll Reindex Data E Catalog Search Index Rebuild Catalog product fulltext search index Update on Save lap Reindex Data Stock Status Index Product Stock Status Update on Save CHED Reindex Data Tag Aggregation Data Rebuild Tag aggregation data Update on Save Gz a Reindex Data Figure 254 Index Management Page with Flat Data Indexing Enabled 259 Indexing Understanding the Columns on the Index Management Page The following table describes the columns on the Index Management page Index Name of the indexer Description Description of the indexer In the preceding figures most of the indicated indexers are set to Update on Save which means a reindex is required when a change is saved in the Admin Panel To change this option see How to Reindex Manually below Status Displays one of the following e _Reindex Required if a change has been made that requires reindexing If a check box and Reindex Required link appears in that row you can manually reindex as
250. munity Edition Backend The Back Office The backend is the password protected view of the back office features that enable a web store administrator to setup the products and purchasing options and to manage orders and all other store functionalities You can navigate the Admin Panel using the menu on the top of the page Magento top menu A view of the backend is shown in Figure 2 Magento Admin Panel Logged in as admin Sunday June 12 2011 Dashboard Sales Catalog Mobile Customers Promotions Newsletter CMS Blog Dealer Inquiries Customerreview Reports System Get help for this page Latest Message Knowledge Base v 1 1 by aheadWorks has been released Read details You have 22 minor and 2 notice unread message s Go to messages inbox Dashboard Choose Store View All Store Views w Lifetime Sales 0 00 Average Orders 0 00 Last 5 Orders Customer items Grand Total Orders Amounts Select Range Last 24 Hours No Data Found No records found Last 5 Search Terms Search Term Results Number of Uses No records found Top 5 Search Terms Search Term Results Number of Uses Revenue Tax Shipping Quantity 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 No records found Bestsellers Most Viewed Products New Customers Customers Product Name Price Quantity Ordered No records found Figure 2 Magento CE Backend Magento CE Concepts To use Magento CE effectively you should be familiar with the followin
251. n Hoodie Impatience T Shirt Cat T shirt Price Rules Reet rene weet O Category Management POPULAR TAGS 2 2 2 s f woe O Compare Products Camera Hohoho SEXY Test 30 00 15 00 13 50 apple bones COO cool t shirt orap z n tos Vote ess Add to Cart Add to Cart As low as 9 50 good green hip laptop modern nice SES A Ci notebook phone red tight young Add to Wishlist Add to Wishlist anderson Add to Compare Add to Compare Add to Wishlist View All Tags Add to Compare Figure 30 Filter Indication 40 Introducing the Frontend To clear the filter and thus redisplay all the products in the currently selected category click the Clear icon next to the filter or click the Clear All Items option Note The third product is shown because it contains two variants inside a green and a red version Popular Tags Another option that Magento CE provides to help customers find the right product is called Popular Tags Popular Tags provide another property that can be assigned to products that customers can select in order to view the products to which this tag has been assigned see Figure 31 POPULAR TAGS Camera Hohoho EXY Test bones cool cool tshirt crap notebook phone red tight young View All Tags Figure 31 Popular Tags Popular tags can be assigned by customers in the product page see Figure 32 and can be approved and edited from the backend if required Product Tags Other people marked this prod
252. n 5 backups 246 rolling back 246 Banners 46 Bestsellers Dashboard 62 Bundle Products 113 C CAPTCHA 254 Cart My Cart 51 52 Cart Price Rule Actions Defining 197 Cart Price Rule Conditions Defining 197 Cart Price Rule Information Defining 195 Catalog Defaults 70 Price Rules 190 Rules 190 Shopping Cart Price Rules 195 Catalog Price Rule Defining 192 Catalog Price Rule Actions Defining 194 Categories 107 Creating 79 Definition 38 Displaying 78 Editing 84 Managing 77 Checkout 51 53 Checks 170 CMS 178 CMS Pages 178 Comments History 65 Community Polls 57 Managing 236 Comparing Products 42 compound taxes 147 Configurable Product 117 Configuration Basic 23 Cross sell 108 Custom Group 110 Custom Options 110 Product Reviews 109 Product Tags 109 Product Type Dependent 111 Related Products 108 Super Product Attributes 119 287 Appendix VAT ID Validation Up sell 108 Websites 107 Contacting Information 1 Contacts 30 Conventions 1 cookie restriction mode 33 cookies used in Magento 35 coupon codes auto generating 200 tracking 202 Credit Cards 167 Credit Memo 224 Email 229 Credit Memos 66 Cross sell Products 48 185 189 CSV file format 124 222 Customer Adding 220 Editing 219 Email Notifications 65 Managing 219 New 220 New in Dashboard 62 Online 221 Report 222 Tax Class 135 Top in Dashboard 62 Viewing 219 Customer Emails 56 cus
253. n be a short sample of a music file a few pages of an eBook or a trial version of a software application You can provide as many samples as you require by clicking the Add New Row button and filling out the fields You can add files using either of two methods o Selecting the File option clicking the Browse button and then clicking the Upload Files button This will upload the file from your local computer to the server o Selecting the URL option specifying the link to a file that is already on a server in a different location and clicking the Upload Files button Samples that you put in the Samples section appear in the store as shown in Figure 113 111 Setting Up Your Catalog 112 Ebook Pivot Table in Excel Email ta a Friend Be the firstto review this product PHF Availability In stack 10 00 Special Price 5 99 Sample Pivot Table Sample PDF Oty Mte OR Add to vvishlist Add to Compare T eee ee RR RR RR OR OR ORR E EEEE EEE AE E EEE E E a ek RR RRR Quick Overview Double click on above image to view full picture Excel Ehook Pivot Tables gt Product Description t Tables in Excel p Figure 113 Downloadable Product Sample The Links section contains the actual products that can be purchased along with possible samples for them o The Links can be purchased separately option controls whether each of the downloadable products can be purchased
254. n be moved from the wishlist to the shopping cart with one click Customers can also share the Wishlist their friends right from the Wishlist section of the My Account page The Wishlist feature is available for registered customers only My Cart To add a product to your shopping cart click on the Add to Cart button for that product as shown in Figure 49 Shirts MY CART There is 1 item in your cart Coalesce Functioning On Impatience T Shirt 4 x 15 00 Details All our shirts are made with 100 cotton COMPARE PRODUCTS 4 Item s Show 9 w per page You have no items to compare View as Grid List Sort by Best Value T E RECENTLY COMPARED PRODUCTS The Get Up Kids Band Camp Pullover Hoodie RECENTLY VIEWED PRODUCTS Coalesce Ink Eater Krylon The Only Children Functioning On Bombear Destroyed Paisley T Shirt Coalesce Functioning On impatience Impatience T Shirt Tee Tshirt 100 00 ree kweet CN Clogs Beach Garden Clog As low as 70 00 2 1 The Get Up Kids Band Camp Pullover 15 00 22 00 TN Hoodie te inw ae yy Add to Wishlist As tow a3 13 00 Add to Compare BlackBerry 8100 Pearl Add to Wishlist Gaming Computer Add to Compare Add to Wishlist Figure 49 Add to Cart Button The My Cart area shown in Figure 49 displays a brief list of the products in your Cart Subtotal 15 00 lt a Checkout Recently added item s The Only Children Paisle
255. n does not cover the Forgot Password form If the CAPTCHA functionality is enabled and set to be displayed on this form then it is always displayed on the form Note To track the number of unsuccessful login attempts the attempts to log in under one email address from one IP address are counted The maximum allowed number of attempts to log in from one IP address is 1 000 This limitation is applied only when the CAPTCHA functionality is enabled CAPTCHA Timeout minutes Defines how long the displayed CAPTCHA is valid After the timeout the user needs to reload the page Number of Symbols Defines the number of symbols that are used for creating CAPTCHA Maximum allowed value is 8 You can also specify a range for example 5 8 each generated CAPTCHA can contain different number of symbols Symbols Used in CAPTCHA Defines what symbols are used in CAPTCHA Only letters a z and A Z and numbers 0 9 are allowed The default set of symbols suggested in the field excludes similar looking symbols like i I 1 Displaying these symbols in CAPTCHA decreases the chances that a user will recognize CAPTCHA correctly e Case Sensitive Defines whether letters in CAPTCHA are case sensitive 4 To save the settings click Save Config 255 Keeping Your Store Healthy Enabling and Configuring CAPTCHA for the Frontend To enable and configure CAPTCHA displaying in the frontend 1 2 J 4 Log in to the Ma
256. n the product listing 91 Setting Up Your Catalog 19 For Used for Sorting in Product Listing select Yes to enable the product list to be sorted by values of this attribute 20 Click Manage Label Options at the top left of the page to display the Manage Label Options page as shown in Figure 87 Attribute Information New Product Attribute Back Save Attritute Save And Continue Edit Properties ti Manage Label Options g yeu do not specify an option value for store then the default value will be used Admin Engish French German Admin Engish French German Position is Defautt Figure 87 Manage Label Options Page 21 In the Mange Titles box specify a display name for this attribute for each store view If you specify a value only in the Admin field that value will be used in all cases 22 For attributes with an input type of Dropdown or Multiple Select you can enter values that can be specified for the attribute To add a value click the Add Options button You can specify a different label for the value for each store view and set the default value by selecting the Is Default option button For the Dropdown input type you can select the Is Default option button only for one attribute value For the Multiple Select input type you can select multiple values by selecting the Is Default check box next to the desired attribute values Attribute Information New Product Attribute Properties amp Manage La
257. nd and backend with some initial sample data Even though you will later delete these products it may help orient you while getting started This step is recommended but not mandatory To download Sample Data for your Magento web store 1 Navigate to http www magentocommerce com download and log in or go to http Awww magentocommerce com and select Downloads gt Download Magento from the menu to open the Download page as shown in Figure 4 11 Installing Magento CE 2 J Download Release Archives How to Get Started Full Release This is the latest stable release of the Magento Community Edition Learn More ver 1 5 1 0 Added April 26 2011 Select your format v DOWNLOAD Magento 9 Try our new hosted solution MCE OAE AUE Preview Release This is the latest preview release of the Magento Community Edition Learn More ver 1 6 0 0 alpha1 Added May 26 2011 Select your format v DOWNLOAD Magento 9 Try our new hosted solution MCE OAE AUE Downloader The downloader will install the latest Magento wersion ver 1 5 0 0 Added February 8 2010 Select your format v DOWNLOAD Magento 9 Try our new hosted solution MiC EOE E AE Sample Data Must be installed prior to the basic Magento Installation Learn More ver 1 2 0 Added December 29 2008 Select your format v DOWNLOAD D Figure 4 Magento Download Page Magento Sample Data Note This page will appear slightly differently on the web after
258. nd email of the sender of the email to be sent to your customers 6 In the Template Content field use the WYSIWIG editor to compose the body of the email Note that this field is pre filled with tags showing an unsubscribe link in the email We recommend that you do not remove this link so that all emails that are sent enable your customers to unsubscribe from the newsletter 7 Click Preview Template to display the content with the formatting as it will be viewed by your subscribers 8 After you have finished editing the template click the Save Template button to save it 2i Promotions Tip After you have saved a template a Save As button appears when you edit this template The Save As button enables you to duplicate the template so that you can make changes and save the template as a new template without affecting the original template This can save you time because you will not need to re enter all the template information in order to create a new template If you already have an existing template that is similar to the new template simply edit the fields that you require and then use the Save As button to create a new template Newsletter Queues A newsletter that has many recipients must be sent in stages The process of sending the newsletter is managed by a queue After you start this queue Magento CE sends the emails in packs To send your newsletter using a queue 1 In the Admin Panel select Newsletter gt
259. nd or Rollback resources leave the corresponding check box cleared If you need to grant access to the Rollback resources you must grant access to Backup resources as well Creating a Backup from the Magento Connect Manager In the Magento Connect Manager MCM you can choose to create a backup before installing an extension or upgrading Magento To create a backup before installing an extension from MCM 1 Navigate to System gt Magento Connect gt Magento Connect Manager 2 Select the Create Backup check box and select the backup type See Figure 246 248 Keeping Your Store Healthy 3 Proceed with installing extension or updating Magento The backup will be created automatically and will be listed in the grid under System gt Tools gt Backups in the Magento Admin Panel Magento MANAGER Extensions Settings Return to Admin Log Out Warning Your Magento folder does not have sufficient write penmissions lf you wish to proceed downloading Magento packages online please set all Magento folders to have writable permission for the web server user example apache or set up FTP Connection on the Magento Connect Manager Settings tab Put store on the maintenance mode while installing upgrading backup creating Create Backup Database only Install Hew Extensions Search for modules via Magento Connect Faste extension key to install Direct package file upload E Download or build package file
260. nes of products and may have different customer bases Advanced Magento CE Customization Options The options described in this user guide can get you up and running with an extremely feature rich and attractive interface without the need for technical expertise If you would like to take your web store one step further Magento CE provides a variety of advanced options for customizing the look and feel and functionality of your site These include e Custom Themes and Skins Extension Modules and more See the Magento website at http www magentocommerce com for a description of these options as well as for access to resources that can assist you with their implementation 2 Installing Magento CE This chapter describes Magento CE system requirements and how to download and install it system Requirements The following provides a short list of the server requirements for running Magento CE properly You can also view these specifications at http www magentocommerce com system requirements Supported Operating Systems Linux server x86 x86 64 Supported Web Servers Apache 1 3 x Apache 2 x Apache 2 2 x PHP Compatibility 5 2 13 with Safe mode off and memory limit no less than 256 MB preferably 512 MB MySQL 4 1 20 and InnoDB storage engine If you are unsure whether your hosting company supports these specifications please check with them or your company s system administrator Alternat
261. ng cycle Maximum Billing Cycles The number of billing cycles for payment period Trial Period Trial Billing Period Unit Not Selected v Trial Billing Frequency Maximum Trial Billing Cycles Trial Billing Amount Initial Fees Initial Fee Initial non recurring payment amount due immediately upon profile creation Allow Initial Fee Failure No v Whether to suspend the payment profile if the initial fee fails or add it to the outstanding balance Figure 102 Recurring Profile Tab Most of the options on this tab are self explanatory For additional details on how recurring profiles work see the http Awww magentocommerce com knowledge base entry working with recurring profiles article in the Magento Knowledge Base Note Creating a recurring profile for a product does not create subsequent orders in the Magento Admin Panel Gift Options Tab The Gift Options tab contains one option The Allow Gift Message option determines whether customers are able to add a gift message to this particular product during checkout The default value of this setting is controlled by a Sales configuration setting System gt Configuration gt Sales gt Gift Options To change this option clear the Use Config Settings check box 105 Setting Up Your Catalog 106 Inventory Tab The Inventory tab enables you to control various aspects of inventory management for this product Many of
262. ng its behavior to your requirements entering products managing orders invoices and shipments and achieving the best turnover and profits from your web store Support and Contact Information We at Magento are dedicated to providing our customers with the best possible service We would love to hear from you For feedback on this book and all other inquiries please use our contact form at http www magentocommerce com company contact us Conventions Used in this Guide The following style conventions are used in this document Note This is a note Tip This is a tip providing useful suggestions and information 1 Introducing Magento Community Edition This chapter introduces Magento Community Edition CE its basic components and the workflow for using it What is Magento CE Magento CE is a feature rich eCommerce platform built on open source technology that provides online merchants with unprecedented flexibility and control over the look content and functionality of their eCommerce store Magento CE s intuitive administration interface features powerful marketing search engine optimization and catalog management tools to give merchants the power to create sites that are tailored to their unique business needs Designed to be completely scalable Magento CE offers companies a stable secure customizable eCommerce solution Magento CE License Magento CE is licensed under the Open Software License OSL
263. ng to love it This newest addition to the world s best selling line of ergonomic keyboards features a natural wrist alignment that will make your day Just one touch allows you to perform a wealth of common butimportanttasks such as opening documents and replying to e mail The Microsoft Matural Model 4000 ergonomic keyboard also features an improved number pad with easy to reach symbols such left and right equal sign and back space placed just above the number pad Easy access to the Internet Multimedia keys Lockable F keys and much more see complete list of additional features below Don t you think it s time to go natural Microsoft s Natural Ergonomic Model 4000 Keyboard Available right here for the best price You may also be interested in the following product s A Logitech diNovo Computer Gaming Computer Edge Keyboard From 447 98 From 4 999 95 239 99 To 4 477 92 To 6 348 95 Figure 42 Up Sell Products 4 Introducing the Frontend Related Products Related products are meant to be purchased n addition to the item the customer is viewing Related products are shown in the right column of your web store in a separate block The example in Figure 43 shows various mobile phones promoted as related products RELATED PRODUCTS Check items to add to the cart or select all F BlackBerry 8100 Pearl 349 99 Add to Wishlist Sony Ericsson W810i 399 99 Add to Wishlist ATAI 6525 PDA 199 99 Add t
264. ning part of the order is sent when available this may include more than two shipments Split orders in which ordered items are sent in more than one shipment perhaps to different addresses and you want to collect a payment for each shipment Drop shipments which are shipments from other vendors for which you accept the payment Using the order payment action does not influence the checkout process for store customers Configuring the Payment Action for the PayPal Express Checkout To change the payment action settings for the PayPal Express Checkout payment method 1 In the Magento Admin Panel select System gt Configuration gt SALES gt PayPal Configuration can be done either on the global or website level so in the Current Configuration Scope drop down list located in the upper left part of the page leave Default Config or select the desired website 2 In the Express Checkout Settings field set in the Payment Action drop down menu select Order 3 Configure these additional settings which correspond to settings in your PayPal merchant account 165 Payment Authorization Honor Period days Defines how long the primary authorization stays valid The value should be equal to the corresponding value in your PayPal merchant account The default value in your PayPal merchant account is 3 To increase this number you need to contact PayPal The authorization becomes invalid at 11 49 p m U S Pacific Time
265. nload You can specify server port ex localhost 3307 License Agreement i RS if you are not using default UNIX socket you can specify no it here instead of host ex var run mysqgid mysqld sock Configuration Create Admin Account User Name User Password You re All Set root Tables Prefix Having trouble installing Magento Check out our Installation Guide Optional Leave blank for no prefix Base URL http 4 92 168 1 101 magento Admin Path admin Additional path added after Base URL to access your Administrative Panel e g admin backend control etc V Enable Charts Enable this option if you want the charts to be displayed on Dashboard Skip Base URL Validation Before the Next Step Check this box only if it is not possible to automatically validate the Base URL Use Web Server Apache Rewrites You could enable this option to use web server rewrites functionality for improved search engines optimization Please make sure that mod_rewrite is enabled in Apache configuration Use Secure URLs SSL Enable this option only if you have SSL available Session Storage Options Save Session Data In File System Required Fields Figure 11 Magento Installation Wizard Configuration Page The first two options make purchasing and administration more secure Usually you can leave the other options as they are We strongly recommend setting the following opti
266. not to the regular price Newsletters Magento CE provides a Newsletter feature which enables store administrators to send newsletters to customers who have registered to receive them 215 Promotions 216 The first step in creating newsletters is to configure the newsletter settings for your site To configure newsletter settings on your site 1 In the Admin Panel select System gt Configuration to display the configuration page 2 In the CUSTOMERS area in the left navigation panel select the Newsletter option and expand the Subscription Options area to display the page shown in Figure 209 Subscription Options Success Email Template Newsletter subscription success Default Temp w STORE VIEW Unsubscription Email Sender Customer Support STORE VIEW Unsubscription Email Template Newsletter unsubscription success Default Te w STORE VIEW Success Email Sender General Contact STORE VIEW Confirmation Email Template Newsletter subscription confirmation Default T STORE VIEW Need to Confirm No w STORE VIEW Confirmation Email Sender Customer Support STORE VIEW Allow Guest Subscription Yes STORE VIEW Figure 209 Newsletter Subscription Options 3 Inthe Need to Confirm field select Yes to specify that each customer that registers for a newsletter will receive an email asking them to confirm their registration This technique is called double opt in meaning that customers confirm that they want to
267. nt page enables you to perform actions on the various indexes that Magento maintains To access the Index Management page click System gt Index Management Index Management Select All Unselect All Select Visible Unselect Visible 0 items selected Actions ReindexData E index Description Mode Status Update Required Updated At Action E Product Attributes Index product attributes for layered navigation building Update on Save Never Reindex Data Product Prices Index product prices Update on Save Apr 16 2013 3 10 16 PM Reindex Data Catalog URL Rewrites Index product and categories URL rewrites Update on Save Never Reindex Data Category Products Indexed category products association Update on Save Never Reindex Data Catalog Search Index Rebuild Catalog product fulltext search index Update on Save Never Reindex Data E Stock Status Index Product Stock Status Update on Save Never Reindex Data Tag Aggregation Data Rebuild Tag aggregation data Update on Save Never Reindex Data Figure 253 Index Management Page The page is presented differently If you enabled flat catalog product options For more information see Using Flat Catalog and Product Reindexing page 267 The following figure shows an example of the Index Management page with the flat catalog product options enabled Index Management Select All Unselect All Select Visible Unselect Visible 0 ite
268. ntered in this area This means that if the configurable product s price is 20 and the price for the Medium option is Percentage and 10 then this variation of the product costs 22 The price of the associated products is not used for calculation Page 1 of1 pages View 20 v perpage Total 3 records found ID Name Attrib Set Name SKU Price Inventory Shirt Size Action Yes coal From v v To 35 Coalesce Shirts T coal_sm 15 00 In Stock Small Edit Functioning On Impatience T Shirt 117 Coalesce Shirts T coal_md 15 00 In Stock Medium Edit Functioning On Impatience T Shirt 118 Coalesce Shirts T coal_lrg 15 00 In Stock Large Edit Functioning On Impatience T Shirt Figure 124 Selecting Associated Products Completing the Product Wizard Click the Save or Save and Continue Editing button in the top right corner of the page If you choose the latter after saving the product you are redirected back to its page To edit an existing product 1 From the Catalog menu select the Manage Products option to display a list of products as shown in Figure 125 120 Setting Up Your Catalog Choose Store View All Store Views Ni Page 1 of pages View 20 v perpage Total121 records found Notify Low Stock RSS Select All Unselect All Select Visible Unselect Visible 0 items selected Actions v ID Hame RE p Type Attrib Set Name SKU Price Qty Visibility Status Websites Action Any v Fro
269. o Store Default welcome msg M Magento LOUARNIG English v Furniture Electronics Apparel Figure 19 Page Header Section Note You will need to upload the image file using an FTP client to the skin frontend default default images directory or to your own skin folder in your Magento CE installation In the Logo Image Alt field specify the alternative text to be displayed when your customers hover their mouse cursors over the logo image in your web store In the Welcome Text field specify the welcome message to be displayed on the top right of your web store for customers that are not logged in as shown in Figure 19 Click Save Config to save your changes Basic Configuration Footer Field Set The options in the Footer field set define what is displayed at the bottom of each web page in your store To define the footer of your web store pages 1 Select the Footer option to expand the page to display the footer options as shown in Figure 20 Copyright amp copy 2008 Magento Demo Store All Rights STORE VIEW Reserved Miscellaneous HTML STORE VIEW This will be displayed just before body closing tag Figure 20 Footer Field Set In the Copyright field specify your web store s copyright information In the Miscellaneous HTML field specify the custom HTML code to be added to the end of the page code that is generated by Magento CE This area is usually used for adding tracking scripts that track your cus
270. o Wishlist Figure 43 Related Products Cross sell Products Cross sell products appear next to the shopping cart When a customer navigates to the shopping cart page whether automatically after adding a product or otherwise these products are displayed as cross sells to the items already in the shopping cart They are similar to impulse buys like magazines and candy at the cash registers in grocery stores See Figure 44 Based on your selection you may be interested in the following items 190 Widescreen Flat Panel LCD Monitor 399 99 Add to Cart Add to Wishlist Add to Compare Figure 44 Cross Sell Item 48 Introducing the Frontend Product Pages The backend enables you to define the type of information and functionality that is provided in a product s page Figure 45 shows a typical product page Home Apparel The Get Up Kids Band Camp Pullover Hoodie amp MY CART The Get Up Kids Band Camp Pullover Hoodie You have no items in your shopping www 2Review s Add Your Review a Availability In stock E COMPARE PRODUCTS iii You have no items to compare Qty noeg OR Add to Wishlist Add to Compare RECENTLY VIEWED i PRODUCTS Quick Overview Printed on American Apparel Classic style 5495 California BlackBerry 8100 Pearl Fleece Pull Over Hoodies Gaming Computer Computer Microsoft Wireless Optical Mouse 5000 _ L Logitech diNovo Edge Keyboard MORE
271. o image O O O 0 O O O O Figure 99 Images Tab with Images Uploaded 4 Select the appropriate options for each of the images as follows Label Alternate text for the image tag Sort Order The order in which the images are displayed in the Slideshow and MORE VIEWS gallery Thumbnail Used in shopping cart and related items oe Small Image Used in the Category listing wishlist and so on oe Base Image Large product image zoomed in oe Exclude Excludes the image from the Slideshow and MORE VIEWS gallery oe Remove Deletes the image from the collection if the Remove check box is selected the image will be removed after you save the product Description Tab Click Description on the left to open the Description tab which enables you to create descriptions for the product see Figure 100 101 Setting Up Your Catalog Description Create New Attribute Description STORE VIEW WYSIWYG Editor short Description STORE VIEW Figure 100 Description Tab Both of the fields on this tab are mandatory For both fields you can use the WYSIWIG editor to format your descriptions Description The information that you enter in the Description field is shown in the product s page under the title Product Description Short Description The information that you enter in the Short Description field appears on the product s page under the title Quick Overv
272. of 42 pages View 20 per page Total 832 records found ID 4 Store View Type ID Path Request Path Target Path Options Action 1004 Main Website Custom product 159 greatest keyboard html microsoft natural RP Edit Main Store ergonomic keyboard English 4000 htmI Figure 256 URL Redirect Information Verifying URL Rewrites This section discusses how to verify that a sample product URL rewrite is displayed correctly on your Magento web store 1 In the Admin Panel click System gt Index Management 2 Click Select All at the top of the left column 265 Indexing 266 3 From the Actions list click Reindex Data 4 Click Submit The following figure shows an example Index Management Select All Unselect All Select Visible Unselect Visible 8 items selected Actions Reindex Data e J index Description Mode Status Update Required Updated At Action 7 Product Attributes Index product attributes for layered navigation building Update on Save Never Reindex Data Product Prices Index product prices Update on Save GT ED Never Reindex Data Catalog URL Rewrites Index product and categories URL rewrites Update on Save GT ED Never Reindex Data Product Flat Data Reorganize EAV product structure to flat structure Update on Save GT ED Never Reindex Data 7 Category Products Indexed category products association Update on Save GD Never Reindex Data 7 Catalog Search Index Rebuild
273. of the last day Order Valid Period days Defines how long the order remains valid When the order becomes invalid you can no longer create invoices for it Specify the value equal to the Order Valid Period value in your PayPal merchant account The default value in your PayPal merchant account is 29 To change this number you need to contact PayPal Number of Child Authorizations Defines the maximum number of authorizations for one order That is the maximum number of the online partial invoices you can create for one order The number in this field should be equal to the corresponding setting in your PayPal merchant account The default number of child authorizations in your PayPal account is 1 To increase this number you need to contact PayPal 4 Click Save Config in the upper right corner of the page to save the new configuration Managing Orders Paid Using PayPal Express Checkout with Payment Action Set to Order When the store customer submits the order having paid using the PayPal Express Checkout payment method for which the Order payment action is set the order with Processing status is created in the Admin Panel Two transactions are created for this order one with type Order and one with type Authorization See Figure 159 H Global Record Search Logged in as admin Wednesday January 19 2011 Log Out Magento Enterprise Global Record Search Bee Vednesday January Log Out Dashboard Sales Cat
274. ofile enables you to set and configure recurring payments on a product These are most often used for subscriptions or products with installment payment plans When a product like this is purchased from your store the customer is redirected to a third party payment system where a recurring payment agreement with the store is authorized by the customer Currently creating recurring profiles is available only for the PayPal Express Checkout payment method To enable a recurring profile for this product select Yes for Enable Recurring Profile Additional options become visible as shown in Figure 102 Setting Up Your Catalog Recurring Profile Create New Attribute Enable Recurring Profile Yes v GLOBAL Products with recurring profile participate in catalog as nominal items Recurring Payment Profile GLOBAL Schedule Customer Can Define Stat Date No v Schedule Description Short description of the recurring payment By default equals to the product name Maximum Payment Failures The number of scheduled payments that can fail before the profile is automatically suspended Auto Bill on Next Cycle No v Automatically bill the outstanding balance amount in the next billing cycle if there were failed payments Billing Period Unit Please Select v Unit for billing during the subscription period Billing Frequency Number of billing periods that make up one billi
275. oice Invoice Comments Shipment Shipment Comments Credit Memo Credit Memo Comments O 0 oO QO O 0 O Figure 23 Sales Emails Page 4 In the Order field set configure the following options In the Enabled drop down list select Yes to enable new order confirmation emails to be sent In the New Order Confirmation Email Sender drop down list select the email address to be used for sending the new order confirmation In the New Order Confirmation Template drop down list select the template to be used for the for the order confirmation emails sent to registered customers In the New Order Confirmation Template for Guest drop down list select the template to be used for the for the order confirmation emails sent to guest customers In the Send Order Email Copy To field specify the email address to which a copy of the new order confirmation email is sent This feature helps you to keep track of the new orders that come in 5 Configure the options on the other field sets on this page 6 Click Save Config to save your changes Shipping Settings This section describes how to specify shipping options such as the origin used for shipping rate calculations and whether to enable the multiple shipping destinations feature GZ Basic Configuration Configuring shipping settings and shipping methods enables you to provide customers a selection of shipping methods with shipping rates during checkout Magento CE
276. ole you can create new administrator users at any time System gt Permissions gt Users and assign your new restricted role to the administrator users whose access you want to limit Backups and Rollbacks Magento CE enables you to perform different types of backups backup of database file system or both and to perform rollbacks automatically Backup and Rollback Quick Reference The main tasks related to creating backups and restoring the system are performed in the Magento Admin Panel under System gt Tools gt Backups Files are compressed using the gz and tgz formats Backup files are stored in the var backups directory in your Magento file system The content of the var cache var log var session and var report folders is excluded from the backup Creating and Managing Backups To create a backup 1 Log in to the Magento Admin Panel 2 Navigate to System gt Tools gt Backups 3 Click one of the following buttons depending on the backup type you need to create 246 Keeping Your Store Healthy System Backup Creates a complete backup of the database and the file system On the next step you will have the possibility to choose whether to include the media folder to the backup Database and Media Backup Creates a backup of the database and the media folder Database Backup Creates a backup of the database 4 The confirmation dialog box appears If you agree to put the store into the m
277. om permissions are not specified for downloaded folders and files In this case the system default values are used o For folders 0777 permissions for read write and execute o For files 0666 permissions for read and write 12 Select the Deployment type that you selected in step 7 The types must match or an error will occur during installation 13 Click Start the download process A series of messages is displayed to indicate the progress of the download process as shown in Figure 9 M Magento Community Installation Welcome to Magento s Installation Wizard Welcome i Validation You are now ready to continue the installation process by downloading the most up to date copy of the Magento software Magento Connect Manager Magento Connect Channel Protocol Htt Deployment Use Custom Permissions No Download License Agreement Deployment Type Local Filesystem Localization 7 k Start the download process Configuration Create Admin Account V Auto scroll console contents You re All Set Having trouble installing Magento Check out our Installation Guide Figure 9 Installation Progress After this is completed the following message is displayed at the bottom of the page Download completed You can proceed with installation Continue Magento installation 1 Installing Magento CE Note If you were unable to complete the download process through this interface due to a connection error try to upload
278. om which your web store visitors linked to your store E commerce Tracking Enables you to see which customers make purchases and what they buy You can sign up to this service at https www google com analytics While signing up a report is displayed showing your new Google Analytics account number in the following format UA XXXXXXX 1 Write this number down because it is required for configuring Google Analytics in Magento CE To add Google Analytics tracking to Magento 1 In the Admin Panel select System gt Configuration gt Google API 2 Expand the Google Analytics section as shown in Figure 244 243 Monitoring and Improving the Web Store Google Analytics O Enable Yes wt Account number UA OOGOOOK 4 Figure 244 Google Analytics Options In the Enable field select Yes In the Account number field specify the Google Analytics account number that you wrote down when you signed up for the service P Tip Magento supports native integration with Google Website Optimizer which is another free service from Google that enables you to test different versions of page elements and to select the elements that provide the best conversion rates 244 16 Keeping Your Store Healthy Now that you have your own web store running and are selling products do not forget to keep it in good condition Make sure that your hosting provider performs regular file and database backups This chapter describes what you can
279. omize these emails and translate them into multiple languages to best use them for communication with your customers This section describes how to modify the emails that are sent from the web store for example when an account is created or an order is placed To customize a transactional email template 1 Select System gt Transactional emails to display a list of the custom email templates created in this web store Note This page shows only customized emails If this page is empty it means that Magento will only send standard default emails 2 Click the Add New Template button to display the New Email Template page 181 Design and Content 182 New Email Template Back Convert to Plain Text Preview Template Save Template Load default template Template v Locale English United States Load Template Template Information Template Name Template Subject Insert Variable Template Content Template Styles U9 a os ee Figure 176 New Email Template Page In the Template field select the name of one of the transactional emails that you want to customize such as New account In the Locale field select the language Click Load Template In the Template Name field specify a name for the customized email template If desired modify the Template Subject field In the Template Content area use the WYSIWIG editor to modify the content You must change the contact phone number and
280. on column The Order View page opens showing details about the order Viewing an Order s Details Magento CE provides a large variety of information for each order This section provides a quick review of some of the information provided for an existing order The navigation bar at the top of the Order View page enables you to access the various sections Information Invoices Credit Memos Shipments Comments History and Transactions Information Page This page provides an overview of the most important information about the order such as the current status of the order the products ordered customer information billing shipping and payment information Introducing the Backend Order View The order has been created Information TERE E Order 100000002 Jun 18 2011 4 49 53 PM a E N Back Credit Memos Shipments E a SE Order 100000002 the order confirmation email is not sent Account Information Comments History Transactions Order Date Jun 18 2011 4 49 53 Customer Name Vincent Van Gogh EA R PM Email vinnie vangogh com Order Status Pending Customer Group General Purchased From Main Website m ls Main Website Store Default Store View Billing Address Edit Shipping Address Edit Vincent Van Gogh Vincent Van Gogh 131 N Main St 131 N Main St Sherman Oaks California 91423 Sherman Oaks California 91423 United States United States T 818 555 5555 T 818 555 5555 Payment Information Shipping amp H
281. on that you can control and that enable you to promote and up sell products to your customers 45 Introducing the Frontend 46 Product List Banners You can define the banner that appears at the top of each category landing page with a static block see Figure 40 This feature adds a graphical element to your category pages that can be used for special promotions or to highlight certain products Banners can be defined per category More information about how to create and add static blocks on your site can be found in Managing CMS Pages page 178 Home Apparel SHOP BY Apparel MY CART SHOPPING OPTIONS A sN You have no items in your shopping cart CATEGORY Shirts 4 Shoes 7 E COMPARE PRODUCTS 2 Hoodies 1 ITEMS EAA EAN EAST S ET NET NET ET The Get Up Kids Band Camp a PRICE Pullover Hoodie 0 00 100 00 8 100 00 200 00 4 COLOR Black 1 The Only Children Paisley T Shirt amp A orereiri vinrianrn Figure 40 Product List Banner Promotional Pages Another way to feature products and promotions in your web store is a customized category landing page which is a static HTML page that may be displayed while the user browsing a category instead of showing a list of products See Figure 41 Home Electronics Electronics Don t ever lose touch with Memories fade but photos isn t it time you got quality your loved ones are forever for you
282. ons if your server has an SSL certificate installed Select the Use secure URLs SSL check box additional settings become available to configure this option Specify the complete base URL for the SSL connection in the Secure Base URL field and select the Run the admin interface with SSL check box We also recommend selecting the Use Web Server Apache Rewriters option 19 Installing Magento CE 20 Note SSL settings can be changed later if needed When you are finished click Continue 18 The Create Admin Account page enables you to specify access information as follows Specify the administrator s name and email Create a user name and password Specify the encryption key or the key on the next page Installation Create Admin Account License Agreement Localization First Name Configuration Store Create Admin Account You re All Set Email owner magentostore com Having trouble installing Magento Check out our Installation Guide Login Information Username admin Password Encryption Key Magento uses this key to encrypt passwo encryption key for you and will display it o Click Continue to proceed to the n 19 The You re All Set page shows you Installation You re All Set Download License Agreement Leave the Encryption Key field empty to display Last Name Owner Confirm Password rds credit cards and more If this field is left empty the system will c
283. order view page 3 Click the Credit Memo button to generate a credit memo 4 Scroll down to the Items to Refund area and in the Qty to Refund field of each relevant product specify the quantity of products to refund 5 To specify that this product was actually returned to the web store select the Return to Stock check box as shown in Figure 223 Managing Orders and Customers Items to Refund SOLO DLL DID LOSE Oe GIPP VILLPIPLLPIA S Row To j Coalesce Functioning On Impatience T Shirt 15 00 Ordered 1 o 1 15 00 1 24 0 00 16 24 SKU coal_sm Invoiced 1 Size Small O Update Qiy s Figure 223 Items to Refund 6 Optional Select the Email Copy of Credit Memo check box as shown in Figure 224 to automatically send an email to the customer that the order has been refunded You can also adjust the refund totals to match your business rules Refund Totals Refund Figure 224 Refund Totals 7 Click the Refund button at the bottom of the page The total of the order from which this product was refunded is updated automatically 8 Click the Back button to return to the orders page where you can create additional orders if required 9 Note Refunding an order in Magento CE does not cause an actual payment refund You must refund the payment on your own The credit memo is only a record used to track the refunds and to provide proper values in the reports dag 14 Manag
284. ort Description Updated At C Orders Total Ordered Report Jul 24 2011 10 04 45 PM C Tax Order Taxes Report Grouped by Tax Rates Jul 24 2011 10 04 45 PM C Shipping Total Shipped Report Jul 24 2011 10 04 45 PM E Total Invoiced Total Invoiced VS Paid Report Jul 24 2011 10 04 45 PM C Total Refunded Total Refunded Report Jul 24 2011 10 04 46 PM C Coupons Promotion Coupons Usage Report Jul 24 2011 10 04 46 PM C Bestsellers Products Bestsellers Report Jul 24 2011 10 04 46 PM Figure 241 Refresh Statistics Page 2 Use the check boxes on the left to select the reports for which you want to have the statistics refreshed 3 In the Actions drop down list select the scope of the statistics to be refreshed Refresh Lifetime Statistics or Refresh Statistics for the Last Day 4 Click Submit Available Reports The following describes the reports that are available in Magento CE Report Path Description Total Ordered Reports gt Sales gt Shows orders for the specified time period 240 Report Order Taxes Total Invoiced vs Paid Total Shipped Total Refunded Coupons Usage PayPal Settlement Products in Carts Abandoned Carts Products Bestsellers Products Ordered Most Viewed Low Stock Downloads New Accounts Customers by Orders Total Customers by Number of Orders Customers Reviews Products Reviews Customers Tags Products Tags Popular Tags Search Terms Path Orders Reports gt Sale
285. ory Category Category Men Women Men Women Category Category Category Category Figure 74 Example Category Structure The way category names are displayed on the frontend depends on the layout If the default theme is used for the web store categories are shown in a bar near the top of the store web page Each product can be assigned to one or more categories as described in Finding the Right Products page 38 Displaying Categories To display a list of all defined categories Select Catalog gt Manage Categories The categories are listed in a tree view on the left as shown in Figure 75 Collapse All Expand All a Root Catalog 0 Furniture 6 C4 Living Room 4 Bedroom 2 AL Electronics 42 Category C4 Cell Phones 6 List aE Cameras 8 ei Computers 28 aC Apparel 66 C4 Shirts 19 ei Shoes 46 C4 Hoodies 1 Fal Pants 0 z Household tterns 0 Figure 75 Category List 76 Setting Up Your Catalog If you have loaded Sample Data these sample categories Furniture Electronics and Apparel will appear in the category tree Disabled categories are listed in gray text Creating Categories This section describes the most important steps in creating a category To create a new category To create a new root category make sure that Choose Store View in the upper left corner of the page is set to Default Config and click Add Root Category To create a subcategory
286. oup Oty Price Action All Websites USD x ALLGROUPS s andabove e009 Kl All Websites USD m ALLGROUPS 10 andabove 60 09 EJ Add Tier Special Price GLOBAL USD Special Price From Date E GLOBAL Special Price To Date E GLOBAL Mot available for purchase Mo GLOBAL with Google Checkout Figure 200 Specifying Price Tiers 5 Click Save Tip To apply a tier to multiple groups but not all groups create multiple tiers each with the same Qty and Price information and select a different customer group in each The prices on the frontend take precedence from the highest to the lowest quantity Therefore if you have a tier for the quantity 5 and one for the quantity 10 and a customer adds 5 6 7 8 or 9 items to the shopping cart then the customer gets the discounted price that you specified for the quantity 5 tier As soon as the customer adds the 10th item the discounted price specified for the quantity 10 tier supersedes the quantity 5 tier and that discounted price of 10 applies instead 204 Promotions After saving the product it shows the Tier Pricing block on the frontend Buy 5 for 89 99 each and save 1795 P Buy 10 for 69 99 each and save 37 Figure 201 Tier Pricing Block Frontend On the product listing pages the best available deal is displayed below the regular price as shown in Figure 202 Microsoft Natural Ergonomic Keyboard 4000 99 99 AS low as 69 99
287. ove We are happy to announce the availability of Magento version 1 2 1 for download and upgrade This version includes some issue resolutions for Magento version 1 2 x A full list of items included in this release can be found on the release notes page O E an 24 2009 12 25 56 AM Magento version 1 2 0 3 now available Read Details Mark as Read Remove Magento version 1 2 0 3 is now available for download and upgrade This version includes issue resolutions for Magento version 1 2 0 x as listed in the release notes go Jan 12 2009 8 41 49PM_ Magento version 1 2 0 2 now available Read Details Mark as Read Remove Magento version 1 2 0 2 is now available for download and upgrade This version includes an issue resolutions for Magento version 1 2 0 x as listed in the release notes oO Dec 30 2008 9 59 22 PM Magento version 1 2 0 1 now available Read Details Mark as Read Remove Magento version 1 2 0 1 now available This version includes some issue resolutions for Magento 1 2 x that are listed in the release notes section oO E Dec 30 2008 7 45 59AM Magento version 1 2 0 is now available for download and upgrade Read Details Mark as Read Remove We are extremely happy to announce the availability of Magento version 1 2 0 for download and upgrade This version includes numerous issue resolutions for Magento version 1 1 x and some highly requested new features such as Support for Downloadable Digital Products Added Layered Navigation
288. own you can see a more detailed Product Description area Also Additional Information details are provided about the product in the form of a table Product Tags Shows the tags assigned to this product Customers can navigate to other products by clicking on one of these tags You can also define whether customers can add tags s Reviews Your customers can rate and review your products The store administrator can approve or remove reviews Product Options Magento provides a variety of controls that enable you to configure the product options that appear for a customer to select such as check boxes drop down lists and so on For example customers are able to select the size of a shoe as shown in Figure 46 Gender Shoe Size Choose option Choose option aty Add to Cart Figure 46 Product Options Web Store Page Header and Footer 30 Every web store has a header that appears at the top of each page and a footer that appears at the bottom of each page These features enable you to control the look and feel of your web store and provide the customer with various functions as described in this section Introducing the Frontend The Header The default header of each of your web store pages shows your web store logo and banner An example is shown in Figure 47 Search M search entire store here Search Store Logo agento Demo Store Default welcome msg Various Functions Cems English
289. p and specify the price for the selected group The Website column defines the scope of the Group Price field Note For bundle products the group price is specified as a discount percentage If bundle items have their own group prices set for the same customer group then the discount specified for the whole bundle product is applied to these group prices To save your changes click Save or Save and Continue Edit Group Price Implementation Details 214 A group price can be specified for the following product types Simple Configurable Virtual Bundle Downloadable The list of product types for which a group price can be specified is defined in the settings of the group_price product attribute The settings are available under Catalog gt Attributes gt Manage Attributes gt group_price The list of product types for which the attribute is used can be configured in the Apply To field Note For the Grouped and Gift Card product types the Group Price functionality will not be applied even if these product types are selected in the Apply To field of the group_price attribute In this case for Grouped products the Group Price field will not even be displayed on the Product Infornation page in the Admin Panel For Gift Card products the Group Price field will be displayed but its value will not be considered by the system Promotions Displaying the group price in the frontend fits the general logic of price
290. pr 16 2008 2 51 52 PM Jun 20 2007 6 38 32 PM Aug 30 2007 2 01 18 PM Aug 30 2007 2 03 37 PM Aug 8 2008 1 29 35 PM Aug 8 2008 12 23 12 PM Aug 26 2007 7 11 13 PM Page a of 1 pages View 20 perpage Total 5records found Title Identifier t Layout Store View Status Date Created Last Modified Action All Store Views From Ej From tal o 8 To 176 Figure 168 Manage Pages Page This page shows two Home Page rows One row has the value 2 columns with right bar in its Layout column and its Status column shows Enabled Design and Content The other row has the value 1 column in its Layout column and its Status column shows Disabled 9 Click on the first and second rows of the homepage The page shown in Figure 169 is displayed for each of them Edit Page Home page 1 Back ea Delete Page Save Page Save and Continue Edit Page Information Page Title URL Key Home page home Relative to Website Base URL Store View aaaaaaa Default Store View Test Site Test Store 1 French Status Enabled Figure 169 Edit Page Page lt Change the Enabled status of the page with 2 columns with right bar layout to Disabled Change the Disabled status of the page with 1 column layout to Enabled The homepage of the frontend now appears similar to the page shown in Figure 170 Free Shipping on orders over 50 M Magento DEMO STORE FURNITURE
291. practice to test the effect of these rules yourself before trying them out on the public Either use a discount code that only you know or assign your test customer to a testing customer group and limit the cart rules to only that customer group Auto Generating Coupon Codes For shopping cart price rules you can auto generate batches of coupon codes and track their usage Auto Generating Coupon Codes Quick Reference Batches of discount coupon codes can be generated and managed on the Manage Coupon Codes tab of the Shopping Cart Price Rule page Promotions gt Shopping Cart Price Rules gt your rule To make the tab appear in the Coupon field select Specific Coupon select the Use Auto Generation check box and click Save and Continue Edit See Figure 196 Newsletter CMS Reports System omer help for this page Dashboard Sales Catalog Mobile Customers Promotions TT Shopping Cart Price Rule Edit Rule Sashuk Back Delete Rule f SaveRule Save and Continue Edit i e Rule Information General Information be ences et re a Ae Rule Name Sashuk __ Labels ceccccccsnccccncnsaccecnasccncacccsncscansncscsvsvcacel Description Related Banners Status Active Websites Main Website Lenchik Website Sasha s website krystyna_website NOT LOGGED IN s Wholesale Customer Groups P Coupon Specific Coupon Coupon Code Use Auto Generation If you select and save the rule
292. price is shown on the last steps of the ordering process as well See Figure 206 207 Promotions 208 Cuddle bear toy About Us Customer Service Figure 206 For the Teddy bear toy the Display Actual Price is set to On Gesture In Cart Clicking the Click for price link in a catalog redirects to the product page where instead of the price or next to the crossed out MSRP the following message is displayed To see product price add this item to your cart You can always remove it later The What s this link is also included which points to further explanations The actual price of the product is displayed after it is added Teddy bear toy x Price 244 00 Actual Price The safer easier way to pay Excl Tax 39 99 OR incl Tax 9 99 ADD TO CART Our price is lower than the manufacturer s minimum advertised price As a result we cannot show you the price in catalog or the product page You have no obligation to purchase the product once you know the price You can simply remove the item from your cart to the shopping cart See Figure 207 Promotions M Ma ento MY ACCOUNT MY WISHLIST 1 MY CART 1 w CHECKOUT U amp Q Enter search keyword GO Fluffy Toys Toy Sets Accessories Home Fluffy Toys Brown Teddy Bear Toy Brown Teddy Bear Toy Be the first to review this product Availability In stock 54 99 To see product price add this item to your cart
293. r for more information see Creating Categories page 79 The customer can select from the other options on a per page basis You can configure attributes to be used for sorting using the Used for Sorting in Product Listing setting of an attribute For details see Managing Product Attributes page 88 7i Setting Up Your Catalog fz Use Flat Catalog Category Selecting Yes flattens multiple category database tables into a single table for increased performance on the frontend Magento recommends selecting Yes for any size catalog Use Flat Catalog Product Selecting Yes flattens multiple product database tables into a single table for increased performance on the frontend Magento recommends selecting Yes if your catalog contains more than 1 000 SKUs Allow Dynamic Media URLs in Products and Categories Selecting No can improve performance Sitemap This section determines how your site map is displayed to customers e Use Tree Like Category Sitemap Selecting Yes displays the site map as a tree showing all categories and subcategories as branches Selecting No displays the categories and subcategories in a single column e Minimum Lines per Page Determines the number of lines on each page when the site map is distributed among several pages Product Reviews This section enables unregistered guests in your store to write product reviews Product Alerts You can enable your customers to subscr
294. r buck Use our phones Love it cherish it keep it by your bed side cause you need it Capture your memories with our quality digital cameras With Magento you can m OUR BEST SELLING BRANDS OUR BEST SELLING BRANDS Samsung Sony Cog Olympus Kodak Nokia AT amp T a Argus Canon oshit 2 BLACKBERRY 2100 PEARL FREE SHIPPING BACK TO SCHOOL Get your Acer Ferrari 3200 Now a Toshiba M285 E 14 Figure 41 Promotional Page Introducing the Frontend Up sell Products Up sell products are items that your customer could buy nstead of the product that is being viewed These products may be more expensive of higher quality or more popular or produce a higher profit margin The example in Figure 42 presents a more expensive keyboard and other products as up sells to the less expensive keyboard Microsoft Natural Ergonomic Keyboard 4000 He the firstto review this product Availability In stock B o a a ee ee 99 99 Oty Tree a OR Add to YWishlist Add to Compare Quick Overview The most comfortable ergonomic keyboard on the market Ve just made a great deal for this Microsoft Natural ergonomic keyboard Double click on above image to view full picture gt ___ _ 4 Product Description The most comfortable ergonomic keyboard on the market wwe just made a great deal for this Microsoft Natural ergonomic keyboard And we know you re goi
295. r changes Display Settings Tab The Display Settings tab enables you to specify how this category is presented to the customer Display Settings Default Product Listing Sort By Display Mode Products only v STORE VIEW CMS Block Please select a static block v STORE VIEW Is Anchor No v GLOBAL Available Product Listing Sort By Jest Value STORE VIEW Use All Available Attributes est Value STORE VIEW Use Config Settings Layered Navigation Price Step STORE VIEW Use Config Settings Figure 77 Create a New Category Display Settings In the Display Mode field select one of the following options to specify how you would like your category page to appear Static block only Static block and product list below it Product list only In the CMS Block field select the static block that you would like to be shown for this category if selected in the Display Mode field This block must first be created in the CMS section for more information see Managing CMS Pages page 178 8T Setting Up Your Catalog 82 J In the Is Anchor field select Yes to specify that this category page is an anchor Anchors are used for the layered navigation in Magento CE as described in Layered Navigation page 84 o If you set the category to be an anchor for Layered Navigation then your web store displays the subcategories of this category in the SHOP BY panel on the left This area also shows a linke
296. r versions such as between version 1 1 and 1 2 can render your site and any custom functionality unusable until your perform a few minor configuration changes which are usually noted along with the new version announcement We strongly recommend that you first test all upgrades in a staging environment before applying it to your live store To update your web store to a new version 1 In the Admin Panel select System gt Magento Connect gt Magento Connect Manager 2 Log in using your backend username and password and click Log In The Magento Connect Manager page is displayed as shown in Figure 247 250 Magento MANAGER Extensions Settings Keeping Your Store Healthy Return to Admin Log Out Put store on the maintenance mode while installing upagrading Install New Extensions Search for modules via Magento Connect Paste extension key to install insta Direct package file upload Download or build package file Upload package fie Browse REE Manage Existing Extensions Channel Magento Community Edition Installed 0 1 1 stable Package Name Dealer_Inquery Flagbit_Factfinder 3 1 0 stable HEM_Simpleshipping 0 1 1 stable SolutionSet_UPSAddressValidation 0 0 4 stable Organicinternet_SimpleConfigurableProduc ts 0 7 4 stable 1 0 21 stable Check for Upgrades Commit Changes Clear all sessions after successfull install or upgrade Actions
297. r will be deployed on your file system or via an FTP connection We recommend that you deploy using FTP Deploying Magento Connect Manager through the FTP connection resembles the process of a customer personally uploading files on the server and it does not require changing permissions for reading writing and executing files With file system deployment because of the permissions that the Apache account provides when deploying this way deployed files are more vulnerable to permissions problems In this case you should contact the server administrator in order to change the file permissions after the installation is completed 15 Installing Magento CE 16 Note The Local Filesystem option will be unavailable if the system account of the web server does not have permission to write to the directory when Magento CE is installed If you select the FTP Connection option as a deployment type a number of other options become available including the host name of the FTP server and the credentials for connecting to the FTP server For these fields use the values that were provided by the FTP server administrator In the Installation Path field specify the path to where Magento CE will be installed This should be the same directory into which you uploaded the downloader php file To check the connection to the FTP server click Check FTP If any of the FTP parameters under Deployment Type is invalid Magento Connect Manager will not be dep
298. rder is 100071640 You will receive an order confirmation email with details of your order and a link to track its progress Click here to print a copy of your order confirmation Figure 55 Thank You Page Continue Shopping A confirmation email can be sent to the customer An example is shown in Figure 56 The confirmation email can be configured by under System gt Configuration gt Sales Emails oo Introducing the Frontend M Magento DEMO STORE Hello Test Customer Thank you for your order from Main Website Store Once your package ships we will send an email with a link to track your order You can check the status of your order by logging into your account If you have any questions about your order please contact us at dummyemail magentocommerce com or call us at 655 555 0125 Monday Friday Sam 5pm PST Your order confirmation is below Thank you again for your business Your Order 100000021 placed on May 23 2009 Billing Information Payment Method Test Customer Name on the Card Test Customer Test Street Credit Card Type Visa Test City California 90123 Credit Card Number xxxx 1111 United States Expiration Date 03 2011 T 123 123 1234 Shipping Information Shipping Method Test Customer Flat Rate Fixed Test Street Test City California 90123 United States T 123 123 1234 Item Sku Oty Subtotal DVD player 3003 1 150 00 Subtotal 150 00 Shipping amp Handling
299. re Text Field v Owner Default Value Unique Value No b Not shared with other products Values Required No v Input Validation for Store Owner None v Apply To All Product Types v Frontend Properties Use in Quick Search No v Use in Advanced Search No v Comparable on Front end No v Use In Layered Navigation Can be used only with catalog input type Dropdown Multiple Select and Price Use In Search Results Layered Jc Navigation Can be used only with catalog input type Dropdown Multiple Select and Price Use for Promo Rule Conditions No v Position Position of attribute in layered navigation block Allow HTML Tags on Frontend Yes v Visible on Product View Page on No m Front end Used in Product Listing No v Depends on design theme J Used for Sorting in Product No Listing Depends on design theme Figure 85 New Product Attribute Page 3 In the Attribute Code field specify a unique identifier for this attribute Do not use spaces The code does not appear on the frontend 4 In the Scope field select the scope to which this attribute applies 5 The Catalog Input Type for Store Owner setting controls how a store administrator specifies values for attributes For descriptive textual attributes you can use the Text Field or Text Area types for list prices you use the Price type Note that not all types can be used for layered navigation 6 If this attribute has a default value specify it
300. reate an nthe next page Required Fields ext page r encryption key Get ready to experience Open Source eCommerce Evolved Localization Before you continue to your store please make a note of your encryption key Magento uses itto encrypt passwords credit Configuration cards and more Create Admin Account You re All Set 6b42482320 eb 1e45724ff34e62c174d Make sure you keep itin a safe place Having trouble installing Magento Check out our Installation Guide Go to Frontend Go to Backend Tip Write down the encryption key and keep it in a safe place If you need or want to move your store data to a new Magento CE site you will need this encryption key to recover the encrypted d Congratulations You have now CF ata completed the installation of Magento Installing Magento CE Note If you want to run through the Setup Wizard again you do not have to download all the Magento CE files again Simply delete the app etc LocaL xml file and any files and directories in the var directory Go back to Atto www yourDomain com magento directory with your browser The Setup Wizard will run automatically again You can visit your new Magento storefront by selecting the Go to Frontend button or by specifying the URL of your store in your browser You can also access the administration backend and begin configuring your new web store as described in the Accessing the Backend section on page 23 Tip You can easil
301. receive a newsletter twice This method reduces the number of customers that consider your newsletter as spam Newsletter Templates Before sending a newsletter create a newsletter template You can create and save as many of these as required for any situation whether it be an annual holiday newsletter or weekly product updates To create a new newsletter template 1 In the Admin Panel select Newsletter gt Newsletter Templates to display a page listing the previously defined newsletter templates You can edit an existing template or create a new one 2 To add a new template click the Add New Template button to display the New Newsletter Template page as shown in Figure 209 Promotions Template Information Template Name Template Subject Sender Name CustomerSupport Sender Email support example com Template Content uy B Z U a 2 B Styles Format Font family Fontsize x Ga Ge Ge a t lt SE ce bes Oum A Y 4 eB Q gt E iat A F aS Follow this link to unsubscribe var subscriber getUnsubscriptionLinkO Path Template Styles Figure 210 New Newsletter Template Page 3 In the Template Name field specify a unique and indicative name for this template This value is not visible for customers 4 In the Template Subject field specify the subject of the email to be sent to your customers 5 In the Sender Name and Sender Email fields specify the name a
302. ries and states in which this tax will apply Depending on the choices you make the input fields change to accommodate the details of where the tax will apply In the Tax box enter the amount for the Fixed Product Tax 5 To add more countries or states to which to apply the FPT click the Add Tax button You can apply a different amount for the tax for each locale where it applies 6 When finished click Save Value Added Tax Some countries charge a value added tax or VAT on goods and services There can be different VAT rates depending on which stage you as a merchant are at in the manufacture or distribution of the products materials or services that you sell to your customers In this case you may need to use more than one VAT rate in your store for tax calculation purposes 145 axes This section provides a sample procedure for setting up a 20 VAT in the U K for sales to retail customers For other tax rates and countries follow the general procedure but enter specific information that corresponds to your country VAT rate customer types and so on Note Before proceeding make sure to find out which rules and regulations apply to VAT in your area Note In certain business to business transactions VAT is not assessed Magento can validate a customer s VAT ID to ensure that VAT is assessed or not assessed properly For more information see Appendix VAT ID Validation page 275 Step 1 Set Up Customer Ta
303. rivs Step 5 Setting Up the Web Store Database To create and set up the database to be used by your web store 1 Using a database management application such as phpMyAdmin or a tool provided by your hosting provider create a new empty database and assign users and permissions to it 2 If you want to use the sample data do the following a Using an FTP or SFTP tool transfer the extracted sample data file to a directory on the server The file name will be similar to magento_sample_data_for_x x x sql b Use the database management tool to import the file magento_sample_data_for_x x x sql into this new database c Toadd sample images to the sample products in your store copy the contents of the Media folder from the Sample Data package onto the new Media folder on your server You are now ready to install Magento Step 6 Installing Magento CE In this step you install Magento CE using the Downloader tool To install Magento 1 Use a standard web browser to navigate to the location on your server where you uploaded the Magento downloader If everything has been set up correctly as described up until now the Magento Installation Wizard Welcome page is displayed as shown in Figure 5 13 Installing Magento CE 14 M Magento Community Installation Welcome Validation Magento Connect Manager Deployment Download License Agreement Localization Configuration Create Admin Account You re All Set
304. rosoft Natural Ergonomic Keyboard 4000 Microsoft Natural Ergonomic Keyboard 4000 Email to a Friend Be the first to review this product Availability In stock 99 99 aty 4 REE OR Add to Wishlist Add to Compare Quick Overview The most comfortable ergonomic keyboard on the market We just made a great deal for this Microsoft Natural ergonomic keyboard Double click on above image to view full picture gt l Details The most comfortable ergonomic keyboard on the market We just made a great deal for this Microsoft Natural ergonomic keyboard And we know you re going to love it This newest addition to the world s best selling line of ergonomic keyboards features a natural wrist alignment that will make your day Just one touch allows you to perform a wealth of common but important tasks such as opening documents and replying to e mail The Microsoft Natural Model 4000 ergonomic keyboard also features an improved number pad with easy to reach symbols such left and right equal sign and back space placed just above the number pad Easy access to the Internet Multimedia keys Lockable F keys and much more see complete list of additional features below Don t you think it s time to go natural Microsoft s Natural Ergonomic Model 4000 Keyboard Available right here for the best price Figure 258 Successful Redirect E COMPARE PRODUCTS You have no items to compare MY CART You have no items in your shoppin
305. rrent Configuration Scope Choose whether the automatic change of customer group based on VAT ID will be enabled or disabled by default The setting can be overridden on the product level The setting influences the system behavior in the following situations i The VAT ID of the customer s default address or the whole default address changes li Customer group change was emulated during the checkout for a registered customer who had no previously saved address or for a customer who registered during the checkout If the automatic group change is enabled then in the first case the customer group changes automatically and in the second case the temporarily emulated customer group is assigned to customer If the automatic group change is disabled the customer group that is assigned assigned never changes unless an administrator changes it manually Show VAT Number on Frontend Choose whether the field for entering and storing the VAT ID number will be visible in the frontend 6 To save the settings click Save Config If the VAT ID Validation feature is disabled the Enable Automatic Assignment to Customer Group field set to No then the system behavior is as usual and the default customer group can be set in the Default Group field When the feature is enabled the system does not automatically validate customer VAT IDs nor does it change customer groups Configuring Additional Settings for the VAT ID Validation Feature
306. rsa The following describes the process depicted above Step 1 Setting Up Catalog Defaults page 70 This step describes how to set basic catalog default configurations that define its behavior Step 2 Creating Categories page 79 The next step is to create the categories that will contain your products Each product can be assigned to one or more categories A Magento CE store with Sample Data provides three such categories Furniture Electronics and Apparel Categories can have multiple levels of subcategories A customer can click on a category to see a drop down list of subcategories such as Cell Phones Cameras and Computers as shown in Figure 69 Furniture Electronics Apparel Cell Phones Computers Figure 69 Categories and Subcategories 69 Setting Up Your Catalog Nd Step 3 Creating Attributes page 89 Next you can create the attributes that represent a product s characteristics Attributes are a powerful Magento CE concept to make finding and comparing products easier Step 4 Creating Attribute Sets page 92 Attribute sets are logical groups of attributes that simplify the process of assigning attributes to a product They do not appear in the front end user interface o Creating a New Attribute Group page 94 Part of the process of creating an attribute set is to create attribute groups These groups determine how attributes appear in the backend when defining a product Step
307. s gt Hosted Checkout Pages Options should be configured in the Set Up and Customize sections Configure the options according to the recommendations displayed in the PayPal Payments Advanced field set in the Magento Admin Panel PayPal Payments Advanced Method Customer Experience A store customer selects the PayPal Payments Advanced payment method on the Payment Information checkout step and clicks Continue The Order Review step appears where the PAY NOW button is available instead of the usual PLACE ORDER button After the customer clicks PAY NOW the PayPal hosted form opens in the customer s browser The customer enters the card information and clicks Verify Card If the transaction is successful the customer is redirected to the order confirmation page Note The form also contains the Pay with PayPal button clicking it redirects a customer to the PayPal site where the customer can complete the payment using PayPal Express Checkout 161 Fayment If the transaction fails on any reason an error message appears on the checkout page and the customer is directed to repeat the checkout process These situations are handled on the PayPal side Order Processing When the PayPal Advanced Payment Method Is Used Processing of orders that are paid using the PayPal Payments Advanced payment method is the same to regular processing of orders that are paid with PayPal An invoice shipment and credit memo online offline refund
308. s gt Tax Reports gt Sales gt Invoiced Reports gt Sales gt Shipping Reports gt Sales gt Refunds Reports gt Sales gt Coupons Reports gt Sales gt PayPal Settlement Reports Reports gt Shopping Cart gt Products in carts Reports gt Shopping Cart gt Abandoned Carts Reports gt Products gt Bestsellers Reports gt Products gt Products Ordered Reports gt Products gt Most Viewed Reports gt Products gt Low Stock Reports gt Products gt Downloads Reports gt Customers gt New Accounts Reports gt Customers gt Customers by orders total Reports gt Customers gt Customers by number of orders Reports gt Reviews gt Customers Reviews Reports gt Reviews gt Products Reviews Reports gt Tags gt Customers Reports gt Tags gt Products Reports gt Tags gt Popular Reports gt Search Terms Description Shows taxes charged for orders in the specified time period grouped by tax rate Shows amounts paid and unpaid for invoiced orders in the specified time period Shows orders shipped in the specified time period grouped by carrier method includes shipping charge amounts Shows refunds applied to orders in the specified time period Shows coupons used for orders in the specified time period grouped by coupon code Shows PayPal settlements for the specified time period Click Fetch Updates to retrieve data from PayPal
309. s Optical Trackman Default logitechcord 79 99 al 159 Microsoft Natural Ergonomic Keyboard 4000 Default microsoftnatural 99 99 157 30 Flat Panel TFT LCD Cinema HD Monitor Monitors M9179LL 699 99 F 156 19 Widescreen Flat Panel LCD Monitor Monitors WW1952TQ TF 399 99 F 155 Seagate 250GB HD 5400RPM Hard Drive 250gb5400 99 00 F ISh HN 5400RPM Hard Drive 5 nn 299 00 O H aata e ne a i Figure 117 Adding Products to a Bundle You can select any product that you want using the check boxes Click the Add Selected Product s to Option button to confirm the assignment For each selection you can then define the following options Default Qty Specifies the default quantity shown in the product view page User Defined Qty When set to Yes this option enables customers to enter a L2 quantity for a given selection L2 e Position Specifies the Orders of a selection 4 Default Specifies the predefined value L2 Grouped Product Associated Products Tab A grouped product enables you to purchase each of the items separately In the store a grouped product appears as shown in Figure 118 116 Setting Up Your Catalog Magento Red Furniture Set Email to a Friend weed 2Review s Add Your Review Availability In stack Product Name Price Oty Ottoman 299 99 0 Chair 129 99 o Couch 599 99 o nkon OR Add to wishlist Add to Compare Quick Overview Double click on abo
310. s found Top 5 Search Terms Search Term Results Number of Uses Revenue Tax Shipping Quantity 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 No records found Bestsellers Most Viewed Products New Customers Customers Product Name Price Quantity Ordered No records found Figure 13 Magento CE Backend 4 After you log in the Magento messages that you have not yet read are displayed such as the one shown in Figure 14 Magento Preview Version CE 1 6 0 0 beta1 is now available NOTICE Read details Figure 14 Incoming Message Notice Additionally information about other messages is shown in a bar just under the menu see Figure 15 See Managing Administrator Messages page 60 for more information about managing these messages Latest Message Knowledge Base v 1 1 by aheadWorks has been released Read details You have 22 minor and 2 notice unread message s Go to messages inbox Figure 15 Message Bar 24 Basic Configuration Store Hierarchy Among the first things you will want to do is plan your store hierarchy that is the arrangement of websites stores and store views When Magento CE is installed a Main Website a default store and a default store view are created You will want to create additional websites stores and store views depending on the breadth of the items you are selling and the composition of your target markets To be able to create these entities you need to create at least one root category
311. s no possibility to go directly to a product with a given set of options This also makes it hard for a search engine to find the product option Virtual Product This is a product that does not require shipping or inventory It is generally used for warranties or services Downloadable Product This is a digitally downloadable product that sells one or more files of a product and provides samples of those files These downloadable files can reside on your server or be provided as URLs to any other server Bundle This product is composed of components that are presented in different ways and are made from existing products A good example of a bundle is a complete computer For this computer you can configure how much RAM or what kind of monitor is included with this computer in your store Creating a New Product The following steps are the same for all product types Subsequent sections describe the differences between each of the product types To create a new product 1 In the Admin Panel select Catalog gt Manage Products to display the Manage Products page as shown in Figure 93 96 Setting Up Your Catalog Manage Products Choose Store View All Store Views gt Page 1 of6 pages View 20 a per page Total 120 records found E Notify Low Siock RSS Select Al Unselect Al j Select Viste Unselect Vistie lems selected te Actors Sl Submit 10 d Weme Type Attrib Set Hame SKU Price Qty Visibility Status W
312. s to be used in the VAT ID Validation functionality or use existing groups if they comply with your business logic Customer groups are created under Customers gt Customer Groups When configuring the VAT ID Validation functionality you will need to assign each of the created customer groups as a default for customers with appropriate VAT ID validation results For details see the Enabling and Configuring the VAT ID Validation Functionality section further Configuring the VAT Related Tax Rules The VAT ID Validation functionality was implemented to facilitate the VAT applying for EU B2B merchants In Magento taxes are applied using the tax rules mechanism Each tax rule is defined be three entities 276 Appendix VAT ID Validation Customer Tax Classes Product Tax Classes Tax Rates To use the VAT ID Validation functionality effectively you need to create the appropriate tax rules Important Note According to the EU taxation policy the supply of services between businesses B2B services is in principle taxed at the customer s place of establishment http ec europa eu taxation_customs taxation vat how_vat_works vat_on_servi ces index_en htm So if you sell downloadable or virtual products which do not require shipping the VAT rate of a customer s location country should be applied for both intra union and domestic sales It means that you additionally need to create individual tax rules for a product t
313. splay in Suggested Terms Action Any v From From v To To o Test Main 8 654 Yes Edit Website Main Store English o acer Main 1 394 Yes Website Main Store English coucl Main 2 67 es Edit Fi h M 2 367 y Edit Website E Main Store English o Shirts Main 3 410 Yes Edit Website Main Stare Figure 242 Search Page 242 Monitoring and Improving the Web Store 2 Click the Add New Search Term button to display the New Search page as shown in Figure 243 General Information Search Query latop Store English v Synonym For laptop Will make search for the query above return results for this search Redirect URL ex http domain com Display in Suggested No v Terms Figure 243 New Search Page 3 In the Search Query field specify the incorrect spelling of the term latop in this example 4 Inthe Synonym For field specify the correct search term that is defined in your web store laptop in this example 5 In the Redirect URL field specify the URL to which the customer is redirected when no results are returned for the search term 6 Click the Save Search button Google Analytics Google Analytics is a free service provided by Google to help website owners find out more about the traffic on their website and about conversions Magento CE supports both the following Google Analytics options Page View Tracking Enables you to see the origin fr
314. ss or shipping origin Magento also supports the calculation of Value Added Tax VAT for business to business transactions in the European Union For more information see Appendix VAT ID Validation page 275 Note When you set up tax options be sure to set your store scope so that the options are applied across stores and websites appropriately Important You can restrict access to tax settings in the Admin panel by setting permissions for users You set permissions by creating roles For more information see Limiting Administrator Access to the Admin Panel Backend page 245 Note that to access tax functionality you need to make sure that the Sales Tax areas are checked along with the System Tax areas If you are setting up another website and you want to load catalog prices including tax for a different region than your default shipping origin you ll also need to allow access to the System Shipping settings for that role because shipping origin determines what the assumed store tax rate is for catalog prices Tip For more information about tax updates including recommended tax configurations for different countries see http Wwww magentocommerce com knowledge base entry magento ce 18 ee 113 tax calc General Taxation Settings Tax calculations in Magento offer a considerable amount of flexibility to meet your store s legal requirements your preferences and the expectations of your customers As such there ar
315. stem will update the information including the available shipping methods and the PLACE ORDER button will be enabled After the customer clicks PLACE ORDER the order is created in Magento and PayPal performs the related transaction s The complete billing and shipping addresses are saved in the order record in Magento 164 Payment Order Transactions in PayPal Express Magento includes the option of using a new payment action Order for the PayPal Express Checkout payment method When a store customer submits an order having paid using the PayPal Express Checkout payment method for which the Order payment action is set the funds on the customer s card are authorized If the authorization times out before you capture all payment the authorization is voided and a new authorization and capture are conducted when you create an invoice Only the amount equal to the invoice total is authorized and captured The maximum number of these authorizations for one order and the periods for which the first authorization and the order in general stay valid depend on your PayPal merchant account settings These parameters need to be specified in the Magento Admin Panel as well Capturing can be done only from the Magento Admin Panel by creating one or more invoices Situations in which using the Order transaction may be appropriate include the following Back orders in which available items are sent immediately and the remai
316. stomer group ID in the customer_group_ customerGroupld format NEWMESSAGE Indicates whether a new message has been received CART Hashed value of a quote ID in the quoteld format COMPARE List of product IDs added by customer to compare list in the productld 1 productld 2 productld N format POLL ID of a recently voted poll RECENTLYCOMPARED A customer s list of recently compared product IDs in the productld 1 productld 2 productld N format Basic Configuration 36 Cookie Description WISHLIST Hashed list of products added to wishlist in the productld 1_ productld 2_ _productld N format WISHLIST_CNT Hashed number of items in the customer s wishlist in the wishlist_item_count_ productCount format CUSTOMER_AUTH Indicates whether a customer is logged in A hashed value of customer_logged_in_O 1 CATEGORY_INFO Stores the category info on the page This allows displaying pages more quickly LAST_CATEGORY Recently visited category ID in the categoryID format VIEWED_PRODUCT_IDS Recently viewed product IDs in productld 1 productld 2 productld N format Code of the currency selected by a customer USD UAH GBP etc If the Google Analytics module is enabled and using cookies is allowed by a customer Magento stores the following Google Analytics cookies e utma e utmb_ e utmc e _utmz For a description of the Google Analytics cookies refer the official Google
317. t list mark products using the selection check boxes Then select one of the actions from the Actions dropdown field and click the Submit button Delete Deletes the selected products from the store Change Status Disables or enables multiple products at once Update Attributes Updates the attributes of multiple products When you click the Submit button a new page opens containing a list of all attributes for all selected products Select the Change check box for any attribute that you want to change then specify the new attribute values Click Save to confirm the changes Note You can use the Duplicate Product feature to create separate products without having to enter every value each time To use it click the Duplicate button on the product page of an existing product Creating Variations of a Product This section describes how to create variations of a product by adding input controls input options to a product s page An example of the variation of a product is the same product with different colors or sizes In this case a customized field must be added by you to enable the customer to select the required color or size Tip If you want to track the quantity that is sold of each variant of the product you must create a separate product for each variant of the product and group them in the product of type Configurable and not use the variations options described here 17 Setting Up Your Catalog To create v
318. t the Conditions option in the panel on the left to display the page shown in Figure 184 Catalog Price Rule New Rule gt Back Ed Seo Rule Information Conditions Conditions leave blank for all products Actions lf ALL ofthese conditions are TRUE Figure 184 Specifying Rule Conditions 2 The first rule appears by default If ALL these Conditions are TRUE It specifies whether the rules that you define must all be met or if any of them can be met AND or OR in order to trigger the rule s action In our example we wanted the discount to take effect when the product is a T shirt and when the T shirt costs over 20 Therefore leave the word ALL in the page above 3 Click on the icon to display a selection field and select the SKU option under Product Attributes from the dropdown menu The page changes as shown in Figure 185 Catalog Price Rule New Rule Back Rule Information Conditions a Actions If ALL ofthese conditions are TRUE Lie taere Vint E ee Ree eR eee ele Figure 185 Adding a SKU Condition 4 Click on the is link to display the comparison operator drop down list shown in Figure 186 Conditions leave blank for all products FALL ofthese conditions are TRUE is nat equals or greater than equals orless than greater than less than contains does nat contain is one of is not one of Figure 186 Comparison Operator Drop down list 5 Select the is one of comparison operator 192
319. te applies Request Path Enter a unique path to identify the product or category The path can be in any format that uses URL percent encoding Examples e best valentines gift html greatest keyboard html products on sale html best products on sale now html 264 Indexing Target Path Enter a request path in one of the following formats e Custom redirect Any valid path e Category redirect o System path Unless you set up a custom path using the CMS you should leave this field unchanged By default system category paths have a format like catalog category view id category string o Custom path Any valid path e Product redirect o System path Unless you set up a custom path using the CMS you should leave this field unchanged By default system category paths have a format like catalog product view id string or catalog product view id product string category category string Custom path Any valid path Redirect type From the list click e No e Temporary 302 e Permanent 301 Magento recommends choosing this option because search engines retain the page ranking Description Enter an optional description Atthe top right corner of the page click Save The following figure shows a sample product permanent redirect that adds the URL http www example com greatest keyboard html to the English web site for a product whose ID is 159 URL Rewrite Management Add URL Rewrite Page 4 gt
320. te when they cannot find what they need on the first page Magento CE enables you to provide customers with the option to find the products that they want by making a selection from a variety of filters such as price manufacturer or any other aspect of the products as shown in Figure 80 Layered navigation information is shown on category listing pages while searching for products Show your customers what they want and you will raise conversions The example in Figure 80 shows an enabled layered navigation filter by PRICE range and COLOR SHOP BY Default Layered Navigation CURRENTLY SHOPPING BY PRICE 0 00 100 00 COLOR Red Clear All tems SHOPPING OPTIONS CATEGORY Shirts 13 Shoes 2 MANUFACTURER Mine vest 1 Stewe Madden 13 SHOE TYPE Dress 1 High Heels 2 Figure 80 Layered Navigation Setting Up Your Catalog In Magento CE two properties appear as navigation filters by default PRICE and CATEGORY Defining Layered Navigation Filters PRICE Price ranges are selected logically in order to provide another filter for navigation The ranges themselves are determined by the prices of products contained within them There are never more than ten price ranges displayed at a time and products are distributed accordingly CATEGORY If you define a category as an Anchor Category see Display Settings Tab page 81 its subcategories are displayed as layered navigation options Figure 80 sho
321. terface on the frontend requires the customer to supply the security code on the back of the card If your credit card terminal requires the security code set this option to Yes 3D Secure Card Validation Determines whether credit card validation is carried out using the 3D Secure system You must be a 3D Secure system subscriber and you must first set up the general 3D Secure configuration options in System gt Configuration gt Payment Services 5 Click Save Config to save your changes This option appears in the web store as shown in Figure 162 YOUR CHECKOUT PROGRESS Billing Address Change Test Customer Test Street 1 Test Street 2 E Test City California 90123 Payment Information United States T 123 123 1234 Check Money order Credit Card saved Shipping Address Change Name on Card Test Customer Test Street 1 Test Street 2 Credit Card Type Test City California 90123 Please Select v United States p T 123 123 1234 Credit Card Number Shipping Method Change Expiration Date Flat Rate Fixed 5 00 Month w Year v Card Verification Number Payment Method Whatis this Required Fields 6 Order Review Figure 162 Saved Credit Card Payment Method Frontend Customers who place an order in your web store and use the Saved Credit Card payment method see their card details as shown in Figure 163 Payment Information Mame onthe Card First
322. th the shipping address values A customer can edit themt if necessary Figure 158 illustrates the Order Review store page when a customer uses the PayPal Express Checkout payment method 163 Fayment Review Order Please confirm your addresses Billing Address Shipping Address FirstName Test FirstName Test Last Name User Last Name User Company Company Address 1 Main St Address 1 Main St VAT Number VAT Number City San Jose City San Jose State Province California A State Province California Zip Postal Code 13 Zip Postal Code 95131 Country United States Country United States Telephone 132323 Telephone 132323 Fax Fax Sameas shipping Shipping Method 3 Day Select 17 63 i Items in Your Shopping Cart Edit Shopping Cart PRODUCT NAME PRICE QTY SUBTOTAL Book 7 00 6 42 00 Cover Hard Book2 5 00 2 10 00 Subtotal 52 00 Shipping amp Handling United Parcel Service 3 Day Select 17 63 Grand Total 69 63 UPDATE ORDER DATA Figure 158 The Order Review page when PayPal Express Checkout payment method is used If a customer leaves the billing and shipping addresses without changes the PLACE ORDER button is enabled when the customer selects the shipping method in the Shipping Method field If the customer edits the billing or shipping address the PLACE ORDER button is disabled The customer needs to click the UPDATE ORDER DATA button first The sy
323. the Ctrl key while clicking options to select multiple countries 7 In the Sort Order field specify the position of this shipping method in relation to the other shipping methods offered to the customer Online Rates Apart from static options such as flat rates and table rates Magento CE also offers dynamic retrieval of rates from various shipping providers 153 Shipping Note Most shipping providers require that you open an account with them Consult your shipping provider for details on how to obtain API credentials To enable and configure these shipping methods expand the appropriate tabs UPS USPS FedEx or DHL and configure the settings The configuration of this method is similar to the configuration of a Flat Rate as described above The exact options depend on the service provider contact the provider for more information For example UPS rates can appear in your web store as shown in Figure 154 YOUR CHECKOUT PROGRESS Billing Address Change Test Customer Test Street 1 EJ Shipping Method Test Street 2 Test City California 90123 United Parcel Service cara States Ground 8 96 T 123 123 1234 3 Day Select 9 89 ae a 02 Shipping Address Change Next Day Air 23 17 Test Customer Test Street 1 Flat Rate Test Street 2 Fixed 5 00 Test City California 90123 United States Back T 123 123 1234 Figure 154 UPS Shipping Options Offering Free Shipping Tip Free shipping per product
324. the FTP connection After the rollback you are redirected to the login page to log in to the Admin Panel Refresh cache types and rebuild required indexes This can be done under System gt Cache Management and System gt Index Management respectively Important note Use the Rollback functionality with caution Ccustomers who are in the process of checking out when you start the rollback may not be able to complete the checkout 24 Keeping Your Store Healthy Limiting Access to the Backup and Rollback Functionality Access to the Backups and Rollback functionality management can be restricted by configuring user permissions for Backups and Rollback resources of the Admin Panel for an admin role Role permissions are configured under System gt Permissions gt Roles gt desired role See Figure 245 for illustration of a role permission tree on the Role Information page Role Information Edit Role Administrators Role Info le aaa T Role Users Role Scopes Al Le Roles Resources Resource Access Custom Resources Eg Sales Dashboard E E Catalog a El Customers E E Promotions E Newsletter Ea FCMS a Reports a2 E System E F Magento Connect 1 Custom Variables GE My Account a2 F Tools Compilation S24 E Backups 53 Rollback Ea Mobile AN Global Search Figure 245 Defining access permissions to the Backup and Rollback functionality To restrict access to the Backup a
325. the No value in this field After defining the coupon as described above select the products for which the coupon is valid In our example the coupon discount applies to clogs Define a condition that applies to the SKU of clogs as shown in Figure 194 IfALL ofthese conditions are TRUE SKU is one of cn_3 cn cn_4 cn_5 cn_6 cn Page 1 of1 pages View 20 perpage Total 11 records found Reset Fitter J Search a ID SKU Product Hame Any gt clog Iv 29 cn_3 CN Clogs Beach Garden Clog Iv 83 cn CN Clogs Beach Garden Clog IV 84 cn_4 CN Clogs Beach Garden Clog v 85 cn_5 CN Clogs BeachiGarden Clog IV 86 cn_6 CN Clogs Beach Garden Clog IV 87 cn CN Clogs Beach Garden Clog IV 88 cn_ms CN Clogs Beach Garden Clog IV 89 cn_mg CN Clogs Beach Garden Clog v 90 cn_mi0 CN Clogs BeachiGarden Clog IV 91 cn_m11 CN Clogs Beach Garden Clog Iv 92 cn_m12 CN Clogs Beach Garden Clog Figure 194 Specifying Products to Apply the Discount To 8 Click the Save Rule button 198 Promotions Example Defining a Buy 2 Get 1 Free Promotion This section describes how to create another discount coupon with a Buy 2 get 1 free promotion In this example the web store is trying to push a digital camera as a family deal This is a Shopping Cart Price rule To define a Buy 2 get 1 free promotion 1 Define the Coupon Information as described in Shopping Cart Price Rules page 195 but leave the Coupon drop down list selecte
326. the following steps then the tax is only displayed if there is a tax rule that matches the tax origin or if Magento detects that the customer address matches the tax rule which happens after a customer creates an account logs in or uses the Tax and Shipping estimation tool in the cart 15 Expand the Price Display Settings tab to select how prices for products shipping are displayed in the catalog including tax excluding tax or both 16 Expand the Shopping Cart Display Settings section to select how taxes and prices are shown for products and in a shopping cart according to the requirements legal and otherwise of your store as shown in Figure 135 Shopping Cart Display Settings Display Prices Excluding Tax STORE VIEW Display Subtotal Excluding Tax STORE VIEW Display Shipping Amount Excluding Tax STORE VIEW le ie Be Display Gift Wrapping Prices Excluding Tax STORE VIEW Display Printed Card Prices Excluding Tax STORE VIEW Include Tax In Grand Total No STORE WEW STORE VEW aoga Display Full Tax Summary No Display Zero Jax Subtotal No STORE VIEW Figure 135 Shopping Cart Tax Display Settings 17 Expand the Orders Invoices Credit Memos Display Settings tab to select how prices and taxes are displayed in orders invoices and credit memos 18 Expand the Fixed Product Taxes tab to specify the behavior of fixed per product taxes such as the European DEEE WEEE Wast
327. the settings on this tab are controlled by the Inventory configuration settings System gt Configuration gt Inventory To override these configuration settings for this product clear the appropriate Use Config Settings check box 1 Select the Inventory option in the left panel to display the Inventory tab as shown in Figure 103 Manage Stock GLOBAL Use Config Settings Qty 0 GLOBAL Qty for Item s Status to become GLOBAL Out of Stock Use Config Settings Minimum Qty Allowed in GLOBAL Shopping Cart Maximum Qty Allowed in Shopping Cart Qty Uses Decimals Use Config Settings Use Config Settings No Backorders GLOBAL Use Config Settings Notify for Quantity Below GLOBAL Use Config Settings Enable Qty Increments GLOBAL Use Config Settings Stock Availability Out of Stock GLOBAL Figure 103 Inventory Tab 2 In the Manage Stock field select Yes to specify that all inventory options are available for this single product or select No to specify that you do not want to manage product inventory in this case the product is permanently available in the store to your customers 3 In the Qty field specify how many items of this product you have in stock In the Qty for Item s Status to become Out of Stock field specifies that if stock quantity falls below this level then the product becomes Out of Stock 5 The Minimum Maximum Qty Allowed in Shopping Cart fields enable you to limit availa
328. to appear in this poll 11 Click the Save Poll button Customers can answer a poll only once and you can view the results in the backend by clicking on the row for the poll in the Poll Manager page If you have multiple polls open they will cycle randomly in the frontend meaning customer may see a different poll every time they refresh a frontend page Editing a Poll After a poll has been created you can edit it by clicking on the roll for the poll in the Poll Manager page CMS gt Polls selecting the Poll Manager option from the CMS menu To close the poll so that it no longer appears in the store change the Status field to Closed in the Poll information section To see the votes that have been tallied for each answer click the Poll Answers option in the left panel to display the number of votes in the Vote Count field as shown in Figure 239 Assigned Answers Answer Title Layered Navigation x Delete Votes Count 1889 Answer Title Price Rules Delete Votes Count 1340 Answer Title Cate g or ry M anage ment Delete Votes Count 724 Answer Title Compare Products Delete Votes Count 762 Figure 239 Poll Results Backend 15 Monitoring and Improving the Web Store This chapter describes how to monitor and improve your web store by using reports search terms synonyms redirects and Google Analytics Reports This section describes some of the most important reports in Magento
329. to site search result page Improved site search to utilize MySQL fulltext search Added support for fixed taxes on product level Upgraded Zend Framework to the latest stable version 1 7 2 Figure 61 Messages Inbox Page You can mark selected messages as Read so that they do not appear again when you log in You can also Remove marked messages so that they are permanently deleted 60 Introducing the Backend Supervising Web Store Activities The Dashboard Figure 62 is the first page to be displayed by default after you log in It can also be accessed by clicking Dashboard on the Admin Panel top menu Dashboard View Statistics for All Websites N Lifetime Sales 6 039 89 Average Orders 262 60 Orders Amounts ustomer item Grand Total 1 440 84 1 220 42 jeff qa 1 220 42 1 10 72 1 1 07 Search Term Results Humber of Uses test 4 6 a 3 Revenue Tax Shipping Quantity 6 039 89 395 29 135 00 23 Search Term Results Number of Uses test 4 6 a 7 3 Bestsellers Product Hame Price Quantity Ordered Figure 62 Dashboard This page shows you basic information and statistics for managing your web store The following describes the options in this page Chart Orders tab The Orders tab in the center of the page shows a graph that indicates the quantity of orders being processed in your web store for each point on the time scale within the specified range The range is selected in the Select R
330. tomer groups 220 pricing 213 Customer Relations 56 customer generated content 231 Customers Tagged 110 Customization 8 customizing email templates 181 D Dashboard 61 Database 9 13 database backup 246 Default Layered Navigation 85 266 Demo Web Store Accessing 23 Descriptions 102 Downloadable Products 76 111 Downloading Magento 10 Sample Data 11 97 eco tax 140 Emails 56 Addresses 29 Credit Memo 229 Customizing 181 Refund 229 Sales 31 Shipment 227 Templates 182 exporting product data 124 Extending Magento 252 Extension Key Magento 253 File names 12 file system backup 246 Filtering Products 39 Filters Navigation 84 Finding Products 38 fixed product tax FPT 140 flat rate shipping 151 Footer 29 50 51 Free Shipping 154 Frontend 70 Definition 4 G General Information Categories 79 Google Analytics 243 Grid View 44 group price 213 Grouped Product 116 H Header 28 50 51 Healthy Store 245 Help 273 Hold 64 HTML Head 26 Images 100 importing product data 124 Inbox 60 Index Management page 259 indexing 259 Information Page 64 Installing 10 13 Inventory 106 Invoice 66 224 Key Magento 253 Language Emails 182 layered navigation by price 86 Layered Navigation 84 License 3 List View 44 Log in 23 51 Appendix VAT ID Validation M Magento Extension Key 253 Introduction 3 Managing customer r
331. tomers activity on the site 4 Click Save Config to save your changes Store Contacts Configuration This section describes how to configure store email addresses that are used for internal and external email communications and the Contact Us feature Web Store Emails The Store Email Address page of the system configuration enables you to specify email addresses and contact names to be used when sending email to customers upon registration and at all steps of the order lifecycle These email address are also used for sending error reports to the store administrator 29 Basic Contiguration To define web store email addresses i In the Admin panel select System gt Configuration gt GENERAL gt Store Email Address Here you can configure the various email addresses used for sending emails from your web store to your customers Store Email Addresses Save Config General Contact O Sender Name Owner STORE VIEW Sender Email owner example com STORE VIEW Sales Representative Sender Name Sales STORE VIEW Sender Email sales example com STORE VIEW Customer Support Sender Name CustomerSupport STORE VIEW Sender Email support example com STORE VIEW Custom Email 1 v Custom Email 2 O Figure 21 Store Email Addresses Page In the Current Configuration Scope drop down list in the left upper left corner select the scope for which you want these configurations to appl
332. ts and categories with a URL that ends with html You can optionally change both the product and category URL suffix to any alphanumeric string The examples throughout this section use the default suffix html1 To optionally change the product and category URLs 1 Log in to the Admin Panel as an administrator Click System gt Configuration In the CATALOG group click Catalog In the right pane expand Search Engine Optimizations Enter valid values in the Product URL Suffix and Category URL Suffix fields oe eo E Valid values are alphanumeric characters a z A Z 0 9 or the underscore character o 7 Click Save Config at the top of the page Indexing Getting Started with URL Rewrites To get started 1 Log in to the Admin Panel as an administrator 2 Click Catalog gt URL Redirects The following figure shows a sample URL Redirect Management page URL Rewrite Management Add URL Rewrite Page 1 of 42 pages View 20 per page Total 831 records found ID 4 Store View Type ID Path Request Path Target Path Options Action 831 Main Website System product 166 8 electronics cell phones htc ttouch _ catalog product view id Edit Main Store diamond html M66 categor 8 German 830 Main Website System product 166 htc touch diamond html catalog product Edit Main Store Niew lid 166 German 829 Main Website System product 165 27 electronics computers build catalog productWview id Edit Main Store your own my co
333. turer s Suggested Retail Price fields See Figure 204 Promotions Prices Create New Attribute Price WEBSITE USD Cost WEBSITE USD Tier Price Website Customer Group Oty Price Action Add Tier Special Price WEBSITE USD Special Price From Date i E GLOBAL Special Price To Date E GLOBAL IS product available for purchase Yes vw GLOBAL with Google Checkout Apply MAP Use config ve WEBSITE Display Actual Price Use config w WEBSITE Manufacturers Suggested Retail WEBSITE Price USD Figure 204 MAP settings on product level When MAP is applied globally all prices on the frontend are hidden the Click for price links appear instead If you specify the Manufacturer s Suggested Retail Price MSRP it will appear crossed out See Figure 205 A ata ot Little panda toy Cuddle bear toy Teddy bear toy Excl Tax 25 00 Click for price 44 00 Click for price Incl Tax 25 00 ADD TO CART ADD TO CART ADD TO CART Figure 205 MAP is applied for the Cuddle bear toy and Teddy bear toy products For the Teddy bear toy the MSRP is specified and it appears crossed out The way the actual price is displayed depends on the Display Actual Price setting The following options are available On Gesture default value Clicking the Click for price link opens a pop up window containing the actual price and the information message The actual
334. u leave this field blank Magento CE will automatically generate a URL with the name of the category upon creation of the category If you enter a value here manually you cannot use spaces in this field The URL key field is not displayed for root categories For Thumbnail Image use the Browse button to select and upload a thumbnail image to represent the category Specify a description in the Description text box This description is presented on the frontend 9 Setting Up Your Catalog Note You can use HTML tags in this text box Alternatively click the WYSIWYG Editor button to open a full function HTML editor The What You See Is What You Get WYSIWYG Editor includes a spelling checker for which you need to download and install a plug in for your browser The Image field is used for a category image Click the Browse button next to the field to select the file This image will appear in the frontend for each category s page between the category name and the content In the Page Title field specify the title of the page which will be displayed on the browser tab header when the customer opens this category page In the Meta Keywords and Meta Description text boxes specify the keywords and description for search engines to use for this category when indexing your site Select Yes for Include in Navigation Menu so that the category will appear in the navigation menu on the frontend 10 Click Save Category to save you
335. uct with these tags clogs 1 shoes 1 tag 1 Sandals 1 blue 1 shoes 1 small 1 badassness 1 holeys 1 blue 1 beach 1 Add Your Tags Use spaces to separate tags Use single quotes for phrases Figure 32 Adding a Tag to a Product 41 Introducing the Frontend 42 Searching The top right of your web store page provides a search field in which a customer can type all or part of the name of a product or its attributes in order to find it as shown in Figure 33 Search Field Search entire store here Search Default welcome msq Figure 33 Search Tool Comparing Products Magento CE enables customers to compare two or more selected products as follows 1 A customer first clicks the Add to Compare link provided for each product that he she wants to compare as shown in Figure 34 The Only Children Paisley T Shirt 100 00 As low as 70 00 Add Figure 34 Add to Compare Link 2 After selecting all the products to be compared the customer then clicks the Compare Items button in the COMPARE PRODUCTS area as shown in Figure 35 COMPARE PRODUCTS 2 ITEMS The Get Up Kids Band Camp Lx Pullower Hoodie The Only Children Paisley T Shirt 69 Compare ltems Clear All Figure 35 Introducing the Frontend Compare Products Area The Compare Products page is then displayed in a pop up window as shown in Figure 36 Compare
336. ue O Status Pending v Visible In Main Website Main Store French German Nickname test Summary of review Great Product Review Good quality and interesting print Figure 231 Review Details Page 3 You can modify the review if required 4 In the Status field change the Pending status to Approved or Not Approved Managing Tags Tags can be assigned by customers directly in the frontend A tag describes a specific property of a product such as Cool Valentine s gift and so on Popular Tags serve as a descriptor that customers can select in order to view the products to which a specific tag has been assigned Figure 232 shows an example of various tags as they appear in the web store POPULAR TAGS Smp bluetooth Camera cell phone COOL easyshare furniture laptop light outdoor pda phone Sex sleek smartphone sony sports tablet trendy waio Wier All Figure 232 Tags Display in the Frontend 234 Managing Customer Generated Content Adding Tags The number of tags that can be added to a product is unlimited and they can later be renamed or deleted To add one or more tags to a product the customer scrolls down on the product page to the Product Tags section as shown in Figure 233 Product Tags Add Your Tags 3 Tock amp roll t shirt red Add Tags Use spaces to separate tags Use single quotes for phrases Figure 233 Adding Product Tags Frontend
337. ules 1 From the Admin panel select Sales gt Tax gt Manage Tax Rules 2 Add new tax rules as shown in the table below Name VAT Standard Customer Tax Class Retail Customer Product Tax Class VAT Standard Tax Rate VAT Standard Rate Name VAT Reduced VAT Standard VAT Reduced Customer Tax Class Retail Customer Product Tax Class VAT Reduced Tax Rate VAT Reduced Rate 3 Click the Save Rule button to save your VAT tax rules Step 5 Apply Tax Classes to Products To apply example VAT classes to products 1 From the Admin panel select Catalog gt Manage Products 2 Select a product from your catalog to edit 3 In the Product Information tab in the General section find the Tax Class option 4 From the list select the VAT class that applies to the product 5 When finished click the Save button Compound Taxes For compound taxes the total cost of a product or service is taxed at one rate and then the total of that amount including the first tax amount is taxed a second time Compound tax is also known as stacked tax 147 axes For example in a regular tax calculation involving two tax rules each rule is applied separately to the product subtotal and the taxes are added together to calculate the total tax which is then added to the product subtotal to calculate the grand total 50 oOo Product Price 100 oO Subtotal i 00 ental tax Pigeon S 16 oo Total Taxes fio
338. unt O Merchant Country United States WEBSITE lfnot specified Default Country from General Config will be used Email Associated with PayPal WEBSITE Merchant Account Start accepting payments via PayPal Select a PayPal Solution Help Express Checkout Add an Express Checkout button to your existing shopping cart for quick View Demo Learn More and easy credit card payments PayPal handles all payment processing Website Payments Standard PayPal processes all of your orders and you get paid View Demo Learn More C Website Payments Pro Process credit cards directly on your website with PayPal s all in View Demo Learn More one online payment processing solution C Website Payments Pro Payflow Edition includes Express Checkout Accept PayPal payments in your shopping cart PayPal will process your credit card payments through the Payflow Pro Gateway C Payflow Pro Gateway Don t have a PayPal merchant account You can still accept credit Learn More card payments through the Payflow Pro Gateway Express Checkout Accept payments without customers leaving your website Many popular web hosting services and shopping carts come with the Payfllow payment gateways builtin so they are easy to setup C Payflow Link for USA and Canada Quick setup service lets your customers securely Learn More complete transactions Figure 156 PayPal Page 3 In the Merchant Account section select the country an
339. ve image to wiew full picture Love red You ll love these pieces of handmade modem u lt furniture Figure 118 Grouped Product When creating a Grouped Product the Associated Products page enables you to specify which products are included in a group as well as the default quantity for each and their position order on the page LH Name SKU Price Default Qty Position Yes From From From To To To i Couch E 599 99 52 Chair 1112 129 99 Si Ottoman 1111 299 99 Figure 119 Associated Products in a Grouped Product Note There is no global price for grouped products Their price is controlled only by the individual elements that you purchase Configurable Product Associated Products Tab Configurable products must be associated with simple products using attributes that a customer can select from a configurable product page This means that when a shirt is offered in three sizes then three simple products must be assigned to the configurable product one for each size The configurable product appears in the store with a section that provides customers with options such as the Size option shown in Figure 120 TIZ Setting Up Your Catalog Coalesce Functioning n Impatience T Shirt Email ta a Friend week SReview s Add Your Review Availability In stack 15 00 Add to vvishlist Add to Compare Quick Overview 6 1 oz 100 preshrunk heavayveight cotton Double click on above image to
340. view top psid extensions gt Y Most Downloaded Recently Added Most Reviewed Enterprise Ed as AAT se lt Vel mychitily free jewelry_store Figure 248 Magento Connect Home Page Various free extensions are provided from this page Billing amp Invoicing 70 Catalog 738 Checkout 754 Content Management 116 Core 25 Customer Service 739 Data 76 Design amp Themes 1700 Gifting 34 Integration 752 Internationalization amp Localization 733 Merchandizing 61 Migration tools 112 Mobile 27 Optimization 87 al The following example shows how to install the iDEAL core payment extension that adds a new payment method to the store called iDEAL Note There are also commercial extensions available for purchase on their publishers pages The installation process for each one may vary Please consult the extension author for installation instructions 232 Keeping Your Store Healthy To install a free extension i Go to the MagentoConnect page on the MagentoCommerce site at http www magentocommerce com Browse through the extensions using the filters provided in the panel on the right Go into the details page of the desired extension to display a page similar to Figure 249 IDEAL extension Developed by Magento Core View Developer Profile View Extensions by this Developer Brief Description iDEAL payment integration Read More
341. voices shipments and credit memos and editing and cancelling orders Sales Order When an order is created in a Magento CE web store either in the frontend or in the backend a sales order record is created to record this transaction This sales order can be seen in the orders list by selecting the Orders option from the Sales menu in the backend This is only a temporary record Payment has not yet been processed and the order can still be canceled Invoice An invoice is a record of the receipt of payment for an order Note In some cases payment is automatically received during the creation of an Invoice Creating an invoice converts the temporary sales order into a permanent record of an Order which can no longer be canceled Multiple invoices can be created for a single order each containing as much or as few of the purchased products that you specify Shipment A shipment is a record of the products in an order that have been shipped As with invoices multiple shipments can be associated with a single order until all of the products in the order are shipped Credit Memo A credit memo is a record of a refund A product cannot be refunded until it has been paid which means that it has been invoiced This means that you are not able to create a credit memo before an invoice has been created The credit memo serves as a record of a refund but it is not a record of the actual return of funds to the customer Creat
342. web store as shown in Figure 165 E Payment Information Check Money order Make Check payable to TestCompany Send Check to Test Address 1 Test Address 2 Test City CA 90456 United States of America Credit Card saved Back Required Fiekis Payment YOUR CHECKOUT PROGRESS Billing Address Change Test Customer Test Street 1 Test Street 2 Test City California 90123 United States T 123 123 1234 Shipping Address Change Test Customer Test Street 1 Test Street 2 Test City California 90123 United States T 123 123 1234 Shipping Method Change Flat Rate Fixed 5 00 Figure 165 Check Money Order Payment Method Frontend Other Payment Methods There are numerous other payment methods available in the backend and others can be obtained from Magento Connect http www magentocommerce com magento connect Most of the configuration options for these payment methods are similar to the options described in this chapter Other configuration options are specific to each payment method and you should consult the information you received when you subscribed to a given payment method to understand how these options work 7 11 Design and Content This chapter describes how to customize the look and feel of your web store by applying easy to use options that are provided in the Magento backend Overview Magento provides a variety of simple to use design options th
343. whose billing address is in one of these selected countries Debug Mode In the Debug Mode field specify whether communications with the payment system will be written into the log file The log file for PayPal Payments Advanced is payments_payflow_advanced log In the API Integration Settings field set configure the following In the Partner User Vendor and Password fields specify your PayPal Payments Advanced account credentials Test Mode The test mode helps testing the integration of Magento with the PayPal payment system Transactions that are submitted while the account is in the test mode are not actually submitted to the credit card and electronic check processing networks and credit card or bank accounts are not actually charged Therefore these transactions do not have valid transaction IDs When you finish testing the integration project the test mode must be turned off Use Proxy Decide whether the proxy server is used for establishing the connection between Magento and the PayPal payment system If you select Yes two additional fields for specifying the proxy host and port are displayed Click Save Config in the upper right corner of the page to save the settings Setting the PayPal Payments Advanced Account Options on the PayPal Manager Website To make the necessary settings for the PayPal Advanced account take the following steps 1 vas Log in to https manager paypal com Navigate to Service Setting
344. ws that the first filter is CATEGORY and it features two options Shirts and Shoes In this example Shirts and Shoes are subcategories of the category that is represented by this layered navigation block The additional filters in Figure 80 are Manufacturer and Shoe Type These are product attributes that have been selected as filterable This is defined in the Use in Layered Navigation field under Catalog gt Attributes as described on page 89 There are two types of filterable attributes Filterable with results Links appear only for values where the number of results the number in parentheses next to each value is greater than zero Filterable no results Links appear for all values regardless of the number of results OD Setting Up Your Catalog 86 In order for an attribute to appear as a layered navigation filter the Catalog Input Type for Storeowner must be Dropdown Multiple Select or Price This controls the number of possible filter options and makes them consistent Price Layered Navigation The Price Layered Navigation algorithm enables you to create price ranges so that products are evenly distributed among ranges You can also split each range iteratively The enhanced configuration controls for the Price Layered Navigation feature were introduced in Magento CE version 1 7 and Magento EE version 1 12 Configuring the Price Layered Navigation Algorithm The algorithm for calculating the price layered navig
345. x Classes To set up example VAT customer tax classes 1 From the Admin panel select Sales gt Tax gt Customer Tax Classes 2 Ensure that there is a customer tax class that is appropriate to use with the VAT For this example ensure that there is a customer tax class named Retail Customer If Retail Customer does not exist add it using the Add New button Step 2 Set Up Product Tax Classes To set up example VAT product tax classes 1 From the Admin panel select Sales gt Tax gt Product Tax Classes 2 Click the Add New button and add three new classes o VAT Standard VAT Reduced o VAT Zero 3 Click the Save Class button for each new class that you add Step 3 Set Up Tax Zones and Rates To set up example VAT tax zones and rates 1 From the Admin panel select Sales gt Tax gt Manage Tax Zones amp Rates 2 For this example you can choose to remove the U S tax rates or leave them as they are 3 Click the Add New Tax Rate button Add new rates as shown in the table below VAT Standard e Tax Identifier VAT Standard e Country and State United Kingdom e Rate Percent 20 00 146 Taxes e Tax Identifier VAT Reduced e Country and State United Kingdom e Rate Percent 5 00 VAT Reduced 4 Click the Save Rate button for each new rate that you add Step 4 Set Up Tax Rules A tax rule is a combination of a customer tax class a product tax class and a tax rate To set up example VAT r
346. y All fields on this page can have different values for each store view In each Sender Name field specify the name of the sender or department from which the emails are sent In the Sender Email field specify the email address used for sending the emails Click Save Config to save your changes Note See Customizing Transactional Emails page 181 for more information about emails Contacts These options define the email to which customers send requests when using the Contact Us option at the bottom of the pages of your web store To define your web store contact information iF 30 In the Admin Panel select System gt Configuration gt GENERAL gt Contacts to display the Contacts page as shown in Figure 22 7 Basic Configuration Contacts Save Config Contact Us A Enable Contact Us Yes STORE VIEW Email Options A Send Emails To hello example com STORE VIEW Email Sender Custom Email 2 STORE VIEW Email Template Contact Form Default Template from Locale v STORE VIEW Figure 22 Contacts Page In the Current Configuration Scope drop down list in the left upper left corner select the scope for which you want these configurations to apply In the Enable Contact Us drop down list select Yes to enable customers to contact you by email with the Contact Us link or select No to disable this communication method In the Send Emails To field specify the email that is used for receiving
347. y k Specify the comment text in the Comment text box If you want to send the comment to the customer by email select the Notify Customer by Email check box If you want to make the comment visible in the order view on the frontend select the Visible on Frontend check box to specify that the customer is sent a copy of the comments that you add in the Comment box Click Submit Comment 65 Introducing the Backend 66 All comments are stored on the Comments History page To open it click the Comments History tab on the left Invoices Page An invoice represents a confirmation of payment The Invoices page enables you to view the list of invoices generated for an order You can generate an invoice individually or together with a shipment If the products in an order are shipped in multiple shipments then an invoice is generated for each shipment for the products in that shipment Credit Memos The Credit Memos page displays a list of the refunds given for products in this order You can click on a credit memo in the list to display the refund details Shipments Page A shipment is a record of the products in an order that have been shipped As with invoices multiple shipments can be created per order The Shipment page displays a list of the shipments sent for products in this order You can click on a shipment in the list to display the shipment details On the Shipment page you can also add tracking numbers that wer
348. y T Shirt shopping cart The Recently Added items s area shows a list of the last three items added to your shopping cart BZ Introducing the Frontend Clearing My Cart A customer who wants to remove all items from the shopping cart can do so by clicking the Clear Shipping Cart button on the Shopping Cart page see Figure 50 Shopping Cart Sasss Paypaly ox The safer easier way to pay PRODUCT NAME UNIT PRICE QTY SUBTOTAL REMOVE m Q e Sierra Nevada Socks 10 00 1 10 00 Brand Bigfoot Size Large Continue Shopping CLEAR SHOPPING CART UPDATE SHOPPING CART Figure 50 Clearing the Shopping Cart Checking Out The My Cart area also provides a Checkout button see Figure 51 that takes a customer to the first step of the one page checkout process see Figure 52 d MY CART There i 1 item in your cart Cart Subtotal 15 00 Checkout Figure 51 My Cart Area EJ Checkout method YOUR CHECKOUT PROGRESS B ill ir gA aadress CHECKOUT AS A GUEST OR REGISTER LOGIN Shic nipping Address Register with us for future convenience Already registered Checkout as Guest Please log in below eckout as Gues Register Email Address Register and save time Register with us for future convenience e Fast and easy check out e Easy access to your order history and status Password Required Fiekis Login Figure 52 Checking Out Most of the functionality of the checkout process is ava
349. y are shown as a list or grid table their sort order and the filter that is used Categories The products in the web store are grouped into categories which are displayed in a bar near the top of the web store page Each product can be assigned to one or more categories 38 Introducing the Frontend Categories can have multiple levels of subcategories A customer can navigate to a subcategory using a category s dropdown menu Figure 27 shows the five categories on the Magento CE demo store and the subcategories under Electronics Cell Phones Cameras and Computers Ebooks Furniture Apparel Music Cell Phones Cameras Computers tie ee ill ee Digital Cameras Figure 27 Categories and Subcategories A category or a subcategory can each have a product list or show a landing page that features some products Figure 28 shows a category that has products Home Apparel Apparel SHOPPING OPTIONS CATEGORY Shirts 4 Shoes 7 Hoodies 1 PRICE 0 00 5100 00 8 100 00 200 00 4 COLOR Black 1 Blue 1 Brown 2 Gray 2 Green 3 tems 1 to 9 of 12 total Page 1 2 gt MY CART You have no items in your shopping cart l COMPARE PRODUCTS You have no items to compare BACK TO SCHOOL Keep your eyes open for our special Back to School items and save BIG vi per page Sort by Best Value vt View as Grid List amp
350. y open the backend by clicking the Go to Backend button on the last page of the Magento Installation Wizard shown above We recommend that you bookmark this page for easy access Tip The process described above sets you up with a single website single store and three store views for different languages This is most probably all you need However if you would like to create a more sophisticated web store with multiple options then see Setting Up Your Store Hierarchy page 127 21 3 Basic Configuration This chapter describes how to configure the basic information for your web store The other aspects of your web store to be configured are described in the subsequent chapters of this guide Accessing the Backend All of the basic configuration tasks are performed in the Magento CE backend The following describes how to access and log in to the Magento CE backend Tip Immediately after you install Magento CE you can easily open the backend by clicking the Go to Backend button on the last page of the Magento Installation Wizard We recommend that you bookmark the backend page for easy access To access the Magento backend administration environment 1 Use a standard web browser to navigate to the backend by entering the URL that you specified in the Magento Installation Wizard with the addition of the suffix admin or the one that you specified during installation For example if you specified mywebstore com as the b
351. ystem Requirements 9 T Tags Adding 235 Approving 235 Definition 41 Managing 234 Tax Class 98 135 Customer 135 Tax Zones 136 Taxation Settings 131 taxes compound 147 eco tax 140 fixed product tax 140 management rules 138 Value Added Tax VAT 145 WEEE tax 140 Taxes 129 Testing Environment 249 Theme 174 Tier Pricing 204 tracking coupon code usage 202 2al Appendix VAT ID Validation Tracking Number 227 U Updating Magento CE 250 Uploading To the Server 12 Up sell Products 47 185 186 URL Product 99 URL rewrites 261 Was Ss V Value Added Tax VAT 145 Value Added Tax VAT 275 ID validation 275 W website creating 127 WEEE tax 140 Weight 98 Wish List 51

Magento Community Edition User Guide v. 1.8.1

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents